Jordan School District Page 1 Secondary Mathematics 2
Secondary Mathematics 2 Table of Contents
Unit 1: Extending the Number System Cluster 1: Extending Properties of Exponents
(N.RN.1 and N.RN.2) ......................................................................................... 3
Cluster 2: Using Properties of Rational and Irrational Numbers
(N.RN.3) ........................................................................................................... 10
Cluster 4: Performing Arithmetic Operations on Polynomials
(A.APR.1) ......................................................................................................... 21
Unit 2: Quadratic Functions and Modeling Cluster 1 and 2: Interpreting and Analyzing Functions
(F.IF.4, F.IF.5, F.IF.7 and F.IF.9) ..................................................................... 26
Cluster 1 and 5: Quadratic Functions and Modeling
(F.IF.6 and F.LE.3) ........................................................................................... 42
Factoring ....................................................................................................................... 48
Cluster 2: Forms of Quadratic Functions
(F.IF.8a, A.SSE.1a, and A.SSE.3a and b) ......................................................... 57
Cluster 3 (Unit 6): Translating between descriptions and equations for a conic section
(G.GPE.2) ......................................................................................................... 67
Honors H.5.1 (G.GPE.3) .................................................................................. 73
Cluster 3: Building Functions that Model Relationships between Two Quantities
(F.BF.1) ............................................................................................................. 90
Cluster 4: Transformations and Inverses
(F.BF.3 and F.BF.4) ........................................................................................ 104
Unit 3: Expressions and Equations Cluster 1: Interpreting the Structure of Expressions
(A.SSE.2) ........................................................................................................ 120
Cluster 3 (Unit 1): Performing Arithmetic Operations with Complex Numbers
(N.CN.1 and N.CN.2) ..................................................................................... 124
Honors H.2.1: (N.CN.3) ................................................................................. 129
Cluster 4 and 5: Solving Equations in One Variable with Complex Solutions
(A.REI.4 and N.CN.7) .................................................................................... 134
Honors (N.CN.8 and N.CN.9) ........................................................................ 145
Cluster 3: Writing and Solving Equations and Inequalities in One Variable
(A.CED.1 and A.CED.4) ................................................................................ 148
Honors H.1.2 .................................................................................................. 162
Cluster 3: Writing and Graphing Equations in Two Variables
(A.CED.2) ....................................................................................................... 172
Cluster 6: Solving Systems of Equations
(A.REI.7) ......................................................................................................... 181
Honors (A.REI.8 and A.REI.9) ...................................................................... 186
Cluster 2: Forms and Uses of Exponential Functions
(F.IF.8b, A.SSE.1b, and A.SSE.3c) ................................................................ 196
Jordan School District Page 2 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 4: Applications of Probability Cluster 1: Understand independence and conditional probability and use them to
interpret data.
(S.CP.1) ..................................................................................................... 213
Cluster 2: Use the rules of probability to compute probabilities of compound events in a
uniform probability model.
(S.CP.2 through S.CP.7) ........................................................................... 215
Cluster 3: Use probability to evaluate outcomes of decisions.
Honors (S.CP.8, S.CP.9, S.MD.6 and S.MD.7) ......................................... 224
Unit 5: Similarity, Right Triangle Trigonometry, and Proof Cluster 1: Understand similarity in terms of similarity transformations
(G.SRT.1, G.SRT.2, and G.SRT.3) .......................................................... 239
Cluster 2: Prove geometric theorems.
(G.CO.9) ................................................................................................... 248
(G.CO.10) ................................................................................................. 254
(G.CO.11) ................................................................................................. 263
Cluster 3: Prove theorems involving similarity.
(G.SRT.4 and G.SRT.5) ............................................................................ 270
Cluster 4: Use coordintes to prove simple geometric theorems algebraically.
(G.GPE.6) ................................................................................................. 275
Cluster 5: Define trigonometric ratios and solve problems involving right triangles.
(G.SRT.6, G.SRT.7, and G.SRT.8) .......................................................... 282
Honors (N.CN.3, N.CN.4, N.CN.5, and N.CN.6) .................................... 289
Cluster 6: Prove and apply trigonometric identities.
(F.TF.8) ..................................................................................................... 301
Honors (H.5.6) Unit Circle ....................................................................... 304
Honors (H.5.7) Trigonometry Proofs ....................................................... 317
Honors (F.TF.9 and H.5.9) ....................................................................... 324
Unit 6: Circles With and Without Coordinates Cluster 1: Understand and apply theorems about circles.
(G.C.1, G.C.2, G.C.3, and G.C.4 (Honors)) ............................................. 334
Cluster 2: Find arc length and areas of sectors of circles.
(G.C.5) ...................................................................................................... 353
Cluster 3: Translate between the geometric description and the equation for a conic
section.
(G.GPE.1) ................................................................................................. 360
Cluster 4: Use coordinates to prove simple geometric theorems algebraically.
(G.GPE.4) ................................................................................................. 365
Cluster 5: Explain volume formulas and use them to solve problems.
(G.GMD.1, G.GMD.2 (Honors), and G.GMD.3) .................................... 368
Selected Answers ............................................................................................. 386
Jordan School District Page 4 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 1 Cluster 1 (N.RN.1 & N.RN.2):
Extending Properties of Exponents
Cluster 1: Extending properties of exponents
1.1.1 Define rational exponents and extend the properties of integer exponents to
rational exponents
1.1.2 Rewrite expressions, going between rational and radical form
VOCABULARY
If the exponent on a term is of the formm
n, where 0n , then the number is said to have a
rational exponent. 1
38 is an example of a constant with a rational exponent.
Properties of
Exponents
(All bases are non-zero)
Properties of Rational
Exponents
(All bases are non-zero)
Examples
a b a bx x x
p p rr
q q ssx x x
3 193 1 15 4 5 204x x x x
aa b
b
xx
x
pp rqq s
r
s
xx
x
23
32 13 5 15
35
xx x
x
0 1x
Students should have this
property memorized.
0
0
However
: 1
Therefore: 1
aa a
a
a
a
xx x
x
x
x
x
1a
ax
x
1p
q
p
q
x
x
25
25
1 x
x
n n nxy x y
p pp
q qqxy x y
3 3 34 4 4xy x y
n
m m nx x
rp p rsq q sx x
2
33 2 2 134 34 4 2x x x x
Jordan School District Page 5 Secondary Mathematics 2
m m
m
x x
y y
ppqq
p
q
x x
yy
2 23 3
23
x x
y y
1m m n
n n m
x x y
y y x
1m m an n b
a a mb b n
x x y
y y x
31 12 2 4
3 3 124 4
1
x x y
xy y
Practice Exercises A
Simplify each expression using only positive exponents.
1. 1 2 1/45 5 2.
21/3
1/3
12
4
3. 1/3
1
k
4. 2
1 2 1/38 5 5. 3/2y 6. 2/13/2 zz
7. 1/4
4 42 3
8. 63/24 9. 0z
10. 1/3
7
7 11.
3/1
3/2
y
y 12.
4
3
7
x
x
Definition
A radical can also be written as a term with a rational exponent. For example, 1
nnx x where n
is an integer and 0n . In general, m
n mnx x where m and n are integers and 0n .
m
mnnx x
can alsobewritten asm
mnnx x
The denominator of the rational
exponent becomes the index of the
radical.
Jordan School District Page 6 Secondary Mathematics 2
Rational Exponent
Form
Radical Form
1920x
20 19x 3
2x 3x
7
3a 3 7a
Practice Exercises B
Rewrite each expression in radical form
1. 4 38
4. 3 236
7. 2 3
64
2. 3/4x
5. 3/2k
8. 5 3
8
3. 5/9a
6. 1/52x
9. 1/5
2x
Practice Exercises C
Rewrite each expression with rational exponents.
1. 3 11
4. 2
4 5
7.7 5w
2. 2
7 42
5. 6 7x
8.3 2k
3. 8
3 10
6. 3 r
9. 2
5 z
Vocabulary
For an integer n greater than 1, if na k , then a is the nth root of k.
A radical or the principal nth
root of k: k, the radicand, is a real number.
n, the index, is a positive integer greater than one.
Jordan School District Page 7 Secondary Mathematics 2
Properties of Radicals
n na a n n nab a b
n
nn
a a
b b
Vocabulary
A prime number is a whole number greater
than 1 that is only divisible by 1 and itself. In
other words, a prime number has exactly two
factors: 1 and itself.
Example:
5 1 5 prime
30 2 3 5 not prime
Division Rules For a Few Prime Numbers
A number is divisible by: If: Example:
2 The last digit is even
(0, 2, 4, 6, 8)
256 is
255 is not
3 The sum of the digits is
divisible by 3
381 (3+8+1=12 and 12÷3=4) Yes
383 (3+8+3=14 and 2
14 3 43
) No
5 The last digit is 0 or 5 175 is
809 is not
7
If you double the last digit
and subtract it from the rest
of the number and the
answer is:
0
Divisible by 7
672 (Double 2 is 4, 67 4 63 and
63 7 9 ) Yes
905 (Double 5 is 10, 90 10 80 and
380 7 11
7 ) No
Simplifying Radicals: Radicals that are simplified have:
no fractions left under the radical.
no perfect power factors in the radicand, k.
no exponents in the radicand, k, greater than
the index, n.
Jordan School District Page 8 Secondary Mathematics 2
Simplifying Radicals
Method 1:
Find Perfect Squares Under the Radical
1. Rewrite the radicand as factors that are
perfect squares and factors that are not
perfect squares.
2. Rewrite the radical as two separate
radicals.
3. Simplify the perfect square.
Example: 75
25 3
25 3
5 3
Method 2:
Use a Factor Tree
1. Work with only the radicand.
2. Split the radicand into two factors.
3. Split those numbers into two factors
until the number is a prime number.
4. Group the prime numbers into pairs.
5. List the number from each pair only
once outside of the radicand.
6. Leave any unpaired numbers inside the
radical.
Note: If you have more than one pair, multiply
the numbers outside of the radical as well as
the numbers left inside.
Example: 75
75
25 3
5 5
5 3
Method 3:
Divide by Prime Numbers
1. Work with only the radicand.
2. Using only prime numbers, divide each
radicand until the bottom number is a
prime number.
3. Group the prime numbers into pairs.
4. List the number from each pair only
once outside of the radicand.
5. Leave any unpaired numbers inside the
radical.
Note: If you have more than one pair, multiply
the numbers outside of the radical as well as
the numbers left inside.
Example: 75
5 75
5 15
3
5 3
5
Jordan School District Page 9 Secondary Mathematics 2
Method 4:
Use Exponent Rules
Example: 75
1. Rewrite the exponent as a rational
exponent. 1/275
2. Rewrite the radicand as factors that are
perfect squares and factors that are not
perfect squares.
1/2
25 3
3. Rewrite the perfect square factors with
an exponent of 2.
1/225 3
4. Split up the factors, giving each the
rational exponent.
1/2 1/225 3
5. Simplify.
1/2
5 3
6. Rewrite as a radical 5 3
Method 4 with Variables: Example:
3 7x
1. Rewrite the exponent as a rational
exponent. 7/3x
2. Rewrite the radicand as two factors.
One with the highest exponent that is
divisible by the root and the other
factor with an exponent of what is left
over.
1/36x x
3. Split up the factors, giving each the
rational exponent.
1/36 1/3x x
4. Rewrite the exponents using exponent
rules. 6/3 1/3x x
5. Simplify. 2 1/3x x
6. Rewrite as a radical 2 3x x
Practice D
Simplify each radical expression.
1. 245p
2. 380 p
3. 3 33 24x y
4. 3 4 316u v
5. 275x y
6. 3 3 364m n
7. 34 36y 8. 6 150r 9. 3 37 96m
Jordan School District Page 10 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 1 Cluster 2 (N.RN.3):
Using Properties of Rational and Irrational numbers
Cluster 1: Extending properties of exponents
1.2.1 Properties of rational and irrational numbers (i.e. sum of 2 rational numbers is
rational, sum of a rational and irrational number is irrational)
Number Systems
Complex Numbers: all numbers of the form a + bi where a and b
are real numbers. -4 + 3i, 2 – i
Real Numbers
Imaginary
Numbers: are
of the form of bi
where 1i
-3i, 2i
Irrational Numbers consist of all
numbers that cannot be written as the ratio of
two integers.
4, 3, 5
Rational Numbers consist of all
numbers that can be written as the ratio of two
integers 12, 0.125, , 0.91
3
Integers are the whole numbers and
their opposites (-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, …)
Natural
Numbers (Counting
Numbers)
Whole
Numbers
include zero
and the natural
numbers
Jordan School District Page 11 Secondary Mathematics 2
Properties of Real Numbers
Description Numbers Algebra
Commutative Property
You can add or multiply real
numbers in any order without
changing the result.
7 11 11 7
7 11 11 7
a b b a
ab ba
Associative Property
The sum or product of three or
more real numbers is the same
regardless of the way the numbers
are grouped.
5 3 7 5 3 7
ab c a bc
Distributive Property
When you multiply a sum by a
number, the result is the same
whether you add and then
multiply or whether you multiply
each term by the number and then
add the products.
5 2 8 5 2 5 8
2 8 5 2 5 2 8
a b c ab bc
b c a ba ca
Additive Identity Property
The sum of a number and 0, the
additive identity, is the original
number.
3 0 3 0 0n n n
Multiplicative Identity Property
The product of a number and 1,
the multiplicative identity, is the
original number.
2 21
3 3
1 1n n n
Additive Inverse Property
The sum of a number and its
opposite, or additive inverse, is 0.
5 5 0
0n n
Multiplicative Inverse Property
The product of a non-zero number
and its reciprocal, or
multiplicative inverse
18 1
8
11, 0n n
n
Closure Property
The sum or product of any two
real numbers is a real number.
2 3 5
2 6 12
a b
ab
Jordan School District Page 12 Secondary Mathematics 2
Closure
When an operation is executed on the members of a set, the result is guaranteed to be in the set.
Addition: If two integers are added together,
the sum is an integer. Therefore, integers are
closed under addition.
Example: 2 5 3
Multiplication: If two integers are multiplied
together, the product is an integer. Therefore,
integers are closed under multiplication.
Example: 6 7 42
Subtraction: If one integer is subtracted from
another, the difference is an integer. Therefore,
integers are closed under subtraction.
Example: 2 6 4
Division: If one integer is divided by another
integer, the quotient may or may not be an
integer. Therefore, integers are not closed
under division. Example:
10 2 5
12 10
5
closed
not closed
You Decide
1. What number systems are closed under addition? Justify your conclusions using the method
of your choice.
2. What number systems are closed under multiplication? Justify your conclusions using the
method of your choice.
3. What number systems are closed under subtraction? Justify your conclusions using the
method of your choice.
4. What number systems are closed under division? Justify your conclusions using the method
of your choice.
Why can’t I
come in?????
Sorry we are
a CLOSED
set!
Jordan School District Page 13 Secondary Mathematics 2
Vocabulary
For an integer n greater than 1, if na k , then a is the nth root of k.
A radical or the principal nth
root of k: k, the radicand, is a real number.
n, the index, is a positive integer greater than one.
Properties of Radicals
n na a n n nab a b
n
nn
a a
b b
Vocabulary
A prime number is a whole number greater
than 1 that is only divisible by 1 and itself. In
other words, a prime number has exactly two
factors: 1 and itself.
Example:
5 1 5 prime
30 2 3 5 not prime
Division Rules For a Few Prime Numbers
A number is divisible by: If: Example:
2 The last digit is even
(0, 2, 4, 6, 8)
256 is divisible by 2
255 is not divisible by 2
3 The sum of the digits is
divisible by 3
381 (3+8+1=12 and 12÷3=4) Yes
383 (3+8+3=14 and
214 3 4
3
) No
5 The last digit is 0 or 5 175 is divisible by 5
809 is not divisible by 5
7
If you double the last digit
and subtract it from the rest
of the number and the
answer is:
0
Divisible by 7
672 (Double 2 is 4, 67 4 63 and
63 7 9 ) Yes
905 (Double 5 is 10, 90 10 80 and
380 7 11
7
) No
Simplifying Radicals: Radicals that are simplified have:
no fractions left under the radical.
no perfect power factors in the radicand, k.
no exponents in the radicand, k, greater than
the index, n.
Jordan School District Page 14 Secondary Mathematics 2
Simplifying Radicals
Method 1:
Find Perfect Squares Under the Radical
4. Rewrite the radicand as factors that are
perfect squares and factors that are not
perfect squares.
5. Rewrite the radical as two separate
radicals .
6. Simplify the perfect square.
Example: 75
25 3
25 3
5 3 Method 2:
Use a Factor Tree
7. Work with only the radicand.
8. Split the radicand into two factors.
9. Split those numbers into two factors
until the number is a prime number.
10. Group the prime numbers into pairs.
11. List the number from each pair only
once outside of the radicand.
12. Leave any unpaired numbers inside the
radical.
Note: If you have more than one pair, multiply
the numbers outside of the radical as well as
the numbers left inside.
Example: 75
75
25 3
5 5
5 3
Method 3:
Divide by Prime Numbers
6. Work with only the radicand.
7. Using only prime numbers, divide each
radicand until the bottom number is a
prime number.
8. Group the prime numbers into pairs.
9. List the number from each pair only
once outside of the radicand.
10. Leave any unpaired numbers inside the
radical.
Note: If you have more than one pair, multiply
the numbers outside of the radical as well as
the numbers left inside.
Example: 75
5 75
5 15
3
5 3
5
Jordan School District Page 15 Secondary Mathematics 2
Method 4:
Use Exponent Rules
Example: 75
7. Rewrite the exponent as a rational
exponent. 1/275
8. Rewrite the radicand as factors that are
perfect squares and factors that are not
perfect squares.
1/2
25 3
9. Rewrite the perfect square factors with
an exponent of 2.
1/225 3
10. Split up the factors, giving each the
rational exponent.
1/2 1/225 3
11. Simplify.
1/2
5 3
12. Rewrite as a radical 5 3
Method 4 with Variables: Example:
3 7x
7. Rewrite the exponent as a rational
exponent. 7/3x
8. Rewrite the radicand as two factors.
One with the highest exponent that is
divisible by the root and the other
factor with an exponent of what is left
over.
1/36x x
9. Split up the factors, giving each the
rational exponent.
1/36 1/3x x
10. Rewrite the exponents using exponent
rules. 6/3 1/3x x
11. Simplify. 2 1/3x x
12. Rewrite as a radical 2 3x x
Adding and Subtracting Radicals
To add or subtract radicals, simplify first if possible, and then add or subtract “like” radicals.
1. They both have the same term under
the radical so they are “like” terms.
Example:
2 3 5 3
2. Add the coefficients of the radicals. (2 5) 3 7 3
1. They both have the same term under
the radical so they are “like” terms.
Example:
4 3 7 3
2. Subtract the coefficients of the radicals. (4 7) 3 ( 3) 3
Jordan School District Page 16 Secondary Mathematics 2
1. They are not “like” terms, but one of
them can be simplified.
Example:
5 3 2 75
2. Rewrite the number under the radical. 5 3 2 25 3 3. Use the properties of radicals to write
the factors as two radicals. 5 3 2 25 3
4. 25 is a perfect square and the square
root of it is 5. 5 3 2 5 3
5. Multiply the coefficients of the second
radical. 5 3 10 3
6. Now they are “like” terms, add the
coefficients. (5 10) 3
15 3
1. None of them are “like” terms.
Simplify if you can.
Example:
5 8 3 18 3
2. Factor each number inside the radical. 5 4 2 3 9 2 3 3. Use the properties of radicals to
simplify. 5 4 2 3 9 2 3
4. 4 and 9 are perfect squares; their square
roots are 2 and 3. 5 2 2 3 3 2 3
5. Multiply the numbers outside of the
radical. 10 2 9 2 3
6. Only the terms with 2 are “like”
terms. (10 9) 2 3
7. Simplify. 2 3
1. They are not like terms, but they can be
simplified.
Example:
3 3 340 3 5 2 135
2. Rewrite the expressions under the
radical. 3 3 35 8 3 5 2 5 27
3. Use properties of radicals to rewrite the
expressions. 3 3 3 3 35 8 3 5 2 5 27
4. The cube root of 8 is 2 and the cube
root of 27 is 3. 3 3 35 2 3 5 2 3 5
5. Multiply the coefficients of the last
radical. 3 3 32 5 3 5 6 5
6. Add or subtract the coefficients of the
like terms. 32 3 6 5
7. Simplify. 35 5
Jordan School District Page 17 Secondary Mathematics 2
1. They are not like terms, but one of
them can be simplified.
Example:
3 3 32 24 3x x
2. Rewrite the expression under the
radical. 3 3 32 8 3 3x x
3. Use properties of radicals to rewrite the
expression. 3 33 3 32 8 3 3x x
4. 8 and 3x are perfect cubes. The cube
root of 8 is 2 and 3x is x.
3 32 2 3 3x x
5. Multiply the coefficients of the first
radical. 3 34 3 3x x
6. Now they are like terms, add the
coefficients of each. 34 3x x
7. Simplify. 33 3x
Multiplying Radicals
Multiplying radicals with the same index
Example:
2 6 3 7 1. Multiply the coefficients and multiply
the numbers under the radicand. (2 3) 6 7
2. If possible, simplify. This is already
simplified. 6 42
Example:
3 2 6 3
1. Use the distributive method to multiply.
3 6 3 3 2 6 2( 3)
2. Use properties of radicals to simplify.
18 3 3 2 6 6 3. Simplify any radicals.
9 2 3 3 2 6 6 4. Combined “like” terms if possible.
3 2 3 3 2 6 6
Example:
5 1 5 4
1. Use the distributive method to multiply.
5 5 5( 4) ( 1) 5 ( 1)( 4) 2. Use properties of radicals to simplify.
5 5 4 5 5 4 3. Simplify and combine “like” terms.
25 ( 4 1) 5 4 4. The square root of 25 is 5.
5 5 5 4 5. Combine like terms.
9 5 5
Jordan School District Page 18 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
5 2 3 5 2 3
1. Use the distributive method to multiply.
5 2 5 2 5 2( 3) 3 5 2 3( 3)
2. Use properties of radicals to simplify. 5 5 2 2 3 5 2 3 5 2 9 3. Simplify and combine like terms. 25 4 ( 15 15) 2 9 4. The square root of 4 is 2. 25 2 9 5. Simplify. 50 9 41
Multiplying Radicals with Different Indices
Note: In order to multiply radicals with different indices the radicands must be the same.
Example:
57 7
1. Rewrite each radical using rational
exponents.
11
527 7
2. Use properties of exponents to
simplify.
1 1
2 57
3. Combine the fractions by finding a
common denominator.
7
107
Example:
3 2 4x x
1. Rewrite each radical using rational
exponents.
2 1
3 4x x
2. Use properties of exponents to
simplify.
2 1
3 4x
3. Combine the fractions by finding a
common denominator.
11
12x
Example:
3 x
1. Rewrite the inner radical using rational
exponents.
1
3x 2. Rewrite the outer radical using rational
exponents.
11 23x
3. Use properties of exponents to
simplify.
1 1
3 2x
4. Simplify by multiplying fractions.
1
6x
Jordan School District Page 19 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Add or Subtract
1. 10 7 12 7
2. 332 3 2 24
3. 12 3 3
4. 3 33 2 54
5. 333 16 3 2
6. 3 20 5
7. 3 340 2 6 3 5
8. 3 18 3 8 24
9. 2 18 2 12 2 18
Practice Exercises B
Multiply and simplify the result.
1. 34 28 7x x 2. 3 33 12 6 3.
3 2 320 4 20x x
4. 6 3 12 5. 3 3 34 2 5 6. 3 5 10 6
7. 5 3 5 3 8. 2 3 2 3 5 9. 5 4 5 2 5
10. 3 56 6 11. 74 2 2y y 12. 3 8 z
Jordan School District Page 20 Secondary Mathematics 2
You Decide:
1. Add: 4
25
. Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers? (Use your graphing
calculator to change the sum from a decimal to a fraction by pushing the math button and
select FRAC)
2. Add: 1 2
2 3 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?
3. Add: 2 1.5 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?
4. Add: 1.75 1.35 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?
5. Add: 2 3 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?
6. Add: 5
3 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?
7. Write a rule based on your observations with adding rational and irrational numbers.
Jordan School District Page 21 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 1 Cluster 4 (A.APR.1): Polynomials
Cluster 4: Perform arithmetic operations on polynomials
1.4.1 Polynomials are closed under addition, subtraction, and multiplication
1.4.1 Add, subtract, and multiply polynomials (NO DIVISION)
VOCABULARY
A term that does not have a variable is called a constant. For example the number 5 is a constant because
it does not have a variable attached and will always have the value of 5.
A constant or a variable or a product of a constant and a variable is called a term. For example 2, x , or 23x are all terms.
Terms with the same variable to the same power are like terms. 22x and
27x are like terms.
An expression formed by adding a finite number of unlike terms is called a polynomial. The variables
can only be raised to positive integer exponents.3 24 6 1x x is a polynomial, while
32 12 5x x is not
a polynomial. NOTE: There are no square roots of variables, no fractional powers, and no variables in the
denominator of any fractions.
A polynomial with only one term is called a monomial 46x . A polynomial with two terms is called a
binomial ( 2 1x ). A polynomial with three terms is called a trinomial 25 3x x .
Polynomials are in standard (general) form when written with exponents in descending order and the
constant term last. For example 4 3 22 5 7 3x x x x is in standard form.
The exponent of a term gives you the degree of the term. The term23x has degree two. For a
polynomial, the value of the largest exponent is the degree of the whole polynomial. The polynomial 4 3 22 5 7 3x x x x has degree 4.
The number part of a term is called the coefficient when the term contains a variable and a number. 6x
has a coefficient of 6 and 2x has a coefficient of -1.
The leading coefficient is the coefficient of the first term when the polynomial is written in standard
form. 2 is the leading coefficient of 4 3 22 5 7 3x x x x .
General Polynomial: 1 2
1 2 1 0( ) n n
n nf x a x a x a x a x a
Leading
Term Constant
Degree n
Leading
Coefficient na
Jordan School District Page 22 Secondary Mathematics 2
CLASSIFICATIONS OF POLYNOMIALS Name Form Degree Example
Zero ( ) 0f x None ( ) 0f x
Constant ( ) , 0f x a a 0 ( ) 5f x
Linear ( )f x ax b 1 ( ) 2 1f x x
Quadratic 2( )f x ax bx c 2 2 1 7
( ) 32 9
f x x x
Cubic 3 2( )f x ax bx cx d 3 3 2( ) 3f x x x
Practice Exercises A:
Determine which of the following are polynomial functions. If the function is a polynomial, state
the degree and leading coefficient. If it is not, explain why.
1. 5( ) 3 17f x x
2. ( ) 9 2f x x
3. 5 1( ) 2 9
2f x x x
4. ( ) 13f x
5. 3 3 6( ) 27 8f x x x
6. 2( ) 4 5f x x x
Operations of Polynomials
Addition/Subtraction: Combine like terms.
Example 1:
Horizontal Method
3 2 3 2
3 3 2 2
3 2
2 3 4 1 2 5 3
2 3 2 4 5 1 3
3 2
x x x x x x
x x x x x x
x x x
Vertical Method
3 2
3 2
3 2
2 3 4 1
2 5 3
3 2
x x x
x x x
x x x
Example 2:
Horizontal Method
24 3 4x x 3 22 2x x x
= 2 3 24 3 4 2 2x x x x x
= 3 22 3 4 6x x x
Vertical Method
2
3 2
3 2
4 3 4
2 2
2 3 4 6
x x
x x x
x x x
Jordan School District Page 23 Secondary Mathematics 2
Multiplication: Multiply by a monomial
Example 3:
23 2 6 5x x x
2
3 2
3 2 3 6 3 5
6 18 15
x x x x x
x x x
Example 4:
2 3 2
5 4 3 2
5 3 2 6 8
15 10 30 40
x x x x
x x x x
Multiplication: Multiply two binomials 5 7 2 9x x
Distributive (FOIL) Method
5 7 2 9x x
2
2
5 2 9 7 2 9
10 45 14 63
*
10 31 63
x x x
x x x
combineliketerms
x x
Box Method
5x 7
2x 210x 14x
9 45x 63
*combine terms on the
diagonals of the unshaded
boxes(top right to lower left)
210 31 63x x
Vertical Method
2
2
5 7
2 9
45 63
10 14
10 31 63
x
x
x
x x
x x
Multiplication: Multiply a binomial and a trinomial 22 3 6 7 5x x x
Distributive Method
22 3 6 7 5x x x
2 2
3 2 2
3 2 2
3 2
2 6 7 5 3 6 7 5
12 14 10 18 21 15
12 14 10 18 21 15
*
12 4 31 15
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x
combineliketerms
x x x
Box Method
26x 7x 5
2x
312x
214x
10x
3 218x
21x 15
*combine terms on the
diagonals of the unshaded
boxes(top right to lower left)
3 212 4 31 15x x x
Vertical Method
2
2
3 2
3 2
6 7 5
2 3
18 21 15
12 14 10
12 4 31 15
x x
x
x x
x x x
x x x
Jordan School District Page 24 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B:
Perform the required operations. Write your answers in standard form and determine if the result
is a polynomial.
1. 2 23 7 3 5 3x x x x
2. 2 23 5 7 12x x x
3. 3 2 34 3 12 3x x x x x
4. 2 22 3 5 3 4y y y y
5. 22 3x x x
6. 2 22 3 4y y y
7. 3 4 1u u
8. 22 3 5x x x
9. 7 3x x
10. 3 5 2x x
11. 2 3 4 1x x
12. 3 3x y x y
13. 2
2 7x
14. 2
3 5x
15. 2
35 1x
16. 3 32 3 2 3x y x y
17. 2 2 3 4x x x
18. 2 3 2 3x x x
19. 2 23 1x x x x
20. 2 22 3 1 1x x x x
YOU DECIDE
Are polynomials closed under addition, subtraction, multiplication? Justify your conclusion
using the method of your choice.
Jordan School District Page 26 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 2 Cluster 1 (F.1F.4, F.1F.5, F.1F.6)
Unit 2 Cluster 2 (F.1F.7, F.1F.9)
Interpret functions that arise in applications in terms of a context
Analyzing functions using different representations
Cluster 1:
2.1.1 Interpret key features; intercepts, intervals where increasing and decreasing,
intervals where positive and negative, relative maximums and minimums,
symmetry, end behavior, domain and range, periodicity
2.1.2 Relate the domain of a function to its graph or a context
2.1.3 Average rate of change over an interval: calculate, interpret, and estimate from a
graph.
Cluster 2:
2.2.1 Graph functions from equations by hand and with technology showing key
features (square roots, cube roots, piecewise-defined functions including step and
functions, and absolute value).
2.2.1 Graph linear and quadratic functions and show intercepts, maxima, and minima
2.2.3 Compare properties (key features) of functions each represented differently (table,
graph, equation or description)
VOCABULARY
The domain is the set of all first coordinates when given a table or a set of ordered pairs. It is the
set of all -coordinates of the points on the graph and is the set of all numbers for which an
equation is defined. The domain it is written from the least value to the greatest value.
The range is the set of all second coordinates when given a table or a set of ordered pairs. It is
the set of all y-coordinates of the points on the graph. When modeling real world situations, the
range is the set of all numbers that make sense in the problem. The range is written from the
least value to the greatest value.
Example:
Find the domain and range of 2 2 3f x x .
Domain
1. Find any values for which the function is
undefined.
The square root function has real number
solutions if the expression under the radicand
is positive or zero. This means that 2 0x
therefore 2x .
2. Write the domain in interval notation.
The domain is [ 2, ) .
Jordan School District Page 27 Secondary Mathematics 2
Range
1. Find all values for which the output exists.
The square root function uses the principal
square root which is a positive number or zero
( 0y ). However, the function has been
shifted down three units so the range is also
shifted down three units 3y .
2. Write the range in interval notation. The range is [ 3, )
Example:
Find the domain and range of the function graphed to the right.
Domain
1. List all the x-values of the function
graphed.
If you were to flatten the function against the
x-axis you would see something like this:
The function is defined for all the x-values
along the x-axis.
2. Write the domain in interval notation. The domain is , .
Range
1. List all the y-values of the function
graphed.
If you were to flatten the function against the
y-axis you would see something like this:
The function is defined for all the y-values
greater than or equal to -2.
2. Write the range in interval notation. The range is [ 2, ) .
Jordan School District Page 28 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
The path of a ball thrown straight up can be modeled by the equation
216 20 4h t t t where t is the time in seconds that the ball is in the air and h is the
height of the ball. What is the real world domain and range for the situation?
Domain
1. Find all the values that would make sense
for the situation.
The domain represents the amount of time that
the ball is in the air. At t = 0 the ball is thrown
and enters the air shortly afterwards so the
domain must be greater than zero. The ball
will hit the ground at 1.425 seconds. Once it is
on the ground it is no longer in the air so the
domain must be less than 1.425 seconds. The
ball is in the air for 0 1.425t seconds.
2. Write the domain in interval notation. The domain is (0,1.425) .
Range
1. Find all the values that would make sense
for the situation.
The ball will not go lower than the ground so
the height must be greater than zero. The ball
will go no higher than its maximum height so
the height must be less than or equal to 10.25
feet. The range will be 0 10.25h .
2. Write the range in interval notation. The range is (0,10.25] .
Practice Exercises A:
Find the domain and range.
1. 3 2f x x 2. 3( ) 1f x x
3. 4.
5. Your cell phone plan charges a flat fee of $10 for up to1000 texts and $0.10 per text over
1000.
6. The parking lot for a movie theater in the city has no charge for the first hour, but charges
$1.50 for each additional hour or part of an hour with a maximum charge of $7.50 for the
night.
Jordan School District Page 29 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
The x-intercept is where a graph crosses or touches the -axis. It is the ordered pair ,0a .
Where a is a real number.
The y -intercept is where a graph crosses or touches the -axis. It is the ordered pair 0,b .
Where b is a real number.
A relative maximum occurs when the y-value is greater than all of the y-values near it. A
function may have more than one relative maximum value. A relative minimum occurs when
the y-value is less than all of the y-values near it. A function may have more than one relative
minimum value.
Example:
Find the intercepts of the function 2 1f x x .
x-intercept
1. Substitute y in for f(x).
2 1y x
2. Substitute 0 in for y. 0 2 1x
3. Solve for x. 1 2
1
2
x
x
4. Write the intercept as an ordered pair. 1,0
2
y-intercept
1. Substitute 0 in for x.
2(0) 1y
2. Solve for y. 0 1
1
y
y
3. Write the intercept as an ordered pair. 0, 1
Jordan School District Page 30 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Find the intercepts of the function 23 5 2f x x x .
x-intercept
1. Use your graphing calculator to graph the
function.
2. Use the Calculate Menu (2nd
, Trace, Zero) to
find the x-intercepts. (Zero is another name
for the x-intercept)
The x-intercepts are
1,0
3
and 2,0 .
y-intercept
1. To find the y-intercept, replace each x with 0.
2
3 0 5 0 2y
2. Solve the equation for y. 0 0 2
2
y
y
3. Write the intercept as an ordered pair. 0,2
Example:
Find the maximum of 2 4 4f x x x .
To find the maximum use your graphing calculator to graph the
function. Then use the Calculate Menu (2nd
, Trace, Maximum).
Enter a number that is to the left of the maximum, for example 0,
then push enter. Then enter a number that is to the right of the
maximum, for example 4, then push enter. You can guess the
value of the maximum or just push enter again and the maximum
will be calculated. The maximum is (2, 8).
Example:
Find the minimum of 2
2 3f x x .
To find the maximum use your graphing calculator to graph the
function. Then use the Calculate Menu (2nd
, Trace, Minimum).
Enter a number that is to the left of the minimum, for example -3,
then push enter. Then enter a number that is to the right of the
minimum, for example -1, then push enter. You can guess the
value of the minimum or just push enter again and the minimum
will be calculated. The minimum is (-2, -3).
Jordan School District Page 31 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Find the x and y-intercepts for each function.
1. 2 5 10x y
4. 1
43
f x x
2. 4 7f x x
5. 2 3 18f x x x
3. 2 30f x x x
6. 22 3 4f x x x
Find the relative maximums or minimums of each function.
7. 2
2 1 3f x x
10. 2
5 4f x x
8. 2
3 2 7f x x
11. 23 18 23f x x x
9. 24 16 18f x x x
12. 2 8 14f x x x
VOCABULARY
An interval is a set of numbers between two x -values. An open interval is a set of numbers
between two x -values that doesn’t include the two end values. Open intervals are written in the
form 1 2,x x or 1 2x x x . A closed interval is a set of numbers between two -values that
does include the two end values. Closed intervals are written in the form 1 2,x x or 1 2x x x .
A function f is increasing when it is rising (or going up) from left to right and it is decreasing
when it is falling (or going down) from left to right. A constant function is neither increasing nor
decreasing; it has the same y-value for its entire domain.
A function is positive when 0f x or the y-coordinates are always positive. A function is
negative when 0f x or the y-coordinates are always negative.
Example:
Find the intervals where the function 2 2 3f x x x is:
a. increasing
b. decreasing
c. constant
d. positive
e. negative
Jordan School District Page 32 Secondary Mathematics 2
Increasing/Decreasing/Constant
1. Find the maximums or minimums.
The minimum is (-1, -4).
2. Determine if the function is rising, falling,
or constant between the maximums and
minimums.
To the left of the minimum the function is
falling or decreasing. To the right of the
minimum the function is rising or increasing.
3. Write the intervals where the function is
increasing, decreasing, or constant using
interval notation.
The function is increasing on the interval
( 1, ) . The function is decreasing on the
interval ( , 1) . The function is never
constant.
Positive/Negative
1. Find all the x-intercepts of the function.
The x-intercepts are at (-3, 0) and (1, 0).
2. Determine if the function has positive or
negative y-values on the intervals between
each x-intercept by testing a point on the
interval.
3x 3 1x 1x
4x
( 4) 5f
Positive
0x
(0) 3f
Negative
2x
(2) 5f
Positive
3. Write the intervals where the function is
positive or negative using interval notation.
The function is positive on the intervals
( , 3) and (1, ) . The function is negative
on the interval ( 3,1) .
Example:
Find the intervals where the function 3 2 1f x x is:
a. increasing
b. decreasing
c. constant
d. positive
e. negative
Increasing/Decreasing/Constant
1. Find the maximums or minimums.
There are no maximums or minimums.
2. Determine if the function is rising, falling,
or constant on its entire domain.
The function is rising from left to right so it is
increasing on its entire domain.
3. Write the intervals where the function is
increasing, decreasing, or constant using
interval notation.
The function is increasing on the interval
, . The function is never decreasing nor
is it constant.
Jordan School District Page 33 Secondary Mathematics 2
Positive/Negative
1. Find all the x-intercepts of the function.
The x-intercept is (-1, 0).
2. Determine if the function has positive or
negative y-values on the intervals between
each x-intercept by testing a point on the
interval.
1x 1x
2x
( 2) 1f
Negative
0x
(0) 0.26f
Positive
3. Write the intervals where the function is
positive or negative using interval notation. The function is positive on the interval ( 1, ).
The function is negative on the interval
( , 1) .
Example:
Find the intervals where the function | 2 | 3, 1
3, 1
x xf x
x
is:
a. increasing
b. decreasing
c. constant
d. positive
e. negative
Increasing/Decreasing/Constant
1. Find the maximums or minimums and any
breaks in the domain.
There is a maximum at (-2, 0) and a break in
the domain at x = -1.
2. Determine if the function is rising, falling,
or constant between each maximum or
minimum and each break in the graph.
The function is rising (increasing) to the left of
the maximum. It is falling (decreasing) to the
right of the maximum. It is constant to the
right of x = -1.
3. Write the intervals where the function is
increasing, decreasing, or constant using
interval notation.
The function is increasing on the interval
, 2 . It is decreasing on the interval
2, 1 . It is constant on the interval 1, .
Jordan School District Page 34 Secondary Mathematics 2
Positive/Negative
1. Find all the x-intercepts of the function and
any places where there is a break in the
domain.
The x-intercept is (-5, 0). There is a break in
the domain at x = -1.
2. Determine if the function has positive or
negative y-values on the intervals between
each x-intercept by testing a point on the
interval.
5x 5 1x 1x
6x
( 6) 1f
Negative
3x
( 3) 2f
Positive
0x
(0) 3f
Positive
3. Write the intervals where the function is
positive or negative using interval notation.
The function is positive on the intervals
( 5, 1) and ( 1, ) . The function is negative
on the interval ( , 5) .
Practice Exercises C
Find the intervals where the function is:
a. increasing
b. decreasing
c. constant
d. positive
e. negative
1. 1
32
f x x
2. 22 3 2f x x x
3. 2 3f x x
4. 3 3f x x
5. 4 1f x x
6. 2
2, 0
1, 0
xf x
x x
Jordan School District Page 35 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY GRAPHICALLY ALGEBRAICALLY
A function is symmetric
with respect to the y-axis if,
for every point ,x y on the
graph, the point ,x y is
also on the graph. In other
words,
if you substitute –x in for
every x you end up with the
original function. When
looking at the graph, you
could “fold” the graph along
the y-axis and both sides are
the same.
( ) 5
( ) 5
( ) ( ) 5
f x x
f x x
f x f x x
A function is symmetric
with respect to the origin
if, for every point ,x y on
the graph, the point ,x y
is also on the graph. In other
words,
if you substitute –x in for
every x you end up with the
opposite of the original
function. When looking at
the graph, there is a mirror
image in Quadrants 1 & 3 or
Quadrants 2 & 4.
3
3
3
( ) 8
( ) 8
( ) ( ) 8
f x x
f x x
f x f x x
An equation with no
symmetry. If you substitute
–x in for every x you end up
with something that is
neither the original function
nor its opposite. When
looking at the graph, you
could not “fold” the graph
along the y-axis and have
both sides the same. It also
does not reflect a mirror
image in opposite quadrants.
2
2
2
( ) 2
( ) ( ) 2( )
( ) 2 ( ) ( )
f x x x
f x x x
f x x x f x f x
Jordan School District Page 36 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Determine what kind of symmetry, if any, 2 1f x x has.
Test for y-axis Symmetry
Replace x with –x and see if
the result is the same as the
original equation.
2( ) 1
( ) | 2 1|
f x x
f x x
This is not the same as the
original equation.
Test for Origin Symmetry
Replace x with –x and see if
the result is the opposite of the
original equation.
2( ) 1
( ) | 2 1|
f x x
f x x
This is not the opposite of the
original equation.
Graph
The function 2 1f x x has no symmetry.
Example:
Determine what kind of symmetry, if any, 22f x x
Test for y-axis Symmetry
Replace x with –x and see if
the result is the same as the
original equation.
2
2
2( )
( ) 2
f x x
f x x
This is equal to the original
equation.
Test for Origin Symmetry
Replace x with –x and see if
the result is the opposite of the
original equation.
2
2
2( )
( ) 2
f x x
f x x
This is not the opposite of the
original equation.
Graph
The function 22f x x has y-axis symmetry.
Example:
Determine what kind of symmetry, if any, the function graphed at
the right has.
Test for y-axis Symmetry
Pick a point ,x y on the graph and see if
,x y is also on the graph. The point (-2, 2)
is on the graph but the point (2, 2) is not. The
function does not have y-axis symmetry.
Test for origin symmetry
Pick a point ,x y on the graph and see if
,x y is also on the graph. The point (-2, 2)
is on the graph and the point (2, -2) is also on
the graph. The function has origin symmetry.
The function graphed has origin symmetry.
Jordan School District Page 37 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
End behavior describes what is happening to the y-values of a graph when x goes to the far right
or x goes the far left .
End behavior is written in the following format:
Right End Behavior: Left End Behavior:
lim ( )x
f x c
lim ( )x
f x c
Example:
Find the end behavior of 4 3f x x .
As x gets larger the function is getting more and more negative.
Therefore, the right end behavior is lim ( )x
f x
. As x gets
smaller the function is getting more and more positive. Therefore
the left end behavior is lim ( )x
f x
.
Example:
Find the end behavior of 23 1f x x x .
As x gets larger the function is getting more and more negative.
Therefore, the right end behavior is lim ( )x
f x
. As x gets
smaller the function is getting more and more negative. Therefore
the left end behavior is lim ( )x
f x
.
Example:
Find the end behavior of 2 1f x x .
As x gets larger the function is getting more and more positive.
Therefore, the right end behavior is lim ( )x
f x
. The domain is
restricted to numbers greater than or equal to 2, therefore this graph
has no left end behavior.
Jordan School District Page 38 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises D
Graph each function below and find the:
a. Domain and Range
b. Intercepts, if any
c. Determine whether the function has any symmetry.
d. List the intervals where the function is increasing, decreasing, or constant.
e. List the intervals where the function is positive or negative.
f. Find all the relative maximums and minimums.
g. Find end behavior
1. ( ) 2 5f x x
4. 2
( ) 3f x x
2. ( ) 3 1f x x 5. 3( ) 1 5f x x
3. ( ) 2 4f x x 6.
3, 1
( ) 12, 1 12
3
x
f xx x
VOCABULARY
Periodicity refers to a function with a
repeating pattern. The period of this function is
6 horizontal units. Meaning the pattern will
repeat itself every 6 horizontal units.
Jordan School District Page 39 Secondary Mathematics 2
You Decide
Mr. Astro’s physics class created rockets for an end of the year competition. There were three
groups who constructed rockets. On launch day the following information was presented for
review to determine a winner.
Group A estimated that their rocket was easily modeled by the equation: 216 176 3y x x .
Group B presented the following graph of the height of their rocket, in feet, over time.
Group C recorded their height in the table below.
Time (seconds) 0 2 4 6 8 10
Height (feet) 3 256 381 377 246 0
Who should be the winner of the competition? Use mathematical reasons to support your
conclusion.
hei
ght
(fee
t)
time (seconds)
Jordan School District Page 40 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 2 Cluster 2 (F.IF.7b)
Graphing Square Root, Cube Root, and Piecewise-Defined
Functions, Including Step Functions and Absolute Value Functions
Cluster 2: Analyzing functions using different representations
2.2.1b Graph functions from equations by hand and with technology showing key
features (square roots, cube roots, piecewise-defined functions including step
functions, and absolute value)
VOCABULARY
There are several types of functions (linear, exponential, quadratic, absolute value, etc.). Each of
these could be considered a family with unique characteristics that are shared among the
members. The parent function is the basic function that is used to create more complicated
functions.
Square Root Function
Parent Function
1/2f x x x
Key Features
Domain: 0,
Range: 0,
Intercepts: x-intercept 0,0 , y-intercept 0,0
Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: increasing 0,
Intervals where Positive/Negative: 0,
Relative maximums/minimums: minimum at 0,0
Symmetries: none
End Behavior: right end behavior limx
x
; left end
behavior0
lim 0x
x
Jordan School District Page 41 Secondary Mathematics 2
Cube Root Function
Parent Function
1/33f x x x
Key Features
Domain: ,
Range: ,
Intercepts: x-intercept 0,0 , y-intercept 0,0
Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: increasing ,
Intervals where Positive/Negative: positive 0, ,
negative ,0
Relative maximums/minimums: none
Symmetries: origin
End Behavior: right end behavior3lim
xx
; left end
behavior3lim
xx
Absolute Value Function
Parent Function
f x x
Key Features
Domain: ,
Range: 0,
Intercepts: x-intercept 0,0 , y-intercept 0,0
Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: increasing 0, ,
decreasing ,0
Intervals where Positive/Negative: positive
,0 0,
Relative maximums/minimums: minimum at 0,0
Symmetries: y-axis symmetry
End Behavior: right end behavior limx
x
; left end
behavior limx
x
Piecewise-Defined Functions
A piecewise-defined function is a function that consists of pieces of two or more functions. For
example
2, 2
1, 2 0
2 5, 0
x x
f x x
x x
is a piecewise-defined function. It has a piece of the
Jordan School District Page 42 Secondary Mathematics 2
function 2f x x but only the piece where 2x . It also contains the function 1f x ,
but only where 2 0x . Finally, it contains the function 2 5f x x but only where
0x .
Piecewise-Defined Function
2, 2
1, 2 0
2 5, 0
x x
f x x
x x
Key Features
Domain: ,
Range: ,5
Intercepts: x-intercept 2.5,0 , y-intercept 0,1
Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: increasing , 2 ,
decreasing 5,
Intervals where Positive/Negative: positive
2,0 and 0,2.5 , negative , 2 and 2.5,
Relative maximums/minimums: none
Symmetries: none
End Behavior: right end behavior lim 2 5x
x
; left
end behavior lim 2x
x
Step Functions are piecewise-defined functions made up of constant functions. It is called a
step function because the graph resembles a staircase.
Step Function
intf x x
Key Features
Domain: ,
Range: | is an integery y
Intercepts: x-intercept 0,1 and 0,x y y-intercept
0,0
Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: neither increasing nor
decreasing
Intervals where Positive/Negative: positive 1, ,
negative ,0
Relative maximums/minimums: none
Symmetries: none
End Behavior: right end behavior limintx
x
; left end
behavior lim intx
x
Jordan School District Page 43 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 2 Cluster 1(F.IF.6) and Cluster 5(F.LE.3)
Quadratic Functions and Modeling
Cluster 1: Interpret Functions that Arise in Applications in Terms of a Context
2.1.3 Average rate of change over an interval: calculate, interpret, and estimate from a
graph.
Cluster 5: Constructing and comparing linear, quadratic, and exponential models; solve problems
2.5.1 Exponential functions will eventually outgrow all other functions
VOCABULARY
The average rate of change of a function over an interval is the ratio of the difference (change)
in y over the difference (change) in x.
2 1
2 1
average rate of changey yy
x x x
Example:
Find the average rate of change for 22 3 1f x x x on the interval [0, 2].
First, find the value of the function at each end point of the interval.
20 2(0) 3(0) 1f 22 2(2) 3(2) 1f
0 0 0 1f 2 2 4 6 1f
0 1f 2 8 6 1f
2 3f
Next, find the slope between the two points (0, 1) and (2, 3).
3 1 21
2 0 2m
The average rate of change of 22 3 1f x x x on the interval [0, 2] is 1.
0,1
2,3
Jordan School District Page 44 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
The per capita consumption of ready-to-eat and ready-to-cook breakfast cereal is shown
below. Find the average rate of change from 1992 to 1995 and interpret its meaning.
Years since 1990 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cereal Consumption
(pounds) 15.4 16.1 16.6 17.3 17.4 17.1 16.6 16.3 15.6 15.5
The year 1992 is two years since 1990 and 1995 is 5 years since 1990, therefore the
interval is [2, 5]. Find the slope between the two points (2, 16.6) and (5, 17.1).
17.1 16.6 0.50.16
5 2 3m
The average rate of change from 1992 to 1995 is 0.16 pounds per year. This means that
each household increased their cereal consumption an average of 0.16 pounds each year
from 1992 to 1995.
Example:
Joe is visiting the Eiffel Tower in Paris. He accidentally
drops his camera. The camera’s height is graphed. Use
the graph to estimate the average rate of change of the
camera from 4 to 7 seconds and interpret its meaning.
At 4 seconds the height of the camera is approximately
650 feet. At 7 seconds the height of the camera is
approximately 100 feet. Find the slope between the
points (4, 650) and (7, 100).
100 650 550183.3
7 4 3m
The negative indicates that the camera is falling. The camera is picking up speed as it is
falling. This means that for each second the camera is falling from 4 to 7 seconds, it
increases in speed an average of 183.3 feet per second from 4 to 7 seconds.
Hei
ght
in f
eet
Time in seconds
Jordan School District Page 45 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Find the average rate of change for each function on the specified interval.
1. 23 5f x x x on [-1, 3]
3. 2 4f x x on [-4, -2]
2. 24 12 9f x x x on [-3, 0]
4. 22 6f x x x on [-1, 0]
Find the average rate of change on the specified interval and interpret its meaning.
5. Many of the elderly are placed in nursing
care facilities. The cost of these has risen
significantly since 1960. Use the table
below find the average rate of change from
2000 to 2010.
Years since
1960
Nursing Care
Cost
(billions of $)
0 1
10 4
20 18
30 53
40 96
50 157
6. The height of an object thrown straight up
is shown in the table below. Find the
average rate of change from 1 to 2
seconds.
Time
(seconds)
Height
(feet)
0 140
1 162
2 152
3 110
4 36
7. The net sales of a company are shown in the
graph below. Estimate the average rate of
change for 2007 to 2009.
8. The graph below shows fuel consumption
in billions of gallons for vans, pickups and
SUVs. Estimate the average rate of
change for 2005 to 2012.
Years since 1999
Net
Sal
es i
n m
illi
on
s o
f $
Years since 1980
Fuel
Co
nsu
mp
tio
n
Jordan School District Page 46 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Complete the tables.
x ( ) 2f x x x 2( )g x x x ( ) 2xh x
-2 -2 -2
-1 -1 -1
0 0 0
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
Practice Exercises C
Find the average rate of change for functions ( ), ( ),and ( )f x g x h x for the specified intervals.
Determine which of the three functions is increasing the fastest.
1. [0, 1]
4. [0, 3]
2. [3, 5]
5. [-2, 0]
3. [-2, 5]
6. [0, 5]
Jordan School District Page 47 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises D
1. Graph the following functions on the same coordinate plane.
a. 3
( ) 12
k x x b. 2
( ) 2 3 5p x x c. 2( ) 3 7xr x
2. Find the average rate of change for functions ( ), ( ), and ( )k x p x r x for the specified
intervals. Determine which of the three functions is increasing the fastest.
a. [-4, 2] b. [3, 5] c. [0, 10]
You Decide
Use exercises C and D to help you answer the following questions.
1. For each exercise, determine which function has the greatest average rate of change on
the interval 0, ?
2. In general, what type of function will increase faster? Explain your reasoning.
Jordan School District Page 48 Secondary Mathematics 2
FACTORING
(To be used before F.IF.8)
VOCABULARY
Factoring is the reverse of multiplication. It means to write an equivalent expression that is a
product. Each of the items that are multiplied together in a product is a factor. An expression is
said to be factored completely when all of the factors are prime polynomials, that is they
cannot be factored any further.
The greatest common factor is the largest expression that all the terms have in common.
FACTOR OUT A COMMON TERM
Example:
22 6 8x x
What is the largest factor that evenly divides 22 ,6 , and 8x x ?
22 : 1 2
6 : 1 2 3
8 : 1 2 2 2
x x x
x x
The common numbers are 1and 2. Multiply
them and the product is the greatest common
factor.
22 6 8
2 2 2
x x
Divide each term by the greatest common
factor.
22 3 4x x
Rewrite with the common term on the outside
of the parenthesis and the simplified terms
inside the parenthesis.
Example:
4 3 28 3 5w w w
What is the largest factor that evenly divides 4 3 28 ,3 , and 5w w w ?
4
3
2
8 : 1 2 2 2
3 : 1 3
5 : 1 5
w w w w w
w w w w
w w w
The common numbers are w and w. Multiply
them and the product is the greatest common
factor.
4 3 2
2 2 2
8 3 5w w w
w w w
Divide each term by the greatest common
factor.
2 28 3 5w w w Rewrite with the common term on the outside
of the parenthesis and the simplified terms
inside the parenthesis.
Jordan School District Page 49 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
3 29 3 15z z z
What is the largest factor that evenly divides 3 29 ,12 , and 15z z z ?
3
2
9 : 1 3 3
3 : 1 3
15 : 1 3 5
z z z z
z z z
z z
The common numbers are 3 and z. Multiply
them and the product is the greatest common
factor.
3 29 3 15
3 3 3
z z z
z z z
Divide each term by the greatest common
factor.
23 3 5z z z Rewrite with the common term on the outside
of the parenthesis and the simplified terms
inside the parenthesis.
Practice Exercises A
Factor out the greatest common factor.
1. 24 12 16x x
4. 3 22 3x x x
2. 5 4 35 10 15x x x
5. 227 36 18x x
3. 4 3 28 32 16x x x
6. 214 21 49x x
FACTOR A TRINOMIAL WITH A LEADING COEFFICIENT OF 1
When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a = 1, and b and c are
integers, find factors of c that add to equal b.
If p and q are the factors, the factored form looks like x p x q .
Example:
2 5 6x x
Factors of 6 Sum
(adds to be)
1 6 7
2 3 5
-1 -6 -7
-2 -3 -5
Find factors of 6 that add to be 5. The factors
are 2 and 3.
2 3x x This is the factored form.
Jordan School District Page 50 Secondary Mathematics 2
Another way to look at factoring is with an area model like the one pictured below.
When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a = 1, and b and c are
integers, find factors of c that add to equal b.
If p and q are the factors, the factored form looks like x p x q .
Example:
2 5 6x x
Factors of 6 Sum
(adds to be)
1 6 7
2 3 5
-1 -6 -7
-2 -3 -5
Find factors of 6 that add to be -5. The factors
are -2 and -3.
2 3x x This is the factored form.
This example can also be modeled with an area model as the picture below demonstrates.
The rectangular area represents the trinomial 2 5 6x x . The width across the top is
1 1 1x or 3x and the length down the
side is 1 1x or 2x . To obtain the area
of the rectangle, you would multiply the
length times the width or 2 3x x .
Notice that this result is the same as when we
found factors of the constant term that added
to the coefficient of the x term.
The rectangular area represents the trinomial 2 5 6x x . The width across the top is
1 1 1x or 3x and the length down the
side is 1 1x or 2x . To obtain the area
of the rectangle, you would multiply the
length times the width or 2 3x x .
Notice that this result is the same as when we
found factors of the constant term that added
to the coefficient of the x term.
2x
x
x
x x
1 1
11 1
1
x 1 1
x
1
x
1
1
2x
x
x
x x
1 1
11 1
1
x 1 1
x
1
x
1
1
Jordan School District Page 51 Secondary Mathematics 2
When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a = 1, and b and c are
integers, find factors of c that add to equal b.
If p and q are the factors, the factored form looks like x p x q .
Example:
2 5 6x x
Factors of 6 Sum
(adds to be)
1 -6 -5
2 -3 -1
-1 6 5
-2 3 1
Find factors of -6 that add to be 5. The factors
are -1 and 6.
1 6x x This is the factored form.
This example can also be modeled with an area model as the picture below demonstrates.
The rectangular area represents the trinomial 2 5 6x x . The width across the top is
1 1 1 1 1 1x or 6x and the length down the side is 1x . To obtain the area of
the rectangle, you would multiply the length times the width or 1 6x x . Notice
that this result is the same as when we found factors of the constant term that added to the
coefficient of the x term.
When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a = 1, and b and c are
integers, find factors of c that add to equal b.
If p and q are the factors, the factored form looks like x p x q .
2x
x
x x
1 1
1 11
1
x 1 1
x
1
x
1
x x x
1 1 1
Jordan School District Page 52 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
2 5 6x x
Factors of 6 Sum
(adds to be)
1 -6 -5
2 -3 -1
-1 6 5
-2 3 1
Find factors of -6 that add to be -5. The factors
are 1 and -6.
1 6x x This is the factored form.
This example can also be modeled with an area model as the picture below demonstrates.
The rectangular area represents the trinomial 2 5 6x x . The width across the top is
1 1 1 1 1 1x or 6x and the length down the side is 1x . To obtain the area of
the rectangle, you would multiply the length times the width or 1 6x x . Notice
that this result is the same as when we found factors of the constant term that added to the
coefficient of the x term.
Practice Exercises B
Factor each expression.
1. 2 4 21x x
4. 2 9 18x x
7. 2 215 14x xy y
2. 2 4 12x x
5. 2 72x x
8. 2 23 2x xy y
3. 2 2x x
6. 2 5 36x x
9. 2 217 72x xy y
2x
x
x x
1 1
1 11
1
x 1 1
x
1
x
1
x x x
1 1 1
Jordan School District Page 53 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
A perfect square is a number that can be expressed as the product of two equal integers. For
example: 100 is a perfect square because 10 10 100 and 2x is a perfect square because
2.x x x
FACTOR USING THE DIFFERENCE OF TWO SQUARES
When something is in the form 2 2a b , where a and b are perfect square expressions, the
factored form looks like a b a b .
Example:
2 49x
2
49 7 7
x x x
2x and 49 are both perfect squares and you are
finding the difference between them, so you
can use the difference of two squares to factor.
Therefore:
a x and 7b
7 7x x This is the factored form.
Example:
2 225 36x y
2
2
25 5 5
36 6 6
x x x
y y y
225x and 236y are both perfect squares and
you are finding the difference between them,
so you can use the difference of two squares to
factor.
Therefore:
5a x and 6b y
5 6 5 6x y x y This is the factored form.
Jordan School District Page 54 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
Factor each expression.
1. 249 25x
2. 2 264x y
3. 29 4x
4. 2 216 81x y
5. 236 121x
6. 2 2100 64x y
FACTOR BY GROUPING
When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a, b, and c are integers,
you will need to use the technique of factoring by grouping.
Example:
156 2 xx
(6)(15) = 90 Multiply the leading coefficient and
the constant.
Factors of 90
1 90
2 45
3 30
5 18
6 15
9 10
Choose the combination that will
either give the sum or difference
needed to result in the coefficient of
the x term.
In this case the difference should be -1,
so 9 and -10 will give you the desired
result. Or in other words, when you
combine 9 and 10x x you will end
up with x .
26 9 10 15x x x
Rewrite the equation using the
combination in place of the middle
term.
26 9 10 15x x x
Group the first two terms and the last
two terms together in order to factor.
3 2 3 5 2 3x x x
Factor the greatest common factor out
of each group.
32 x
Write down what is in the parenthesis
(they should be identical). This is one
of the factors.
5332 xx Add the “left-overs” to obtain the
second factor.
Jordan School District Page 55 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
212 7 10x x
(12)(10) = 120 Multiply the leading coefficient and
the constant.
Factors of 90
1 120
2 60
3 40
4 30
5 24
6 20
8 15
10 12
Choose the combination that will
either give the sum or difference
needed to result in the coefficient of
the x term.
In this case the difference should be 7,
so -8 and 15 will give you the desired
result. Or in other words, when you
combine 8 and 15x x you will end up
with 7x .
212 8 15 10x x x
Rewrite the equation using the
combination in place of the middle
term.
212 8 15 10x x x
Group the first two terms and the last
two terms together in order to factor.
4 3 2 5 3 2x x x
Factor the greatest common factor out
of each group.
3 2x
Write down what is in the parenthesis
(they should be identical). This is one
of the factors.
3 2 4 5x x Add the “left-overs” to obtain the
second factor.
Example:
24 25x
(4)(25) = 100 Multiply the leading coefficient and
the constant.
Factors of 100
1 100
2 50
4 25
5 20
10 10
Choose the combination that will
either give the sum or difference
needed to result in the coefficient of
the x term.
In this case the difference should be 0,
so -10 and 10 will give you the desired
result. Or in other words, when you
combine 10 and 10x x you will end
up with 0.
Jordan School District Page 56 Secondary Mathematics 2
24 10 10 25x x x
Rewrite the equation using the
combination in place of the middle
term.
24 10 10 25x x x
Group the first two terms and the last
two terms together in order to factor.
2 2 5 5 2 5x x x
Factor the greatest common factor out
of each group.
2 5x
Write down what is in the parenthesis
(they should be identical). This is one
of the factors.
2 5 2 5x x Add the “left-overs” to obtain the
second factor.
Practice Exercises D
Factor the expression.
1. 22 13 6x x
4. 22 11 6x x
7. 210 6x x
2. 24 3 1x x
5. 22 4 2x x
8. 26 7 20x x
3. 23 2 8x x
6. 23 6 3x x
9. 212 17 6x x
FACTORING GUIDELINES
#1: Always look for a greatest common factor. Then factor it out if there is one.
#2: Count the number of terms. If there are two terms, determine if you can use the
difference of two squares. If you can, factor. If not, proceed to #3.
#3: If there are three terms, check the leading coefficient. If it is “1”, then find factors of
the constant term that add to the coefficient of the x-term. If not, proceed to #4.
#4: If the leading coefficient is not “1”, factor by grouping.
Mixed practices E
Factor the expression.
1. 22 50x
4. 25 10 5x x
7. 24 4y y
10. 2 6x x
2. 2 22 16 32x xy y
5. 2 225 64x y
8. 2 13 42x x
11. 29 12 4x x
3. 23 5 12x x
6. 23 27x
9. 24 12 9x x
12. 28 2 3x x
Jordan School District Page 57 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 2 Cluster 2 (F.IF.8) , Unit 3 Cluster 1 (A.SSE.1a) and Unit 3
Cluster 2 (A.SSE.3a,b)
Forms of Quadratic Functions
Cluster 2: Analyzing functions using different representations
2.2.2 Writing functions in different but equivalent forms (quadratics: standard,
vertex, factored) using the processes of factoring or completing the square to
reveal and explain different properties of functions. Interpret these in terms of
a context.
Cluster 1: Interpret the structure of expressions
3.1.1a Interpret parts of an expression, such as terms, factors, and coefficients
Cluster 2: Writing expressions in equivalent forms and solving
3.2.1 Choose an appropriate from of an equation to solve problems (factor to find
zeros, complete the square to find maximums and minimums
VOCABULARY
Forms of Quadratic Functions
Standard Form: 2f x ax bx c , where 0a . Example: 2( ) 4 6 3 f x x x
Vertex Form: 2( ) ( ) f x a x h k , where 0a . Example:
2( ) 2( 3) 5 f x x
Factored Form: ( ) ( )( ) f x a x p x q , where 0a . Example: ( ) ( 4)( 7) f x x x
A zero of a function is a value of the input x that makes the output f x equal zero. The
zeros of a function are also known as roots, x-intercepts, and solutions of 2 0ax bx c .
The Zero Product Property states that if the product of two quantities equals zero, at least
one of the quantities equals zero. If 0ab then 0a or 0b .
Finding Zeros (Intercepts) of a Quadratic Function
When a function is in factored form, the Zero Product Property can be used to find the zeros
of the function.
If f x ax x p then 0ax x p can be used to find the zeros of f x .
If 0 ax x p then either 0ax or 0x p .
Therefore, either 0x or x p .
Jordan School District Page 58 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example: Find the zeros of 2 7f x x x
2 7f x x x
2 7 0x x
Substitute zero in for f(x).
2 0x or 7 0x Use the zero product property to set each
factor equal to zero.
0x or 7x Solve each equation.
The zeros are 0,0 and 7,0 Write them as ordered pairs.
If f x x p x q then 0x p x q can be used to find the zeros of
f x .
If 0x p x q then either 0x p or 0x q .
Therefore, either x p or x q .
Example: Find the zeros of 5 9f x x x
5 9f x x x
5 9 0x x Substitute zero in for f(x).
5 0x or 9 0x Use the zero product property to set each
factor equal to zero.
5x or 9x Solve each equation.
The zeros are 5,0 and 9,0 Write them as ordered pairs.
NOTE: If a quadratic function is given in standard form, factor first then
apply the Zero Product Property.
Example: Find the zeros of 2 11 24f x x x
2 11 24f x x x
2 11 24 0x x Substitute zero in for f(x).
8 3 0x x Factor the trinomial. (See factoring
lesson in Unit 2 for extra help.)
8 0x or 3 0x Use the zero product property to set each
factor equal to zero.
8x or 3x Solve each equation.
The zeros are 8,0 and 3,0 Write them as ordered pairs.
Jordan School District Page 59 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example: Find the zeros of 24 4 15f x x x
24 4 15f x x x
24 4 15 0x x Substitute zero in for f(x).
2 5 2 3 0x x Factor the trinomial.
2 5 0x or 2 3 0x Use the zero product property to set each
factor equal to zero. 2 5
5
2
x
x
or
2 3
3
2
x
x
Solve each equation.
The zeros are 5
,02
and 3
,02
Write them as ordered pairs.
Practice Exercises A
Find the zeros of each function.
1. 7f x x x
4. 21 3f x x x
7. 2 8 12f x x x
10. 29 25f x x
2. 2 6f x x x
5. 2 7 6f x x x
8. 2 10 24f x x x
11. 25 4 12f x x x
3. 13 4f x x x
6. 2 2f x x x
9. 24 12f x x x
12. 23 17 10f x x x
COMPLETING THE SQUARE
To complete the square of
2 ,x bx add
2
2
b
. In other
words, divide the x
coefficient by two and square
the result.
2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2
x bx
x bx
b bx x
bx
b
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
3 3
3
6
2
3
9
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x
Jordan School District Page 60 Secondary Mathematics 2
An area model can be used to represent the process of completing the square for the
expression 2 6 ___x x .
To complete the square of
2 ,x bx add
2
2
b
. In other
words, divide the x
coefficient by two and square
the result.
2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2
x bx
x bx
b bx x
bx
b
2
2
2
2
25
2
25
4
5
5
5
5 5
2 2
5
2
x x
x x
x x
x x
x
To complete the square of 2 ,ax bx factor out the
leading coefficient, a, giving
you 2 ba x x
a
. Now add
2
2
b
a
, which is the square
of the coefficient of x divided
by two. 2
2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2
ax bx
a x x
ba x x
a
b ba x x
a a
ba x
a
b
a
b
a
2
2
2
2
2
22
3 6
3
63
3
3 2
3 1 1
3
6
3
6
2 3
1
1
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x
The goal is to arrange the pieces into a square.
The x pieces are divided evenly between the
two sides so that each side is 3x long.
However, there is a large piece of the square
that is missing. In order to complete the
square you need to add 9 ones pieces.
x
x
1 1 1
1
1
1
2x x x x
x
x
x
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Jordan School District Page 61 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
For each expression complete the square.
1. 2 10 ___x x
4. 24 16 ___x x
2. 2 7 ___x x
5. 22 12 ___x x
3. 2 22 ___x x
6. 25 20 ___x x
Finding Maximum/Minimum (the vertex) Points of a Quadratic Function
VOCABULARY
Remember when a quadratic function is in vertex form 2( ) ( ) f x a x h k the point ,h k
is the vertex of the parabola. The value of a determines whether the parabola opens up or
down.
The vertex of a parabola that opens up, when 0a , is the minimum point of a quadratic
function.
The vertex of a parabola that opens up, when 0a , is the maximum point of a quadratic
function.
Example:
Find the vertex of 2
( ) 2 3f x x , then determine whether it is a maximum
or minimum point.
2
( ) 2 3f x x
2
( ) 2 3f x x Rewrite the equation so it is in the general
vertex form2( ) ( )f x a x h k .
Vertex: (-2, -3) 2 and 3h k
The vertex is a minimum. The leading coefficient is 1, which makes
0a
Jordan School District Page 62 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Find the vertex of 2
( ) 5 8 4f x x , then determine whether it is a maximum
or minimum point.
2
( ) 5 8 4f x x
2
( ) 5 8 4f x x This equation is already in the general vertex
form2( ) ( )f x a x h k .
Vertex: (8, 4) 8 and 4h k
The vertex is a maximum. The leading coefficient is -5, which makes
0a .
Practice Exercises C
Find the vertex and determine whether it is a maximum or minimum point.
1. 2
4 5 3f x x
4. 2
2 6f x x
2. 2
3 7f x x
5. 2
5 2 3f x x
3. 26 5f x x
6. 2
7 1 2f x x
NOTE: If a quadratic function is given in standard form, complete the
square to rewrite the equation in vertex form.
Example:
Find the vertex of 2( ) 12 7 f x x x , then determine whether it is a maximum
or minimum point.
2( ) 12 7 f x x x
2( ) 12 7f x x x
Collect variable terms together inside
parenthesis with constant term outside
the parenthesis.
2
2
2
( ) 1212
712
2 2f x x x
2 2 2( ) 12 76 6f x x x
Complete the square by adding
2
2
b
inside the parenthesis. Now subtract 2
2
b outside the parenthesis to
maintain equality. In other words you
are really adding zero to the equation.
Jordan School District Page 63 Secondary Mathematics 2
2( ) 12 36 67 3f x x x Simplify
2
( ) 6 29f x x Factor and combine like terms.
Vertex: (-6, -29) 6 and 29h k
The vertex is a minimum. The leading coefficient is 1, which
makes 0a
Example: Find the vertex of 2( ) 3 18 2 f x x x , then determine whether it is a
maximum or minimum point.
2( ) 3 18 2 f x x x
2( ) 3 18 2f x x x
Collect variable terms together inside
parenthesis with constant term outside
the parenthesis.
2( ) 3 6 2f x x x Factor out the leading coefficient. In
this case 3.
2
2
26 6
32 2
( ) 3 6 2f x x x
2 2 2( ) 3 6 23 3 3f x x x
Complete the square by adding
2
2
b
inside the parenthesis. Notice that
everything in the parenthesis is
multiplied by 3 so we need to subtract 2
32
b
outside the parenthesis to
maintain equality. In other words you
are really adding zero to the equation.
2( ) 3 6 9 272f x x x Simplify
2
( ) 3 3 29f x x Factor and combine like terms.
Vertex: (-3, -29) 3 and 29h k
The vertex is a minimum. The leading coefficient is 3, which
makes 0a
Jordan School District Page 64 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example: Find the vertex of 2( ) 4 8 3f x x x , then determine whether it is a
maximum or minimum point.
2( ) 4 8 3f x x x
2( ) 4 8 3f x x x
Collect variable terms together inside
parenthesis with constant term outside
the parenthesis.
2( ) 4 2 3f x x x Factor out the leading coefficient. In
this case -4.
2
2
22 2
( ) 4 22
3 42
f x x x
2 22( ) 4 1 13 42f x x x
Complete the square by adding
2
2
b
inside the parenthesis. Notice that
everything in the parenthesis is
multiplied by -4 so we need to subtract 2
42
b
outside the parenthesis to
maintain equality. In other words you
are really adding zero to the equation.
2 1 4( ) 4 2 3f x x x Simplify
2
( ) 4 1 7f x x Factor and combine like terms.
Vertex: (-1, 7) 1 and 7h k
The vertex is a maximum. The leading coefficient is -4, which
makes 0a
Practice Exercises D
Find the vertex of each equation by completing the square. Determine if the vertex is a
maximum or minimum.
1. 2( ) 10 20 f x x x
2. 2( ) 24 1 f x x x
3. 2( ) 5 20 9 f x x x
4. 2( ) 2 16 26 f x x x
5. 2( ) 8 10 f x x x
6. 2( ) 2 9f x x x
Jordan School District Page 65 Secondary Mathematics 2
The axis of symmetry is the vertical line that
divides a parabola in half. The zeros will
always be the same distance from the axis of
symmetry.
The vertex always lies on the axis of
symmetry.
When completing the square we end up with
2
( )2
bf x a x k
a
2
( )2
bf x a x k
a
2
( )f x a x h k
Notice the x-coordinate of the vertex is 2
b
a .
The y-coordinate can be found by evaluating
the function at 2
b
a .
Therefore, another method for finding the
vertex (h, k) from a standard form equation is
to use 2
bh
a and
2
bk f
a.
Example:
2( ) 3 2 1 f x x x
12 122
2( 3) 6
h
2(2) 3(2) 12(2) 1 11 k f
The point (2, 11) is the vertex. Since 3 0 ,
(2, 11) is the maximum point of the function.
Practice Exercises E
Identify the vertex of each function. Then tell if it is a maximum or minimum point.
1. 24 8 7f x x x
3. 22 12 3f x x x
2. 2 12 30f x x x
4. 2 14 1f x x x
Axis of symmetry
Jordan School District Page 66 Secondary Mathematics 2
YOU DECIDE
A model rocket is launched from ground level. The function 2( ) 16 160 h t t t models the
height h (measured in feet) of the rocket after time t (measured in seconds).
Find the zeros and the vertex of the function. Explain what each means in context of the
problem.
Practice Exercises F
Solve
1. The height h(t), in feet, of a “weeping willow” firework display, t seconds after having been
launched from an 80-ft high rooftop, is given by 216 64 80h t t t . When will it reach
its maximum height? What is its maximum height?
2. The value of some stock can be represented by 22 8 10V x x x , where x is the number
of months after January 2012. What is the lowest value V(x) will reach, and when did that
occur?
3. Suppose that a flare is launched upward with an initial velocity of 80 ft/sec from a height of
224 ft. Its height in feet, h(t), after t seconds is given by 216 80 224h t t t . How long
will it take the flare to reach the ground?
4. A company’s profit can be modeled by the equation 2( ) 980 3000p x x x where x is the
number of units sold. Find the maximum profit of the company.
5. The Rainbow Bridge Arch at Lake Powell is the world’s highest natural arch. The height of
an object that has been dropped from the top of the arch can be modeled by the equation 2( ) 16 256h t t , where t is the time in seconds and h is the height in feet. How long does
it take for the object to reach the ground?
6. The amount spent by U.S. companies for online advertising can be approximated by
212 8
2a t t t , where a(t) is in billions of dollars and t is the number of years after 2010.
In what year after 2010 did U.S. companies spend the least amount of money?
Jordan School District Page 67 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 6 Cluster 3 (G.GPE.2): Parabolas as Conics
Cluster 3: Translating between descriptions and equations for a conic section
6.3.2 Find the equation of a parabola given the focus and directrix parallel to a
coordinate axis.
VOCABULARY
A parabola is the set of all points , ,P x y , in a plane that are an equal distance from both a fixed
point, the focus, and a fixed line, the directrix.
Jordan School District Page 68 Secondary Mathematics 2
Standard Form for the Equation of a Parabola Vertex at (0, 0) Vertex at (h, k)
Equation 21
4y x
p
21
4 y k x h
p
Direction Opens upward if 0p
Opens downward if 0p
Opens upward if 0p
Opens downward if 0p
Focus (0, p) (h, k + p)
Directrix y p y k p
Graph
Example 1:
Use the Distance Formula to find the equation of a parabola with focus 0,3 and
directrix 3 y .
PF PD
2 2 2 2
1 1 2 2( ) ( ) ( ) ( )x x y y x x y y
A point ,P x y on the graph of a parabola is
the same distance from the focus 0,3F and
a point on the directrix , 3D x .
2 2 2 20 ( 3) ( ) ( 3)x y x x y
Substitute in known values.
22 2( 3) 3x y y Simplify.
22
22 2
2 2 2
( 3) 3
( 3) ( 3)
x y y
x y y
Square both sides of the equation and use the
properties of exponents to simplify.
Jordan School District Page 69 Secondary Mathematics 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
2
2
( 3) ( 3)
6 9 6 9
12
1
12
x y y
x y y y y
x y
y x
Solve for y.
Example:
Use the Distance Formula to find the equation of a parabola with focus (-5, 3) and
directrix 9y .
PF PD
2 2 2 2
1 1 2 2( ) ( ) ( ) ( )x x y y x x y y
A point ,P x y on the graph of a parabola is
the same distance from the focus 5,3F and
a point on the directrix ,9D x .
2 2 2 25 ( 3) ( ) ( 9)x y x x y
Substitute in known values.
2 225 ( 3) 9x y y Simplify.
2 22 22
2 2 2
5 ( 3) 9
5 ( 3) ( 9)
x y y
x y y
Square both sides of the equation and use the
properties of exponents to simplify.
2 2 2
2 2 2
2
2
2
5 ( 9) ( 3)
5 18 81 6 9
5 12 72
5 12 6
15 6
12
x y y
x y y y y
x y
x y
x y
Combine the x terms on one side of the
equation and the y terms on the other side of
the equation.
Practice Exercises A Use the distance formula to find the equation of parabola with the given information.
1. focus 0, 5
directrix 5y
2. focus 0,7
directrix 7y
3. focus 0, 3
directrix 6y
4. focus 2,6
directrix 8y
5. focus 3,4
directrix 1y
6. focus 3,3
directrix 7y
Jordan School District Page 70 Secondary Mathematics 2
Standard Form for the Equation of a Parabola Vertex at (0, 0) Vertex at (h, k)
Equation 21
4x y
p
21
4x h y k
p
Direction Opens to the right if 0p
Opens to the left if 0p
Opens to the right if 0p
Opens to the left if 0p
Focus ,0p ,h p k
Directrix x p x h p
Graph
Example:
Use the Distance Formula to find the equation of a parabola with focus 2,0 and
directrix 2x .
PF PD
2 2 2 2
1 1 2 2( ) ( ) ( ) ( )x x y y x x y y
A point ,x y on the graph of a parabola is the
same distance from the focus 2,0 and a point
on the directrix 2, y .
2 2 2 22 ( 0) ( 2) ( )x y x y y Substitute in known values.
2 222 2x y x Simplify.
2 22 22
2 2 2
2 2
2 ( 2)
x y x
x y x
Square both sides of the equation and use the
properties of exponents to simplify.
Jordan School District Page 71 Secondary Mathematics 2
2 22
2 2 2
2
2
2 2
4 4 4 4
8
1
8
y x x
y x x x x
y x
y x
Solve for x.
Example:
Use the Distance Formula to find the equation of a parabola with focus 4,3 and
directrix 6x .
PF PD
2 2 2 2
1 1 2 2( ) ( ) ( ) ( )x x y y x x y y
A point ,x y on the graph of a parabola is the
same distance from the focus 4,3 and a point
on the directrix 6, y .
2 2 2 2
4 3 6x y x y y Substitute in known values.
2 2 2
4 3 6x y x Simplify.
2 22 2 2
2 2 2
4 3 6
4 3 6
x y x
x y x
Square both sides of the equation and use the
properties of exponents to simplify.
2 2 2
2 2 2
2
2
2
3 6 4
3 12 36 8 16
3 4 20
3 4 5
13 5
4
y x x
y x x x x
y x
y x
y x
Combine the x terms on one side of the
equation and the y terms on the other side of
the equation.
Practice Exercises B Use the distance formula to find the equation of parabola with the given information.
1. focus 4,0
directrix 4x
2. focus 5,0
directrix 5x
3. focus 3,0
directrix 3x
4. focus 2, 3
directrix 5x
5. focus 2, 4
directrix 6x
6. focus 1,1
directrix 5x
Jordan School District Page 72 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C Determine the vertex, focus, directrix and the direction for each of the following parabolas.
1. 2
12 1 3y x
4. 2
6 3 1y x
2. 2
4 6 1x y
5. 2
3 12 2y x
3. 2
1 4 5y x
6. 2
6 16 4y x
You Decide
A parabola has focus (-2,1) and directrix y = -3. Determine whether or not the point (2,1) is part
of the parabola. Justify your response.
Jordan School District Page 73 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 6 Cluster 3 Honors (G.GPE.3)
Deriving Equations of Ellipses and Hyperbolas
Cluster 3: Translate between the geometric description and the equation for a conic section
H.5.1 Derive the equations of ellipses and hyperbolas given the foci, using the fact that
the sum or difference of distances from the foci is constant.
VOCABULARY
An ellipse is the set of all points in a plane the sum of whose distances from two fixed points
(called foci), 1F and 2F , is constant. The midpoint of the segments connecting the foci is the
center of the ellipse.
An ellipse can be elongated horizontally or vertically. The line through the foci intersects the
ellipse at its vertices. The segment whose endpoints are the vertices is called the major axis.
The minor axis is a segment that is perpendicular to the major axis and its endpoints intersect
the ellipse.
Jordan School District Page 74 Secondary Mathematics 2
Deriving the Standard Equation of an Ellipse
1 2 2PF PF a
The sum of the
distance from a point
,P x y on the
ellipse to each foci,
,0 and ,0c c , is
equal to 2a.
2 2 2 2
0 0 2x c y x c y a
Use the distance
formula and
substitute in known
values.
2 2 2 2
0 2 0x c y a x c y Isolate one of the
radicals.
2 22 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 22
2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 22
0 2 0
0 4 4 0 0
2 4 4 0 2
4 4 4 0
x c y a x c y
x c y a a x c y x c y
x xc c y a a x c y x xc c y
xc a a x c y
Square each side
then simplify.
2 22
22 2
2 22
2 22
4 4 4 0
4 40
4
0
0
cx a a x c y
cx aa x c y
cx a a x c y
a cx a x c y
Isolate the radical
again.
22 2 22
2 24 2 2 2 2
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0
2 0
2 2
2 2
a cx a x c y
a a cx c x a x c y
a a cx c x a x cx c y
a a cx c x a x a cx a c a y
a c x a x a c a y
Square each side
then simplify.
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
a a c a x c x a y
a a c x a c a y
Combine all the
terms containing x
and y on one side.
2 2 2 2 2 2a b x b a y Let 2 2 2b a c .
Jordan School District Page 75 Secondary Mathematics 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2
2 2
2 21
a b x b a y
a b a b
x y
a b
Divide by2 2a b .
Standard Form for the Equation of an Ellipse Centered at (0, 0)
Equation
Horizontal Ellipse
2 2
2 2
2 21,
x ya b
a b
Vertical Ellipse
2 2
2 2
2 21,
x ya b
b a
Major Axis Along the x-axis
Length: 2a
Along the y-axis
Length: 2a
Minor Axis Along the y-axis
Length: 2b
Along the x-axis
Length: 2b
Foci ,0 and ,0c c 0, and 0,c c
Vertices ,0 and ,0a a 0, and 0,a a
Pythagorean
Relation 2 2 2a b c
2 2 2a b c
Basic Graph
Example:
Locate the vertices and foci for the ellipse2 225 4 100x y . Graph the ellipse.
2 225 4 100x y 2 2
2 2
25 4 100
100 100 100
14 25
x y
x y
The standard equation of an ellipse is equal
to 1. Divide each side of the equation by
100 and simplify.
Jordan School District Page 76 Secondary Mathematics 2
2 2
14 25
25 5
4 2
x y
a
b
Identify a and b. Remember 2 2a b .
Note: a and b are lengths therefore the
positive square root will ALWAYS be
used. 2
2
25 4
21
21
c
c
c
Use a and b to find c.
Remember2 2 2a b c .
Vertices: 0, 5 and 0,5
Foci: 0, 21 and 0, 21
The vertices are 0, and 0,a a and the
foci are 0, and 0,c c because the
ellipse is vertical.
Begin graphing the ellipse by plotting the
center which is at (0, 0). Then plot the
vertices which are at 0, 5 and 0,5 .
Use the length of b to plot the endpoints
of the minor axis. 2b so the endpoints
are 2 units to the left and right of the
center (0, 0). They are at 2,0 and
2,0 .
Connect your points with a curve.
Jordan School District Page 77 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Write an equation in standard form for an ellipse with foci located at 2,0 and 2,0
and vertices located at 6,0 and 6,0 .
2 2
2 21
x y
a b
The ellipse is horizontal because the foci
and vertices are along the x-axis. Use the
standard equation for a horizontal ellipse. 2 2 2
2
2
6 2
36 4
32
b
b
b
6
2
a
c
Find 2b using
2 2 2a b c .
2 2
136 32
x y Substitute in known values.
Practice Exercises A Locate the vertices and foci of the ellipse, then graph.
1. 2 2
116 7
x y 2.
2 2
121 25
x y 3.
2 2
127 36
x y
4. 2 23 4 12x y 5.
2 29 4 36x y 6. 2 21 4x y
Write an equation in standard form for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions.
7. Foci: 5,0 and 5,0
Vertices: 8,0 and 8,0
8. Foci: 0, 4 and 0,4
Vertices: 0, 7 and 0,7
9. Foci: 0, 3 and 0,3
Vertices: 0, 4 and 0,4
10. Foci: 6,0 and 6,0
Vertices: 10,0 and 10,0
11. Major axis endpoints: 0, 6
Minor axis length 8
12. Endpoints of axes are 5,0 and
0, 4
Jordan School District Page 78 Secondary Mathematics 2
Ellipses Centered at (h, k)
Standard Form for the Equation of an Ellipse Centered at (h, k)
Equation
2 2
2 2
2 21,
x h y ka b
a b
2 2
2 2
2 21,
x h y ka b
b a
Center ,h k ,h k
Major Axis Parallel to the x-axis
Length: 2a
Parallel to the y-axis
Length: 2a
Minor Axis Parallel to the y-axis
Length: 2b
Parallel to the x-axis
Length: 2b
Foci , and ,h c k h c k , and ,h k c h k c
Vertices , and ,h a k h a k , and ,h k a h k a
Pythagorean
Relation 2 2 2a b c
2 2 2a b c
Example:
Locate the center, the vertices and the foci of the ellipse 2 2
3 4 2 16x y . Graph
the ellipse.
2 2
3 4 2 16x y
2 2
2 2
3 4 2 16
16 16 16
3 21
16 4
x y
x y
The standard equation of an ellipse is
equal to 1. Divide each side of the
equation by 16 and simplify.
2 2
3 21
16 4
16 4
4 2
x y
a
b
Identify a and b. Remember
2 2a b .
2
2
16 4
12
12
2 3
c
c
c
c
Use a and b to find c.
Remember 2 2 2a b c .
Center: 3,2
Vertices:
3 4,2 and 3 4,2
7,2 and 1,2
Foci: 3 2 3,2 and 3 2 3,2
3 and 2h k
The ellipse is horizontal, therefore the
vertices are , and ,h a k h a k and
the foci are , and ,h c k h c k .
Jordan School District Page 79 Secondary Mathematics 2
Begin graphing the ellipse by plotting the
center of the ellipse 3,2 . Then plot the
vertices 7,2 and 1,2 .
Use the length of b to plot the endpoints of
the minor axis. 2b so the endpoints are
2 units above and below the center
3,2 . They are at 3,0 and 3,4 .
Connect your points with a curve.
Example:
Write an equation in standard form for an ellipse with foci at 2,1 and 2,5 and
vertices at 2, 1 and 2,7 .
2 2
2 21
x h y k
b a
The ellipse is vertical because the foci and
vertices are parallel to the y-axis. Use the
standard equation for a horizontal ellipse.
2 2 2
2
2
4 2
16 4
12
b
b
b
2 7 ( 1)
2 8
4
a
a
a
2 5 1
2 4
2
c
c
c
Find 2b using
2 2 2a b c .
Center: 2 2 1 7
, 2,32 2
The center is the midpoint of the vertices.
2 2
2 31
12 16
x y Substitute in known values.
Jordan School District Page 80 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B Locate the center, vertices and foci of the ellipse, then graph.
1.
2 22 1
19 4
x y 2.
2 2
4 21
9 25
x y 3.
2 2
3 11
9 16
x y
4. 2 2
3 9 2 18x y 5. 2 2
9 1 4 3 36x y 6. 2 2
2 4 4 3 24x y
Write an equation in standard form for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions.
7. Foci: 1, 4 and 5, 4
Vertices: 0, 4 and 6, 4
8. Foci: 3, 6 and 3,2
Vertices: 3, 7 and 3,3
9. Foci: 4,2 and 6,2
Vertices: 2,2 and 8,2
10. Foci: 1,0 and 1, 4
Vertices: 1,1 and 1, 5
11. Vertices: 5,2 and 3,2
Minor axis length is 6.
12. Vertices: 0,2 and 6,2
Minor axis length is 2.
Jordan School District Page 81 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
A hyperbola is the set of all points in a plane whose distances from two fixed points in the plane
have a constant difference. The fixed points are the foci of the hyperbola.
The line through the foci intersects the hyperbola at its vertices. The segment connecting the
vertices is called the transverse axis. The center of the hyperbola is the midpoint of the
transverse axis. Hyperbolas have two oblique asymptotes that intersect at the center.
Deriving the Standard Equation of a Hyperbola
1 2 2PF PF a
The difference of the
distance from a point
,P x y on the
hyperbola to each foci,
,0 and ,0c c , is
equal to 2a .
Jordan School District Page 82 Secondary Mathematics 2
2 2 2 2
2 22 2
0 0 2
2
x c y x c y a
x c y x c y a
Use the distance formula
and substitute in known
values.
2 22 22x c y a x c y
Isolate one of the
radicals.
2 22 22 2
2 2 22 2 2 2
2 2 22 2 2 2
22 2 2 2 2 2
22 2
2
4 4
4 4
2 2 4 4
4 4 4
x c y a x c y
x c y a a x c y x c y
x c y x c y a a x c y
x cx c x cx c a a x c y
cx a a x c y
Square each side then
simplify.
22 2
22 2
22 2
4 4 4
4 4
4
cx a a x c y
cx aa x c y
cx a a x c y
Isolate the radical again.
22 22 2
22 2 2 4 2 2
2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2
2
2 2
2 2
cx a a x c y
c x a cx a a x c y
c x a cx a a x cx c y
c x a cx a a x a cx a c a y
c x a a x a c a y
Square each side then
simplify.
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
c x a x a y a c a
x c a a y a c a
Combine all the terms
containing x and y on
one side.
2 2 2 2 2 2x b a y a b Let 2 2 2b c a .
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2
2 2
2 21
x b a y a b
a b a b
x y
a b
Divide by 2 2a b .
Jordan School District Page 83 Secondary Mathematics 2
Standard Form for the Equation of a Hyperbola Centered at (0, 0)
Equation
Opens Left and Right
2 2
2 21
x y
a b
Opens Up and Down
2 2
2 21
y x
a b
Transverse
Axis
x-axis
Length: 2a
y-axis
Length: 2a
Conjugate
Axis
y-axis
Length:2b
x-axis
Length:2b
Foci ,0 and ,0c c 0, and 0,c c
Vertices ,0 and ,0a a 0, and 0,a a
Pythagorean
Relation 2 2 2c a b
2 2 2c a b
Asymptotes b
y xa
a
y xb
Basic Graph
Example:
Find the vertices, foci and asymptotes of the hyperbola 2 24 9 36x y . Then graph the
hyperbola.
2 24 9 36x y 2 2
2 2
4 9 36
36 36 36
19 4
x y
x y
The standard equation of an ellipse is
equal to 1. Divide each side of the
equation by 36 and simplify.
Jordan School District Page 84 Secondary Mathematics 2
2 2
19 4
9 3
4 2
x y
a
b
Identify a and b.
2
2
9 4
13
13
c
c
c
Use a and b to find c.
Remember2 2 2c a b .
Vertices: 3,0 and 3,0
Foci: 13,0 and 13,0
Asymptotes:2
3y x and
2
3y x
This hyperbola opens left and right so the
vertices are ,0a and ,0a and the foci
are ,0 and ,0c c .
The asymptotes are b
y xa
.
Begin graphing the hyperbola by plotting
the center at (0, 0). Then plot the vertices
at 3,0 and 3,0 .
Use the length of b to plot the endpoints of
the conjugate axis. 2b so the endpoints
are 2 units above and below the center
0,0 . They are at 0, 2 and 0,2 .
Construct a rectangle using the points.
Jordan School District Page 85 Secondary Mathematics 2
Draw the asymptotes by drawing a line
that connects the diagonal corners of the
rectangle and the center.
Use the asymptotes to help you draw the
hyperbola. The hyperbola will open left
and right and pass through each vertex.
Example:
Write an equation in standard form for the hyperbola with foci 0, 3 and 0,3 whose
conjugate axis has length 4.
2 2
2 21
y x
a b
The foci are along the y-axis so the
hyperbola’s branches open up and down.
2 4
2
b
b
The conjugate axis is length 4. Use it to
solve for b.
2 2 2
2
2
3 2
9 4
5
a
a
a
Use 2b and 3c to solve for 2a .
Remember 2 2 2c a b .
2 2
15 4
y x Substitute in known values.
Jordan School District Page 86 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C Locate the center, vertices, foci and asymptotes of the hyperbola, then graph.
1. 2 2
14 16
x y 2.
2 2
125 36
y x 3.
2 2
11 9
x y
4. 2 220 25 100y x 5. 2 24 16 64y x 6. 2 22 4 16x y
Write an equation in standard form for the hyperbola that satisfies the given conditions.
7. Foci: 0, 2 and 0,2
Vertices: 0, 1 and 0,1
8. Foci: 5,0 and 5,0
Vertices: 3,0 and 3,0
9. Foci: 0, 7 and 0,7
Vertices: 0, 5 and 0,5
10. Foci: 10,0 and 10,0
Vertices: 6,0 and 6,0
11. Vertices: 4,0 and 4,0
Conjugate axis length is 10.
12. Vertices: 0, 3 and 0,3
Conjugate axis length is 6.
Standard Form for the Equation of a Hyperbola Centered at (h, k)
Equation
Opens Left and Right
2 2
2 21
x h y k
a b
Opens Up and Down
2 2
2 21
y k x h
a b
Transverse
Axis
Parallel to x-axis
Length: 2a
Parallel to y-axis
Length: 2a
Conjugate
Axis
y-axis
Length:2b
x-axis
Length:2b
Foci , and ,h c k h c k , and ,h k c h k c
Vertices , and ,h a k h a k , and ,h k a h k a
Pythagorean
Relation 2 2 2c a b
2 2 2c a b
Asymptotes b
y k x ha
a
y k x hb
Jordan School District Page 87 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Find the center, vertices, foci and asymptotes of the hyperbola
2 22 5
19 49
x y .
Then graph the hyperbola.
2 2
2 51
9 49
x y
2 2
2 51
9 49
9 3
49 7
x y
a
b
Identify a and b.
2
2
9 49
58
58
c
c
c
Use a and b to find
2c . Remember that 2 2 2c a b .
Center: 2,5
Vertices:
2 3,5 and 2 3,5
5,5 and 1,5
Foci: 2 58,5 and 2 58,5
Asymptotes: 7
5 23
y x and
7
5 23
y x
The hyperbola’s branches open left and
right so the vertices are ,h a k and
,h a k . The foci are ,h c k and
,h c k .
Begin graphing the hyperbola by plotting
the center at (-2, 5). Then plot the
vertices at 5,5 and 1,5 .
Jordan School District Page 88 Secondary Mathematics 2
Use the length of b to plot the endpoints
of the conjugate axis. 7b so the
endpoints are 7 units above and below the
center 2,5 . They are at 2, 2 and
2,12 .
Construct a rectangle using the points.
Draw the asymptotes by drawing a line
that connects the diagonal corners of the
rectangle and the center.
Use the asymptotes to help you draw the
hyperbola. The hyperbola will open left
and right and pass through each vertex.
Jordan School District Page 89 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Write an equation in standard form for the hyperbola whose vertices are 2, 1 and
8, 1 and whose conjugate axis has length 8.
2 2
2 21
y k x h
a b
The foci are parallel to the x-axis so the
hyperbola’s branches open left and right.
Center: 2 8 1 1
, 3, 12 2
The midpoint of the vertices is the center
of the hyperbola.
2 8 ( 2)
2 10
5
a
a
a
The vertices are at 2, 1 and 8, 1 .
Use the distance between them to find a.
2 8
4
b
b
The conjugate axis is length 8. Use it to
solve for b.
2 2
3 11
25 16
x y Substitute in known values.
Practice Exercises D
Locate the center, vertices, foci and asymptotes of the hyperbola, then graph.
1.
2 25 6
125 16
y x 2.
2 25
14 36
x y 3.
2 2
1 31
49 16
x y
4. 2 2
4 2 6 16y x 5. 2 2
6 5 4 100y x 6. 2 2
7 4 4 2 28x y
Write an equation in standard form for the hyperbola that satisfies the given conditions.
7. Foci: 1,9 and 1,1
Vertices: 1,7 and 1,3
8. Foci: 2, 5 and 8, 5
Vertices: 0, 5 and 6, 5
9. Foci: 8, 4 and 4, 4
Vertices: 7, 4 and 3, 4
10. Foci: 3,5 and 3, 11
Vertices: 3,1 and 3, 7
11. Vertices: 3,6 and 3,2
Minor axis length is 8.
12. Vertices: 7, 2 and 3, 2
Minor axis length is 6.
Jordan School District Page 90 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 2 Cluster 3 (F.BF.1)
Building Functions That Model Relationships Between Two
Quantities
Cluster 3: Building functions that model relationships between two quantities
2.3.1 Focus on quadratics and exponentials to write a function that describes a
relationship between 2 quantities (2nd
difference for quadratics)
2.3.1 Determine an explicit expression or steps for calculation from context.
2.3.1 Combine functions using arithmetic operations.
Vocabulary
A function is a relation for which each input has exactly one output. In an ordered pair the
first number is considered the input and the second number is considered the output. If any
input has more than one output, then the relation is not a function.
For example the set of ordered pairs {(1,2), (3,5),(8,11)} is a function because each input
value has an output value. The set {(1, 2) (1, 3), (6, 7)} does not represent a function because
the input 1 has two different outputs 2 and 3.
Linear Function- a function that can be written in the
form y mx b ,where m and b are constants. The graph
of a linear function is a line.
A linear function can be expressed in two different ways:
Linear notation: y mx b
Function notation: f x mx b
2 1f x x
Linear functions can model arithmetic sequences, where
the domain is the set of positive integers, because there is
a common difference between each successive term. The
common difference can also be called the first difference.
Linear functions can model any pattern where the first
difference is the same number.
+2+2+2
1, 3, 5, 7, ...
1 st difference
Jordan School District Page 91 Secondary Mathematics 2
Exponential Function- a function of the form ( ) xf x ab
where a and b are constants and 0,a 0b , and 1.b
Exponential functions are most easily recognized by the
variable in the exponent. The values of f(x) are either
increasing (exponential growth) if 0a and 1b or
decreasing (exponential decay) if 0a and 0 1b .
2xf x
Exponential functions can model geometric sequences,
where the domain is the set of positive integers, because
each successive term is multiplied by the same number
called the common ratio. Exponential functions can
model any pattern where the next term is obtained by
multiplying each successive term by the same number.
Quadratic Function- a function that can be written in the
form 2( )f x ax bx c where 0a .
Quadratic functions are most easily recognized by the 2x
term. The graph is a parabola. A quadratic function can
be formed by multiplying two linear functions. The
quadratic function to the right can also be written as
( 3)(2 1)f x x x .
22 5 3f x x x
To determine if a pattern or a sequence can be modeled by
a quadratic function, you have to look at the first and
second difference. The second difference is the difference
between the numbers in the first difference. If the first
difference is not the same number but the second
difference is, then the pattern or sequence can be modeled
by a quadratic function.
1, 3, 9, 27, ...
+2+2
+7+5+3
1, 4, 9, 16, ...
3 3 3
1 st difference
2 nd difference
common ratio
Jordan School District Page 92 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Determine if the pattern 1, 3, 9, 19, … would be modeled by a linear function, an
exponential function, or a quadratic function.
Answer:
Check the first difference to see if it is the same
number each time. For this pattern, it is not the
same, so it will not be modeled by a linear
function.
Check to see if each term is being multiplied by
the same factor. For this pattern, it is not the
same, so it will not be modeled by an exponential
function.
Check the second difference to see if it is the
same number each time. For this pattern, it is the
same, so the pattern can be modeled by a
quadratic function.
Conclusion: The pattern can be modeled by a quadratic function.
Practice Exercises A
Determine if the pattern would be modeled by a linear function, an exponential function, or a
quadratic function.
1. 2.
3. 4. 10, 18, 28, …
5. 81, 27, 9, … 6. 8, 16, 24, …
+10+6+2
1, 3, 9, 19, ...
3 3 2.1
1, 3, 9, 19, ...
+4+4
+10+6+2
1, 3, 9, 19, ...
1 2 3 4 1
2
3
1 2 3 4
Jordan School District Page 93 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Using a graphing calculator determine the quadratic function modeled by the given
data
x 1 2 3 4 5 6
f(x) 1 9 23 43 69 101
Input the data into a TI-83 or TI-84 calculator list
Enter the information into your lists by pushing STAT
followed by Edit.
If you have values in your lists already, you can clear the
information by highlighting the name of the list then
pushing CLEAR and ENTER. Do not push DEL or it will
delete the entire list.
Enter the x values into L1 and the f(x) values into L2.
Push 2nd
MODE to get back to the home screen.
Make a scatter plot
Push 2nd
Y= to bring up the STAT PLOT menu.
Select Plot1 by pushing ENTER or 1.
Turn Plot1 on by pushing ENTER when ON is highlighted.
Make sure that the scatter plot option is highlighted. If it
isn’t, select it by pushing ENTER when the scatter plot
graphic is highlighted.
The Xlist should say L1 and the Ylist should say L2. If it
doesn’t, L1 can be entered by pushing 2nd
1 and L2 by 2nd
2.
To view the graph you can push GRAPH. If you want a
nice viewing window, first push ZOOM arrow down to
option 9 ZOOMSTAT and either push ENTER or push 9.
Creating a quadratic regression equation
You do not have to graph a function to create a regression,
but it is recommended that you compare your regression to
the data points to determine visually if it is a good model or
not.
From the home screen push STAT, arrow right to CALC
and either push 5 for QuadReg or arrow down to 5 and push
ENTER. (To do an exponential regression, push 0 for
ExpReg or arrow down to 0 and push ENTER.)
Type 2nd
1, (the comma is located above 7) 2nd
2, VARS
arrow right to Y-VARS select FUNCTION and Y1 then
push ENTER.
The quadratic regression is 23 1f x x x . It has been
pasted into Y1 so that you can push GRAPH again and
compare your regression to the data.
Jordan School District Page 94 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Find the regression equation. Round to three decimals when necessary.
1. Given the table of values use a graphing calculator to find the quadratic function.
x 0 1 2 3 4 5
f(x) -6 -21 -40 -57 -66 -61
2. Use a graphing calculator to find a quadratic model for the data.
x 1 2 3 4 5 6
f(x) 3 1 1 3 7 13
3. From 1972 to 1998 the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service has kept a list of endangered
species in the United States. The table below shows the number of endangered
species. Find an appropriate exponential equation to model the data.
Year 1972 1975 1978 1981 1984 1987 1990 1993 1996
Number of
species 119.6 157.5 207.3 273 359.4 473.3 623.1 820.5 1080.3
4. The cell phone subscribers of the small town of Herriman are shown below. Find an
exponential equation to model the data.
Year 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010
Subscribers 285 802 2,259 6,360 17,904
Example:
When doctors prescribe medicine, they must consider how much the effectiveness of
the drug will decrease as time passes. The table below provides information on how
much of the drug remains in a person’s system after t hours. Find a model for the
data.
t (hours) 0 2 4 6 8 10
Amount (mg) 250 225.6 203.6 183.8 165.9 149.7
Answer:
Sometimes it is helpful to look at the graph of the points.
For this particular example, it is difficult to determine if this
should be modeled by an exponential or a quadratic function
Jordan School District Page 95 Secondary Mathematics 2
from the graph. Therefore, consider the context of the
example. The amount of the drug will continue to decrease
unless more is given to the patient. If the patient does not
receive more medication, at some point there will only be trace
amounts of the drug left in the patient’s system. This would
suggest a function that continues to decrease until it reaches a
leveling off point. An exponential model would be better suited for this situation.
Use the regression capabilities of your graphing calculator to find an exponential
model for the data. Follow the instructions for the previous example but make sure
that you select option 0: ExpReg. The function that models the data is:
249.977 0.950x
f x .
Practice Exercises C
Determine if the data is best modeled by an exponential or quadratic function. Then find the
appropriate regression equation.
1. The pesticide DDT was widely used in the United States until its ban in 1972. DDT
is toxic to a wide range of animals and aquatic life, and is suspected to cause cancer
in humans. The half-life of DDT can be 15 or more years. Half-life is the amount of
time it takes for half of the amount of a substance to decay. Scientists and
environmentalists worry about such substances because these hazardous materials
continue to be dangerous for many years after their disposal. Write an equation to
model the data below.
Year 1972 1982 1992 2012
Amount of DDT (in grams) 50 9.8 1.9 0.4
2. Use a graphing calculator to find a model for the data.
x 1 2 3 4 5 6
f(x) 0 -7 -4 21 80 185
Jordan School District Page 96 Secondary Mathematics 2
3. The table shows the average movie ticket price in dollars for various years from 1983
to 2003. Find the model for the data.
Years since 1983, t 0 4 8 12 16 20
Movie ticket price, m 4.75 4.07 3.65 4.10 5.08 6.03
4. The table below shows the value of car each year after it was purchased. Find a
model for the data.
Years after purchase 0 1 2 3 4 5
Value of car 24,000 20,160 16,934 14,225 11,949 10,037
Combining functions using arithmetic operations
Let f and g be any two functions. A new function h can be created by performing any of the
four basic operations on f and g.
The domain of h consists of the x-values that are in the domains of both f and g. Additionally,
the domain of a quotient does not include x-values for which g(x) = 0.
Operation Definition Example: 2( ) 5 2f x x x ,
2( ) 3g x x
Addition h x f x g x 2 2 2( ) 5 2 ( 3 ) 2 2h x x x x x x
Subtraction h x f x g x 2 2 2( ) 5 2 ( 3 ) 8 2h x x x x x x
Multiplication h x f x g x 2 2 4 3( ) (5 2 ) ( 3 ) 15 6h x x x x x x
Division ( )( )
( )
f xh x
g x
2
2
5 25 2 5 2( )
3 3 3
x xx x xh x
x x x x
Adding and Subtracting Functions
Example:
Let 2 1f x x and 2 3 4g x x x . Perform the indicated operation and state
the domain of the new function.
a. h x f x g x b. h x g x f x c. 2h x f x g x
Jordan School District Page 97 Secondary Mathematics 2
Answer:
a. h x f x g x
22 1 3 4h x x x x Replace f x with 2 1x and g x
with 2 3 4x x .
22 1 3 4h x x x x Remove the parentheses because we
can add in any order.
2 5 3h x x x Combine the like terms. (2x + 3x),
(1 + – 4)
The domain is , . The domain for both f x and g x
is , . h x a quadratic function
just like g x so it has the same
domain.
b. h x g x f x
2 3 4 2 1h x x x x Replace g x with 2 3 4x x and
f x with 2 1x .
2 3 4 2 1h x x x x Distribute the negative throughout the
second term and remove the
parentheses.
2 5h x x x Combine the like terms.
The domain is , . The domain for both f x and g x
is , . h x a quadratic function,
just like g x , so it has the same
domain.
c. 2h x f x g x
22 2 1 3 4h x x x x Replace f x with 2 1x and g x
with 2 3 4x x .
24 2 3 4h x x x x Distribute the two through the first
term and distribute the negative
through the second term.
2 6h x x x Combine like terms.
The domain is , . The domain for both f x and g x
is , . h x a quadratic function
just like g x so it has the same
domain.
Jordan School District Page 98 Secondary Mathematics 2
Multiplying Functions
Example:
Let 2 1f x x and 2 3 4g x x x . Perform the indicated operation and state
the domain of the new function.
a. h x f x g x b. h x g x g x C. h x f x f x
Answer:
a. h x f x g x
22 1 3 4h x x x x Replace f x with 2 1x and g x
with 2 3 4x x
3 22 7 5 4h x x x x Multiply using your method of choice.
(See Unit 1 Cluster 4 lesson)
The domain is , . The domain for both f x and g x
is , . h x a polynomial
function just like g x so it has the
same domain.
b. h x g x g x
2 23 4 3 4h x x x x x Replace g x with 2 3 4x x
4 3 26 24 16h x x x x x Multiply using your method of
choice. (See Unit 1 Cluster 4 lesson)
The domain is , . The domain for g x is , .
h x a polynomial function just like
g x so it has the same domain.
c. h x f x f x
2 1 2 1h x x x Replace f x with 2 1x .
24 4 1h x x x Multiply using your method of choice.
(See Unit 1 Cluster 4 lesson)
The domain is , . The domain for f x is , .
h x a quadratic function so it has the
same domain.
Jordan School District Page 99 Secondary Mathematics 2
Dividing Functions
VOCABULARY
A rational function is a function of the form
p xr x
q x where p x and q x are
polynomials and 0q x . The domain of a rational function includes all real numbers
except for those that would make 0q x .
A rational expression is in simplified form if the numerator and the denominator have no
common factors other than 1 or -1.
Example:
Let 2 1f x x and 2 3 4g x x x . Perform the indicated operation and state
the domain of the new function.
a.
f xh x
g x b.
g xh x
f x C.
2 f xh x
f x
Answer:
a.
f xh x
g x
2
2 1
3 4
xh x
x x
Replace f x with 2 1x and g x
with 2 3 4x x
2 1
( 1)( 4)
xh x
x x
Factor the numerator and the
denominator to see if the function can
be simplified. (See Unit 2 Cluster 2
(F.IF.8) for help with factoring)
The domain is
, 4 4,1 1, .
The new function h x is a rational
function. The domain cannot include
any numbers for which the denominator
is zero. The denominator is zero when
4 and 1x x .
b.
g xh x
f x
2 3 4
2 1
x xh x
x
Replace f x with 2 1x and g x
with 2 3 4x x
( 1)( 4)
2 1
x xh x
x
Factor the numerator and the
denominator to see if the function can
be simplified. (See Unit 2 Cluster 2
“and”
Jordan School District Page 100 Secondary Mathematics 2
(F.IF.8) for help with factoring)
The domain is
1 1, ,
2 2
.
The new function h x is a rational
function. The domain cannot include
any numbers for which the denominator
is zero. The denominator is zero when
1
2x .
c.
2 f xh x
f x
2 2 1
2 1
xh x
x
Replace f x with 2 1x .
2(2 1)
2 1
xh x
x
Factor the numerator and the
denominator to see if the function can
be simplified. (See Unit 2 Cluster 2
(F.IF.8) for help with factoring)
2h x Divide out the factors and simplify the
expression.
The domain is
1 1, ,
2 2
.
Although the simplified form of h x
is not a rational function, it started out
as a rational function and the same
restrictions apply on the simplified
form. The denominator is zero when
1
2x .
Practice Exercises E
If 4 3f x x , 3 2g x x and 212 6h x x x , find the following. State the
domain of the new function.
1. f x h x
4. 3 5g x f x
7. g x h x
10.
f x
h x
2. 2f x g x
5. g x h x
8. f x h x
11.
g x
h x
3. 3h x g x
6. 4 2h x g x
9. h x h x
12.
f x
g x
Jordan School District Page 101 Secondary Mathematics 2
Evaluating Combined Functions
Example:
Let 5f x x and 22 8 5g x x x . Evaluate each expression.
a. 2 1f g b. 3 0f g c.
1
1
g
f
Answer:
a.
2 1f g
This expression tells you to find the value of f
at x = 2 and the value of g at x = 1 and add the
results.
2 2 5
2 7
f
f
Find the value of f at x = 2.
21 2(1) 8(1) 5
1 2 1 8 5
1 2 8 5
1 15
g
g
g
g
Find the value of g at x = 1.
7 15 22
2 1 22f g
Add the results.
b.
3 0f g
This expression tells you to find the value of f
at 3x and the value of g at x = 0 and
multiply the results.
3 3 5
3 2
f
f
Find the value of f at 3x .
20 2 0 8 0 5
0 2 0 0 5
0 0 0 5
0 5
g
g
g
g
Find the value of g at x = 0.
2 5 10
3 0 10f g
Multiply the results.
Jordan School District Page 102 Secondary Mathematics 2
c.
1
1
g
f
This expression tells you to find the value of g
at 1x and the value of f at 1x and
divide the results.
21 2 1 8 1 5
1 2 1 8 5
1 2 8 5
1 1
g
g
g
g
Find the value of g at 1x .
1 1 5
1 4
f
f
Find the value of f at 1x .
1
4
1 1
1 4
g
f
or -0.25
Divide the results.
Practice Exercises F
If 3 1f x x and 23 5 2g x x x , find the value of each expression.
1. 25 f
2. 1 3g f
3. 3
3
f
f
4. 512 gf
5. 2 4f g
6. 4
1
f
g
7. 2 4f g
8. 1 3 1f g
9.
0
2 0
g
f
Jordan School District Page 103 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises G
1. A company estimates that its cost and revenue can be modeled by the functions
20.75 100 20,000C x x x and 150 100R x x where x is the number of units
produced. The company’s profit, P, is modeled by R x C x . Find the profit equation
and determine the profit when 1,000,000 units are produced.
2. Consider the demand equation 1
30; 0 45015
p x x x where p represents the price
and x the number of units sold. Write an equation for the revenue, R, if the revenue is the
price times the number of units sold. What price should the company charge to have
maximum revenue?
3. The average Cost C of manufacturing x computers per day is obtained by dividing the cost
function by the number of computers produced that day, x. If the cost function is
3 20.5 34 1213C x x x x , find an equation for the average cost of manufacturing. What
is the average cost of producing 100 computers per day?
4. The service committee wants to organize a fund-raising dinner. The cost of renting a facility
is $300 plus $5 per chair or 5 300C x x , where x represents the number of people
attending the fund-raiser. The committee wants to charge attendees $30 each or 30R x x .
How many people need to attend the fund-raiser for the event to raise $1,000?
Jordan School District Page 104 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 2 Cluster 4 (F.BF.3 and F.BF.4): Transformations and Inverses
Cluster 4: Building New Functions from Existing Functions
2.4.1 Transformations, odd and even graphically and algebraically
2.4.2 Find inverse functions (simple) focus on linear and basic restrictions for
quadratics, introduce one-to-one and horizontal line test
VOCABULARY
There are several types of functions (linear, exponential, quadratic, absolute value, etc.). Each of
these could be considered a family. Each family has their own unique characteristics that are
shared among the members. The parent function is the basic function that is used to create
more complicated functions.
The graph of a quadratic function is in the shape of a parabola. This is generally described as
being “u” shaped.
The maximum or minimum point of a quadratic function is the vertex. When a quadratic
function is written in vertex form, 2
( )f x a x h k , then the vertex, ( , )h k , is highlighted.
The axis of symmetry is the vertical line that divides the graph in half, with each half being a
reflection of the other. The equation for the axis of symmetry is x h .
Quadratic parent function 2f x x
x 2f x x
-3 2( 3) 9
-2 2( 2) 4
-1 2( 1) 1
0 2(0) 0
1 2(1) 1
2 2(2) 4
3 2(3) 9
The axis of symmetry is the line 0x . The vertex is the point (0, 0). The domain is the set of
all real numbers , . The range is the set of positive real numbers including zero 0, .
Jordan School District Page 105 Secondary Mathematics 2
Vertical Shift: 2 2f x x
x 2 2f x x
-3 2( 3) 2 7
-2 2( 2) 2 2
-1 2( 1) 2 1
0 2(0) 2 2
1 2(1) 2 1
2 2(2) 2 2
3 2(3) 2 7
Axis of symmetry: 0x
Vertex: (0, -2)
Domain: ,
Range: 2,
Effect on the graph: The parabola has been shifted down 2 units.
Vertical Shift: 2 1f x x
x 2 1f x x
-3 2( 3) 1 10
-2 2( 2) 1 5
-1 2( 1) 1 2
0 2(0) 1 1
1 2(1) 1 2
2 2(2) 1 5
3 2(3) 1 10
Axis of symmetry: 0x
Vertex: (0, 1)
Domain: ,
Range: 1,
Effect on the graph: The parabola has been shifted up 1 unit.
Horizontal Shift: 2
2f x x
x 2
2f x x
-1 2( 1 2) 9
0 2(0 2) 4
1 2(1 2) 1
2 2(2 2) 0
3 2(3 2) 1
4 2(4 2) 4
5 2(5 2) 9
Axis of symmetry: 2x
Vertex: (2, 0)
Domain: ,
Range: 0,
Effect on the graph: the parabola has been shifted 2 units to the right.
Jordan School District Page 106 Secondary Mathematics 2
Horizontal Shift: 2
3f x x
x 2
3f x x
-6 2( 6 3) 9
-5 2( 5 3) 4
-4 2( 4 3) 1
-3 2( 3 3) 0
-2 2( 2 3) 1
-1 2( 1 3) 4
0 2(0 3) 9
Axis of symmetry: 3x
Vertex: (-3, 0)
Domain: ,
Range: 0,
Effect on the graph: the parabola has been shifted three units to the left.
Reflection: 2f x x
x 2f x x
-3 2( 3) 9
-2 2( 2) 4
-1 2( 1) 1
0 2(0) 0
1 2(1) 1
2 2(2) 4
3 2(3) 9
Axis of symmetry: 0x
Vertex: (0, 0)
Domain: ,
Range: ,0
Effect on the graph: the parabola has been reflected over the x-axis.
Vertical Stretch: 22f x x
x 22f x x
-3 22( 3) 18
-2 22( 2) 8
-1 22( 1) 2
0 22(0) 0
1 22(1) 2
2 22(2) 4
3 22(3) 18
Axis of symmetry: 0x
Vertex: (0, 0)
Domain: ,
Range: 0,
Effect on the graph: the y-coordinates of the parabola have been multiplied by 2.
Jordan School District Page 107 Secondary Mathematics 2
Vertical Shrink: 212
f x x
x 212
f x x
-3 2 91
2 2( 3)
-2 21
2( 2) 2
-1 21 1
2 2( 1)
0 21
2(0) 0
1 21 1
2 2(1)
2 21
2(2) 4
3 2 91
2 2( 3)
Axis of symmetry: 0x
Vertex: (0, 0)
Domain: ,
Range: 0,
Effect on the graph: the y-coordinates of the parabola have been divided 2.
2( )f x a x h k
Example:
Describe the transformations performed on 2f x x to make it 2( 1) 5f x x .
Then graph the function and identify the axis of symmetry, the vertex, the domain and the
range.
Transformations:
reflected over the x-axis
shifted one unit to the right
shifted up three units
Axis of symmetry: 1x
Vertex: (1, 5)
Domain: ,
Range: ,5
Vertical Stretch
or Reflection
Horizontal Shift
Vertical Shift
Jordan School District Page 108 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Describe the transformations performed on 2f x x to make it 23( 2) 4
2f x x .
Then graph the function and identify the axis of symmetry, the vertex, the domain and the
range.
Transformations:
y-coordinates multiplied by
3/2
shifted two units to the left
shifted down four units
Axis of symmetry: 2x
Vertex: (-2, -4)
Domain: ,
Range: 4,
Practice Exercises A
Describe the transformations performed on 2f x x to make it the following:
1. 2 6f x x 2. 2
5 7f x x 3. 2
3 4f x x
Graph each function and identify the axis of symmetry, the vertex, the domain and the range.
4. 2
2 6f x x
7. 2
5 6 4f x x
5. 2
2 1 3f x x
8. 23 4f x x
6. 212
2f x x
9. 23
23f x x
VOCABULARY
The absolute value function is actually a piecewise-defined function consisting of two linear
equations.
, if 0
, if 0
x xf x x
x x
Absolute value is often defined as the distance from zero. Therefore, the output is positive.
The point where the two linear equations meet is called the vertex. It is also the minimum or
maximum of the function. The vertex, ,h k , can easily be identified when the absolute value
function is represented in the form f x a x h k .
Jordan School District Page 109 Secondary Mathematics 2
Absolute Value parent function f x x
x f x x
-3 | 3 | 3
-2 | 2 | 2
-1 | 1| 1
0 | 0 | 0
1 |1| 1
2 | 2 | 2
3 | 3 | 3
The vertex is the point (0, 0). The domain is the set of all real numbers , . The range is
the set of positive real numbers including zero 0, .
Vertical Shift: 4f x x
x 4f x x
-3 | 3 | 4 1
-2 | 2 | 4 2
-1 | 1| 4 3
0 | 0 | 4 4
1 |1| 4 3
2 | 2 | 4 2
3 | 3 | 4 1
Vertex: (0, -4)
Domain: ,
Range: 4,
Effect on the graph: The function has been shifted down 4 units.
Jordan School District Page 110 Secondary Mathematics 2
Horizontal Shift: 1f x x
x 1f x x
-2 | 2 1| 3
-1 | 1 1| 2
0 | 0 1| 1
1 |1 1| 0
2 | 2 1| 1
3 | 3 1| 2
4 | 4 1| 3
Vertex: (1, 0)
Domain: ,
Range: 0,
Effect on the graph: The function has been shifted right 1 unit.
Reflection: f x x
x f x x
-3 | 3 | 3
-2 | 2 | 2
-1 | 1| 1
0 | 0 | 0
1 |1| 1
2 | 2 | 2
3 | 3 | 3
Vertex: (0, 0)
Domain: ,
Range: ,0
Effect on the graph: The function has been reflected over the x-axis.
Vertical Stretch: 3f x x
x 3f x x
-3 3| 3 | 9
-2 3| 2 | 6
-1 3| 1| 3
0 3| 0 | 0
1 3|1| 3
2 3| 2 | 6
3 3| 3 | 9
Vertex: (0, 0)
Domain: ,
Range: 0,
Effect on the graph: The y-coordinates of the function have been multiplied by 3.
Jordan School District Page 111 Secondary Mathematics 2
f x a x h k
Example:
Describe the transformations performed on f x x to make it 2 3 5f x x .
Then graph the function and identify the axis of symmetry, the vertex, the domain and the
range.
Transformations:
reflected over the x-axis
y-coordinates multiplied
by 2
shifted three units to the
right
shifted up five units
Vertex: (3, 5)
Domain: ,
Range: ,5
Practice Exercises B
Describe the transformations performed on f x x to make it the following:
1. 2 5f x x 2. 3 4f x x 3. 3 2 5f x x
Graph each function and identify the vertex, the domain and the range.
4. 6f x x
7. 2 5f x x
5. 2 4f x x
8. 3 1f x x
6. 12
1f x x
9. 32
4f x x
Vertical Stretch
or Reflection
Horizontal Shift
Vertical Shift
Jordan School District Page 112 Secondary Mathematics 2
Vocabulary
The words even and odd describe the symmetry that exists for the graph of a function.
A function is considered to be even if, for every number x in its domain, the number –x is also in the
domain and f x f x . Even functions have y-axis symmetry.
A function is considered to be odd if, for every number x in its domain, the number –x is also in the
domain and f x f x . Odd functions have origin symmetry.
Even Function
The function graphed at the left is even because (2, 1) is a
point on the graph and (-2, 1) is also a point on the graph.
Notice that -2 is the opposite of 2, but both inputs give the
same output. Therefore, f x f x , i.e. opposite inputs
generate the same output.
Odd Function
The function graphed at the left is odd because (2, 2) is a point
on the graph and (-2, -2) is also a point on the graph. Notice
that the input -2 is the opposite of 2, and gives the opposite
output from 2. Therefore, f x f x , i.e. opposite
inputs generate outputs that are opposites of each other.
Neither Even nor Odd
The function graphed at the left is neither even nor odd. It is
not even because the point (4, 2) is on the graph, but (-4, 2) is
not. Similarly, it is not odd because the point (-4, -2) is not a
point on the graph.
Jordan School District Page 113 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
Determine if the following graphs represent functions that are even, odd or neither.
1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
Determining Even and Odd Algebraically
It is possible to graph functions and visually determine whether the function is even or odd, but
there is also an algebraic test that can be applied. It was previously stated that if a function is
even, then evaluating the function at x and –x should produce the same output or f x f x .
If a function is odd, then evaluating the function at x and –x should produce outputs that are
opposite or f x f x .
Example:
Is the function 3f x x an even function, an odd function, or neither?
Original function. 3f x x
Substitute –x in for each x in the function. 3f x x
Simplify. 3f x x
Compare the output to the original function. 3 3x x
If they are the same, then the function is even.
If they are opposite, then the function is odd.
If they are anything else, then they are neither.
f x f x
f x f x
Conclusion: 3f x x is an odd function.
Jordan School District Page 114 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Is the function 2 4 4g x x x an even function, an odd function or neither?
Original function. 2 4 4g x x x
Substitute –x in for each x in the function. 2
4 4g x x x
Simplify. 2 4 4g x x x
Compare the output to the original function. 2 24 4 4 4x x x x
If they are the same, then the function is even.
If they are opposite, then the function is odd.
If they are anything else, then they are neither.
g x g x
g x g x
Conclusion: 2 4 4g x x x is neither an even nor an odd function.
Example:
Is the function 2 4h x x an even function, an odd function, or neither?
Original function. 2 4h x x
Substitute –x in for each x in the function. 2 4h x x
Simplify. 2 4h x x
Compare the output to the original function. 2 4 2 4x x
If they are the same, then the function is even.
If they are opposite, then the function is odd.
If they are anything else, then they are neither.
h x h x
h x h x
Conclusion: 2 4h x x is an even function.
Practice Exercises D
Determine algebraically if the function is even, odd, or neither.
1. 3 1f x x 2. 1
3f x x 3. 23f x x
4. 4 5f x x 5. 4f x x 6. 25
14
f x x
Jordan School District Page 115 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
The graph of an inverse relation is the reflection of the graph of the original relation. The line
of reflection is y = x.
The original relation is the set of ordered pairs: {(-2, 1), (-1, 2), (0, 0), (1, -2), (2, -4)}. The
inverse relation is the set of ordered pairs: {(1, -2), (2, -1), (0, 0), (-2, 1), (-4, 2)}. Notice that for
the inverse relation the domain (x) and the range (y) reverse positions.
Original Relation
Domain: {-2, -1, 0, 1, 2}
Range: {-4, -2, 0, 1, 2}
The points are reflected over
the line y x . Notice that
each point is the same distance
away from the line, but on the
opposite side of the line.
Inverse Relation
Domain: {-4, -2, 0, 1, 2}
Range: {-2, -1, 0, 1, 2}
Practice Exercises E
Find the inverse relation.
1. {(1, -1), (2, -2), (3, -3), (4, -4), (5, -5)}
2. {(-4, 2), (-2, 1), (0, 0), (2, 1), (4, 2)}
3. {(-10, 6), (3, -9), (-1, 4), (-7, 1), (6, 8)}
4. {(7, 6), (2, 9), (-3, -2), (-7, 1), (8, 10)}
VOCABULARY
If no vertical line intersects the graph of a function f more than once, then f is a function. This is
called the vertical line test.
If no horizontal line intersects the graph of a function f more than once, then the inverse of f is
itself a function. This is called the horizontal line test.
The inverse of a function is formed when the independent variable is exchanged with the
dependent variable in a given relation. (Switch the x and y with each other.) A function takes a
starting value, performs some operation on this value, and creates an output answer. The inverse
of a function takes the output answer, performs some operation on it, and arrives back at the
original function's starting value. Inverses are indicated by the notation 1f .
Jordan School District Page 116 Secondary Mathematics 2
This example is not one-to-one. It is a function
because the vertical line intersects the graph
only once. However, the horizontal line
intersects the graph twice. There is an inverse
to this example, but the inverse will not be a
function.
This example is one-to-one. It is a function
because the vertical and horizontal lines
intersect the graph only once. The inverse will
be a function.
Example:
Find the inverse of 3 1f x x .
Original function 3 1f x x
Replace ( )f x with y. 3 1y x
Replace x with y and y with x. 3 1x y
Isolate y. 1 3
1
3
1 1
3 3
x y
xy
x y
The inverse of 3 1f x x is 1 1 1
3 3f x x .
Example:
Find the inverse of 1
24
f x x .
Original function
12
4f x x
Replace ( )f x with y. 12
4y x
Jordan School District Page 117 Secondary Mathematics 2
Replace x with y and y with x. 12
4x y
Isolate y.
12
4
4 2
4 8
x y
x y
x y
The inverse of 1
24
f x x is 1 4 8f x x .
Example:
Find the inverse of the function 21
4f x x ; Domain ,0 and Range 0,
Original function 21
, 04
f x x x
Replace ( )f x with y. 21
4y x
Replace x with y and y with x. 21
4x y
Isolate y.
Simplify the radical
(Unit 1 Cluster1:N.RN.2)
Determine whether to use the positive or
negative answer by referring back to the
restricted domain. The domain of the
original function is restricted to the
negative real numbers including zero,
therefore, the range of the inverse function
must also be the same. This leads us to
choose the negative square root.
24
4
2
x y
x y
x y
12 ( )x f x
Domain 0, and Range ,0
Notice the domain and range have
switched from the original function’s
domain and range.
Example:
Find the inverse of the function 2
3 1 5f x x ; Domain 0, and Range 5,
Original function 2
3 1 5, 0f x x x
Replace ( )f x with y. 2
3 1 5y x
Jordan School District Page 118 Secondary Mathematics 2
Replace x with y and y with x. 2
3 1 5x y
Isolate y.
Simplify the radical
(Unit 1 Cluster1:N.RN.2)
Determine whether to use the positive or
negative answer by referring back to the
restricted domain. The domain of the
original function is restricted to the
positive real numbers including zero,
therefore, the range of the inverse function
must also be the same. This leads us to
choose the positive square root.
2
2
5 3 1
51
3
51
3
51
3
x y
xy
xy
xy
151 ( )
3
xf x
Domain 5, and Range 0,
Notice the domain and range have
switched from the original function’s
domain and range.
Practice Exercises F
Find the inverse of the following. State the domain and range of the inverse. For problems 7 – 9
restrict the domain before finding the inverse.
1. ( ) 3 2f x x 2. ( ) 4 7f x x 3. ( ) 6 5f x x
4. 4
( ) 15
f x x
5. 2
( ) 43
f x x 6. 1
( ) 32
f x x
7. 2( ) 3 5f x x 8.
2( ) 2f x x 9.
2( ) 7 9f x x
Jordan School District Page 120 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 3 Cluster 1 (A.SSE.2):
Interpret the Structure of Expressions
Cluster 1: Interpret the structure of expressions
3.1.2 Recognize functions that are quadratic in nature such as
4 2 2 26 3 2x x x x
VOCABULARY
A quadratic pattern can be found in other types of expressions and equations. If this is the case,
we say these expressions, equations, or functions are quadratic in nature. Recall the standard
form of a quadratic expression is 2ax bx c , where a, b, and c are real numbers and 0a .
The following are examples of expressions that are quadratic in nature:
Expression: Notice: Rewritten:
6 33 5 12x x 2
3 6x x 2
3 33 5 12x x
6 3 2 42 5 12x x y y 2
3 6x x and 2
2 4y y 2 2
3 3 2 22 5 12x x y y
1/2 1/49 12 4x x 2
1/4 1/2x x 2
1/4 1/49 12 4x x
4 6 9x x 2
x x 2
4 6 9x x
4 2
1 2 1 15x x 2
2 41 1x x
22 2
1 2 1 15x x
1016 25x 2
5 104 16x x and 2
5 25 2 254 5x
4 6x y 2
2 4x x and 2
3 6y y 2 2
2 3x y
Practice exercise A
Determine if the expression is quadratic in nature.
1. 4 2 12x x
2. 2
2 2 3 2 3 1x x
3. 3 4 4x x
4. 1/2 1/4 72x x
5. 2/3 1/39 12 4x x
6. 2
4 2 1x
Jordan School District Page 121 Secondary Mathematics 2
FACTORING REVIEW
1. COMMON TERM
a) What number will go into all of the
numbers evenly
b) Common variable – use the common
variable with the lowest power
EXAMPLE
3 23 12 6x x x
23 4 2x x x
2. DIFFERENCE OF TWO SQUARES
Looks like:
bababa 22
a) Terms must be perfect squares
b) Must be subtraction
c) Powers must be even
EXAMPLE
24 25x
2 5 2 5x x
3. PERFECT SQUARE TRINOMIALS
Looks like:
22 22a ab b a b or a b a b
or
22 22a ab b a b or a b a b
a) First and last term must be perfect
squares
b) Middle term is equal to 2ab
c) Sign in the parenthesis is the same as the
first
sign
EXAMPLE
29 30 25x x
Does the middle term equal 2ab ?
3 5 2 3 5 30a x and b so x x
Yes it does!
Therefore 29 30 25x x factors to:
2
3 5x or 3 5 3 5x x
4. GROUPING
a) Group terms that have something in
common
b) Factor out common term in each
parenthesis
c) Write down what is in the parenthesis,
they
should be identical
d) Then add the “left-overs”
EXAMPLE
15 21 10 14xy x y
15 21 10 14xy x y
3 5 7 2 5 7x y y
5 7y
5 7 3 2y x
5. FACTOR TRINOMIALS BY
GROUPING
2ax bx c
a) Multiply a and c
b) Find all the factors of the answer
EXAMPLE
156 2 xx
(6)(15) = 90
1 and 90
2 and 45
3 and 30
5 and 18
Jordan School District Page 122 Secondary Mathematics 2
c) Choose the combination that will either
give the
sum or difference needed to result in b. In
this
case the difference
d) Rewrite the equation using the combination
in
place of the middle term
e) Now group in order to factor
f) Factor out the common term in each
parenthesis
g) Write down what is in the parenthesis, they
should be identical
h) Add the “left-overs” to complete the answer
6 and 15
9 and 10
9 and -10
26 9 10 15x x x
26 9 10 15x x x
Notice that when factoring out a -1 it changes
the sign on c
3 2 3 5 2 3x x x
32 x
5332 xx
The same strategies used to factor quadratic expressions can be used to factor anything that is
quadratic in nature. (For more information on factoring, see the factoring lesson in Unit 2.)
Expression: Rewritten: Factor:
6 33 5 12x x 2
3 33 5 12x x 3 33 4 3x x
6 3 2 42 5 12x x y y 2 2
3 3 2 22 5 12x x y y 3 2 3 22 3 4x y x y
1/2 1/49 12 4x x 2
1/4 1/49 12 4x x
1/4 1/43 2 3 2x x
or
2
1/43 2x
4 12 9x x 2
4 12 9x x
2 3 2 3x x
or
2
2 3x
1016 25x 2 254 5x 5 54 5 4 5x x
4 6x y 2 2
2 3x y 2 3 2 3x y x y
Jordan School District Page 123 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice set B
Factor each quadratic in nature expression.
1. 2 4144 49x y
4. 681 4x
7. 10 5 29 6x x y y
2. 6 38 2 15x x
5. 2 1x x
8. 2/5 1/512 17 6x x
3. 8 6100 121x y
6. 4 24 20 25x x
9. 2/3 1/33 10 8x x
Sometimes rewriting an expression makes it easier to recognize the quadratic pattern.
Example:
4 2
1 2 1 15x x
1u x You can use a new variable to replace 1x .
4 22 15u u
Now replace every 1x in the expression
with u. Notice how this is quadratic in nature.
2 25 3u u We can use quadratic factoring techniques to
factor this expression
2 2
1 5 1 3x x
You must remember to replace the u with
1x .
Example:
1/3 1/63 8 4x x
1/6u x You can use a new variable to replace 1/6x .
23 8 4u u Now replace every 1/6x in the expression with
u. Notice how this is quadratic in nature.
3 2 2u u We can use quadratic factoring techniques to
factor this expression
1/6 1/63 2 2x x You must remember to replace the u with 1/6x .
Practice Exercises C
Identify the “u” in each expression, then factor using “u” substitution. Write the factored form in
terms of x.
1. 4 2
2 2 6x x 2. 2
4 3 15 3 9y y 3. 8 4
5 2 5 21 2 5 20x x
4. 6 3
3 33 3 3 2x x 5. 1/2 1/47 10x x 6.
22 11 2 12x x
7. 4 25x 8.
21 1
2x x
9.
424 1 9x
Jordan School District Page 124 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 1 Cluster 3 (N.CN.1 and N.CN.2)
Performing Arithmetic Operations With Complex Numbers
Cluster 3: Performing arithmetic operations with complex numbers
1.3.1 2 1i , complex number form a + bi
1.3.2 Add, subtract, and multiply with complex numbers
VOCABULARY
The imaginary unit, i , is defined to be 1i . Using this definition, it would follow that2 1i because
2 1 1 1i i i .
The number system can be extended to include the set of complex numbers. A complex number
written in standard form is a number a + bi, where a and b are real numbers. If a = 0, then the
number is called imaginary. If b = 0 then the number is called real.
Simplifying Radicals with i
Extending the number system to include the set of complex numbers allows us to take the square
root of negative numbers.
Example:
Simplify 9
9
1 9
1 9
Rewrite the expression using the properties
of radicals.
3
3
i
i
Remember that 1i .
Example:
Simplify 24
24
1 4 6
1 4 6
Rewrite the expression using the properties
of radicals.
2 6
2 6
i
i
Remember that 1i .
Jordan School District Page 125 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Simplify each radical
1. 25 2. 36 3. 144
4. 98 5. 52 6. 22
Performing Arithmetic Operations with Complex Numbers
You can add, subtract, and multiply complex numbers. Similar to the set of real numbers,
addition and multiplication of complex numbers is associative and commutative.
Adding and Subtracting Complex Numbers
Example:
Add 3 2 5 4i i
3 2 5 4i i
3 2 5 4
3 5 2 4
i i
i i
Remove the parentheses.
Group like terms together.
8 2i
Combine like terms.
Example:
Subtract 7 5 2 6i i
7 5 2 6i i
7 5 2 6
7 2 5 6
i i
i i
Distribute the negative and remove the
parentheses.
Group like terms together.
9 11i
Combine like terms.
Jordan School District Page 126 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Simplify 8 4 5 2 5i i
8 4 5 2 5i i
8 4 5 2 5
8 4 2 5 5
i i
i i
Distribute the negative and remove the
parentheses.
Group like terms together.
6 10i
Combine like terms.
Multiplying Complex Numbers
Example:
Multiply 3 7 6i
3 7 6i
21 18i
Distribute the negative three to each term
in the parentheses.
Example:
Multiply 4 2 9i i
4 2 9i i
28 36i i
Distribute the 4i to each term in the
parentheses.
8 36 1
8 36
i
i
By definition 2 1i so substitute -1 in for
2i .
36 8i
Write the complex number in standard
form.
Jordan School District Page 127 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Multiply 2 9 3 10i i
Distributive (FOIL) Method
2 9 3 10i i
2
2
2
2 3 10 9 3 10
6 20 27 90
*combine like terms
6 7 90
*remember that 1
6 7 90 1
6 7 90
96 7
i i i
i i i
i i
i
i
i
i
Box Method
2 9i
3 6 27i
10i 20i 290i
*combine terms on the
diagonals of the unshaded
boxes(top right to lower left)
2
2
6 7 90
*remember that 1
6 7 90 1
6 7 90
96 7
i i
i
i
i
i
Vertical Method
2
2
2 9
3 10
20 90
6 27
6 7 90
i
i
i i
i
i i
2*remember that 1
6 7 90 1
6 7 90
96 7
i
i
i
i
Example:
Multiply 5 2 5 2i i
Distributive (FOIL) Method
5 2 5 2i i
2
2
2
5 5 2 2 5 2
25 10 10 4
*combine like terms
25 4
*remember that 1
25 4 1
25 4
29
i i i
i i i
i
i
Box Method
5 2i
5 25 10i
2i 10i 24i
*combine terms on the
diagonals of the unshaded
boxes(top right to lower left)
2
2
25 4
*remember that 1
25 4 1
25 4
29
i
i
Vertical Method
2
2
5 2
5 2
10 4
25 10
25 0 4
i
i
i i
i
i i
2*remember that 1
25 4 1
25 4
29
i
Jordan School District Page 128 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Simplify each expression.
1. 10 3 6i i 2. 9 6 4 4i i 3. 4 7 5 10 7i i i
4. 7 4 8 10 2i i 5. 5 8 2i 6. 11 2 9i i
7. 9 15i i 8. 6 7 4 12i i 9. 2 7 5i i
10 1 4 12 11i i 11. 10 4 7 5i i 12. 10 2 10 2i i
Jordan School District Page 129 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 1 Cluster 3 Honors (N.CN.3)
H2.1 Find the conjugate of a complex number; use conjugates to find quotients of
complex numbers.
VOCABULARY
The conjugate of a complex number is a number in the standard complex form a bi , where the
imaginary part bi has the opposite sign of the original, for example a bi has the opposite sign
of a bi . Conjugate pairs are any pair of complex numbers that are conjugates of each other
such as 3 4 and 3 4i i .
The product of conjugate pairs is a positive real number.
2 2 2
2 2
2 2
1
a bi a bi
a abi abi b i
a b
a b
2
3 4 3 4
9 12 12 16
9 16
25
i i
i i i
This property will be used to divide complex numbers.
Example:
Find the conjugate of the following complex numbers.
a. 4i b. 2 5i c. 3 i d. 7 2i
a.
The opposite of 4i is 4i . The
conjugate of 4i is 4i .
b.
The opposite of 5i is 5i . The
conjugate of 2 5i is 2 5i .
c.
The opposite of i is i . The conjugate
of 3 i is 3 i .
d.
The opposite of 2i is 2i . The
conjugate of 7 2i is 7 2i .
Practice Exercises A
Find the conjugate of the following complex numbers.
1. 6 6i 2. 8 9i 3. 2 3i 4. 1 7i
Jordan School District Page 130 Secondary Mathematics 2
Divide by an imaginary number bi
If there is an imaginary number in the denominator of a fraction, then the complex number is not
in standard complex form. In order to write it in standard complex form, you must multiply the
numerator and the denominator by the conjugate of the denominator. This process removes the
imaginary unit from the denominator and replaces it with a real number (the product of conjugate
pairs is a positive real number) without changing the value of the complex number. Once this is
done, you can write the number in standard complex form by simplifying the fraction.
Example:
Write in standard complex form: 2
8i
2
2 8
8 8
16
64
i
i i
i
i
The conjugate of 8i is 8i . Multiply the
numerator and the denominator by the
conjugate.
16
64 1
16
64
i
i
Remember 2 1i .
16 1
16 4 4 4
i ii
Simplify.
Example:
Write in standard complex form: 6 8
9
i
i
2
2
6 8 9
9 9
54 72
81
i i
i i
i i
i
The conjugate of 9i is 9i . Multiply the
numerator and the denominator by the
conjugate.
54 72 1
81 1
i
Remember 2 1i .
72 54
81
i
Rewrite numerator in standard complex
form a bi .
72 54
81 81
8 2
9 3
i
i
Rewrite whole solution in complex form
a bi , reducing as needed.
Jordan School District Page 131 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Write in standard complex form.
1. 3
5i 2.
6
4i 3.
5
5i
4. 3 10
6
i
i
5.
10 10
5
i
i
6.
2 3
4
i
i
Dividing Complex Numbers in Standard Form a bi
To divide complex numbers, find the complex conjugate of the denominator, multiply the
numerator and denominator by that conjugate, and simplify.
Example:
Divide 10
2 i
10
2 i
10 2
2 2
i
i i
10 2
2 2
i
i i
Multiply the numerator and denominator
by the conjugate of 2+i, which is 2 – i
2
20 10
4 2 2
i
i i i
Distribute
2
20 10
4
i
i
Simplify
20 10
4 1
i
20 10
5
i
Note that 2 1i
20 104 2
5 5i i
Simplify and write in standard complex
form.
Jordan School District Page 132 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Divide 22 7
4 5
i
i
22 7
4 5
i
i
22 7 4 5
4 5 4 5
i i
i i
22 7 4 5
4 5 4 5
i i
i i
Multiply by the conjugate of the
denominator.
2
2
88 110 28 35
16 20 20 25
i i i
i i i
Distribute
2
2
88 82 35
16 25
i i
i
88 82 35 1
16 25 1
i
88 82 35
16 25
i
123 82
41
i
Combine like terms.
Remember that 2 1i .
Combine like terms again.
123 82
41 41
3 2
i
i
Simplify and write in standard complex
form.
Example:
Divide 6 2
1 2
i
i
6 2
1 2
i
i
6 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
i i
i i
6 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
i i
i i
Multiply by the conjugate of the
denominator.
Jordan School District Page 133 Secondary Mathematics 2
2
2
6 12 2 4
1 2 2 4
i i i
i i i
Distribute.
2
2
6 14 4
1 4
i i
i
6 14 4 1
1 4 1
i
6 14 4
1 4
i
2 14
5
i
Combine like terms.
Remember 2 1i
Combine like terms again.
2 14
5 5i Put in standard complex form a bi .
Practice Exercises C
Divide each complex rational expression and write in standard complex form.
1. 5
2 6
i
i 2.
8
1 3
i
i 3.
10
3 i
4. 26 18
3 4
i
i
5.
10 5
6 6
i
i
6.
3 7
7 10
i
i
Jordan School District Page 134 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 3 Cluster 4 (A.REI.4) and Unit 3 Cluster 5 (N.CN.7):
Solve Equations and Inequalities in One Variable
Cluster 4: Solving equations in one variable
3.4.1a Derive the quadratic formula by completing the square.
3.4.1b Solve equations by taking the square root, completing the square, using the
quadratic formula and by factoring (recognize when the quadratic formula gives
complex solutions and write them as a bi )
3.5.1 Solve with complex numbers
VOCABULARY
The square root of a number is a value that, when multiplied by itself, gives the number. For
example if 2r a , then r is the square root of a. There are two possible values for r; one
positive and one negative. For instance, the square root of 9 could be 3 because 23 9 but it
could also be 3 because 2
3 9 .
A perfect square is a number that can be expressed as the product of two equal integers. For
example: 100 is a perfect square because 10 10 100 and 2x is a perfect square because 2.x x x
Solving Equations by Taking the Square Root
When solving a quadratic equation by taking the square root, you want to isolate the squared
term so that you can take the square root of both sides of the equation.
Example:
Solve the quadratic equation 2 4x .
2 4x In this example the squared term is 2x and it is
already isolated.
2 4x Take the square root of each side of the equation.
1/2
2
2/2
4
2
2
2 or 2
x
x
x
x x
Using the properties of rational exponents you can
simplify the left side of the equation to x.
The number 16 is a perfect square because
2 2 4 .
Jordan School District Page 135 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Solve the quadratic equation 224 16
3x .
2
2
2
24 16
3
212
3
18
x
x
x
In this example the squared term is 2x and it needs
to be isolated. Use a reverse order of operations to
isolate 2x .
2 18x Take the square root of each side of the equation.
1/2
2
2/2
9 2
9 2
3 2
3 2 or 3 2
x
x
x
x x
Using the properties of rational exponents you can
simplify the left side of the equation to x.
Using the properties of radical expressions you can
simplify the right side of the equation. (See Unit 1
Cluster 2 for help with simplifying)
Example:
Solve the quadratic equation 2
3 2 4 52x .
2
2
2
3 2 4 52
3 2 48
2 16
x
x
x
In this example the squared term is 2
2x and it
needs to be isolated. Use a reverse order of
operations to isolate 2
2x .
2
2 16x Take the square root of each side of the equation.
1/22
2/2
2 16
2 4
2 4
2 4 or 2 4
x
x
x
x x
Using the properties of rational exponents you can
simplify the left side of the equation to 2x .
The number 16 is a perfect square because
4 4 16 .
2 4 or 2 4
6 or 2
x x
x x
You still need to solve each equation for x.
Jordan School District Page 136 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Solve each quadratic equation.
1. 2 25x 2. 2 8x 3. 24 36x
4. 24 5 1x 5. 29 3 33x 6. 216 9x
7. 2
2 3 4 8x 8. 2
3 3 1 2x 9. 21
31 5x
Solving Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square
Sometimes you have to rewrite a quadratic equation, using the method of completing the square,
so that it can be solved by taking the square root.
Example:
Solve 2 10 23x x .
2 10 23x x
2 2
2
2
2
10 1010 23
2 2
10 25 23 25
10 25 2
x x
x x
x x
Complete the square on the left side of the
equation.
2
5 5 2
5 2
x x
x
Factor the expression on the left side.
2
5 2x Take the square root of each side.
5 2x Simplify.
5 2 or 5 2
5 2 or 5 2
x x
x x
Solve for x.
Jordan School District Page 137 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Solve 2 4 6x x .
2 4 5x x
2 2
2
2
2
4 44 5
2 2
4 4 5 4
4 4 1
x x
x x
x x
Complete the square on the left side of the
equation.
2
2 2 1
2 1
x x
x
Factor the expression on the left side.
2
2 1x Take the square root of each side.
2x i Simplify. Remember that the 1 i
2 or 2
2 or 2
x i x i
x i x i
Solve for x.
Example:
Solve 23 5 2 0x x .
2
2
3 5 2 0
3 5 2
x x
x x
Collect the terms with variables on one
side of the equation and the constant
term on the other side.
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
53 2
3
5 5 53 2 3
3 2 3 2 3
5 25 253 2 3
3 36 36
5 25 753 2
3 36 36
5 25 493
3 36 12
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
Complete the square on the left side of
the equation.
Jordan School District Page 138 Secondary Mathematics 2
2
2
5 5 493
6 6 12
5 493
6 12
5 49
6 36
x x
x
x
Factor the expression on the left side of
the equation.
Isolate the squared term.
25 49
6 36x
Take the square root of each side.
5 7
6 6x Simplify.
5 7 5 7 or
6 6 6 6
5 7 5 7 or
6 6 6 6
12 or
3
x x
x x
x x
Solve for x.
Practice Exercises B
Solve the quadratic equations by completing the square.
1. 2 4 1x x 2. 2 12 32x x 3. 2 16 15 0x x
4. 2 8 3 0x x 5. 2 8 6x x 6. 22 4 5 0x x
VOCABULARY
The quadratic formula, 2 4
2
b b acx
a
, can be used to find the solutions of the quadratic
equation 2 0ax bx c , when 0a . The portion of the quadratic equation that is under the
radical, 2 4b ac , is called the discriminant. It can be used to determine the number and type of
solutions to the quadratic equation 2 0ax bx c .
Jordan School District Page 139 Secondary Mathematics 2
Using the Discriminant to Determine Number and Type of Solutions
If 2 4 0b ac , then there are two real solutions to the quadratic equation.
Example:
Determine the number and type of solutions for the equation 2 6 0x x .
2 6 0x x
1, 1, and 6a b c Identify a, b, and c.
2
2
4
1 4(1)( 6)
b ac
Substitute the values of a, b,
and c into the discriminant
formula.
1 4( 6)
1 ( 24)
1 24
25
Simplify using order of
operations.
25 0
Determine if the result is
greater than zero, equal to
zero, or less than zero.
The quadratic equation 2 6 0x x has two real solutions. You can see from the graph
that the function crosses the x-axis twice.
If 2 4 0b ac , then there is one real solution to the quadratic equation.
Example:
Determine the number and type of solutions for the equation 2 4 4 0x x .
2 4 4 0x x
1, 4, and 4a b c Identify a, b, and c.
2
2
4
4 4(1)(4)
b ac
Substitute the values of a, b,
and c into the discriminant
formula.
16 4(4)
16 16
0
Simplify using order of
operations.
0 0
Determine if the result is
greater than zero, equal to
zero, or less than zero.
The quadratic equation 2 4 4 0x x has one real solution. You can see from the graph
that the function touches the x-axis only once.
Jordan School District Page 140 Secondary Mathematics 2
If 2 4 0b ac , then there no real, but two imaginary solutions to the quadratic
equation.
Example:
Determine the number and type of solutions for the equation 2 1 0x .
2 1 0x
1, 0, and 1a b c Identify a, b, and c.
2
2
4
0 4(1)(1)
b ac
Substitute the values of a, b,
and c into the discriminant
formula.
0 4(1)
0 4
4
Simplify using order of
operations.
4 0
Determine if the result is
greater than zero, equal to
zero, or less than zero.
The quadratic equation 2 1 0x has no real solutions, but it has two imaginary
solutions. You can see from the graph that the function never crosses the x-axis.
Practice Exercises C
Determine the number and type of solutions that each quadratic equation has.
1.
2.
3.
4. 2 2 5 0x x 5. 24 12 9 0x x 6. 22 4 2x x
Jordan School District Page 141 Secondary Mathematics 2
Solving Quadratic Equations by Using the Quadratic Formula
Example:
Solve 23 5 4 0 x x using the quadratic formula.
23 5 4 0 x x
3, 5, and 4a b c
Make sure all the terms are on the same side
and that the equation equals 0.
Identify a, b, and c.
25 5 4(3)( 4)
2(3)
x
Substitute the values for a, b, and c into the
quadratic formula.
5 25 12 4
6
5 25 48
6
5 25 48
6
5 73
6
x
x
x
x
Use order of operations to simplify.
5 73
6x
and
5 73
6x
These are actually two different solutions.
Example:
Solve 22 3 0 x x using the quadratic formula.
22 3 0 x x
2, 1, and 3a b c
Make sure all the terms are on the same side
and that the equation equals 0.
Identify a, b, and c.
21 ( 1) 4(2)( 3)
2(2)
x
Substitute the values for a, b, and c into the
quadratic formula.
Jordan School District Page 142 Secondary Mathematics 2
1 1 8( 3)
4
1 1 ( 24)
4
1 1 24
4
1 25
4
1 5
4
x
x
x
x
x
Use order of operations to simplify.
1 5 6 3
4 4 2
x and
1 5 41
4 4
x
Simplify each answer.
Example:
Solve 225 10 1x x using the quadratic formula.
2
2
25 10 1
25 10 1 0
x x
x x
25, 10, and 1a b c
Make sure all the terms are on the same side
and that the equation equals 0.
Identify a, b, and c.
210 10 4(25)(1)
2(25)
x
Substitute the values for a, b, and c into the
quadratic formula.
10 100 100(1)
50
10 100 100
50
10 0
50
10 0
50
10
50
x
x
x
x
x
Use order of operations to simplify.
1
5x
Simplify the answer. Notice that we only got
one answer this time because the discriminant
was 0.
Jordan School District Page 143 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Solve 22 12 20x x using the quadratic formula.
2
2
2 12 20
2 12 20 0
x x
x x
2, 12, and 20a b c
Make sure all the terms are on the same side
and that the equation equals 0.
Identify a, b, and c.
212 12 4(2)(20)
2(2)x
Substitute the values for a, b, and c into the
quadratic formula.
12 144 8(20)
4
12 144 160
4
12 16
4
12 4
4
3
x
x
x
ix
x i
Use order of operations to simplify.
3 or 3x i x i
Simplify the answer. Notice that we got two
imaginary answers this time because the
discriminant was less than 0.
Practice Exercises D
Solve the quadratic equation using the quadratic formula.
1. 23 5 7 0x x 2. 24 12 9 0x x 3. 26 11 7 0x x
4. 2 8 12 0x x 5. 2 3 6x x 6. 2 2 2x x
7. 2 1 0x x 8. 22 5 4 0x x 9. 23 4 2x x
Jordan School District Page 144 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises E
Solve each of the following equations using the method of your choice.
1. 22 5 4 0x x 2. 2 10 6x x 3. 2 4 6 0x x
4. ( 3) 9x x x 5. ( 1) 2 7x x x 6. 2 10 26 0x x
7. 24 81 0x 8. 2
1 9x 9. 2
1 5 44x
10. 2 4 0x x
11. 2 4 0x 12. 2
2 3 5 23x
Jordan School District Page 145 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 3 Cluster 5 (N.CN.8, N.CN.9-Honors):
Use complex numbers in polynomial identities and equations
3.5.2 Extend polynomial identities to the complex numbers.
3.5.3 Know the Fundamental Theorem of algebra; show that it is true for quadratic
polynomials.
The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra states that every polynomial of degree n with complex
coefficients has exactly n roots in the complex numbers.
Note: Remember that every root can be written as a complex number in the form of a bi . For
instance 3 can be written as 3 0x x i . In addition, all complex numbers come in conjugate
pairs, a bi and a bi .
Example:
2( ) 3f x x x Degree: 2
Complex Roots: 2
3 2( ) 5 2 5 4f x x x x Degree: 3
Complex Roots: 3
Polynomial Identities
1. 2 2 22a b a ab b 2. a b c d ac ad bc bd
3. 2 2a b a b a b 4. 2x a b x AB x a x b
5. If 2 0ax bx c then 2 4
2
b b acx
a
Jordan School District Page 146 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Find the complex roots of 2( ) 64f x x and write in factored form.
2
2
2
0 64
64
64
8
x
x
x
i x
1. Set equal to zero to find the roots of the
function. Solve.
8 8 ( )
8 8 ( )
x i x i f x
x i x i f x
2. Recall factored form is
( )x p x q f x .
Substitute the zeros in for p and q.
Example:
Find the complex roots of 2( ) 16 65f x x x and write in factored form.
216 16 4 1 65
2 1
16 256 260
2
16 4
2
16 2
2
8
x
x
x
ix
x i
1. Use the quadratic formula to find the roots
of the function.
8 8 ( )
8 8 ( )
x i x i f x
x i x i f x
2. Recall factored form is
( )x p x q f x .
Substitute the zeros in for p and q.
Jordan School District Page 147 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Find the complex roots of 4 2( ) 10 24f x x x and write in factored form.
2 2( ) 4 6f x x x 1. Factor the quadratic in nature function.
2 2
2 2
4 0 6 0
4 6
2 6
x x
x x
x i x i
2. Set each factor equal to zero to find the
roots.
( ) ( 2 )( ( 2 )) 6 6
( ) ( 2 )( 2 ) 6 6
f x x i x i x i x i
f x x i x i x i x i
3. Recall factored form is
( )x p x q f x .
Substitute the zeros in for p and q.
Practice Exercises A
Find the complex roots. Write in factored form.
1. 2 9x
2. 2 1x x
3. 2 2 2x x
4. 2 6 10x x
5. 2 4 5x x
6. 2 2 5x x
7. 4 25 4x x
8. 4 213 36x x
9. 4 1x
Jordan School District Page 148 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 3 Cluster 3 (A.CED.1, A.CED.4)
Writing and Solving Equations and Inequalities
Cluster 3: Creating equations that describe numbers or relationships
3.3.1 Write and solve equations and inequalities in one variable (including linear,
simple exponential, and quadratic functions)
3.3.3 Solve formulas for a variable including those involving squared variables
Writing and Solving Quadratic Equations in One Variable
When solving contextual type problems it is important to:
Identify what you know.
Determine what you are trying to find.
Draw a picture to help you visualize the situation when possible. Remember to label all
parts of your drawing.
Use familiar formulas to help you write equations.
Check your answer for reasonableness and accuracy.
Make sure you answered the entire question.
Use appropriate units.
Example:
Find three consecutive integers such that the product of the first two plus the square of
the third is equal to 137.
First term: x
Second term: x + 1
Third term: x + 2
The first number is x. Since they are
consecutive numbers, the second term is
one more than the first or x + 1. The third
term is one more than the second term or
1 1 2x x .
2( 1) ( 2) 137x x x
Multiply the first two together and add the
result to the third term squared. This is
equal to 137.
2 2
2
( 1) ( 2)( 2) 137
4 4 137
2 5 4 137
x x x x
x x x x
x x
Multiply and combine like terms.
22 5 133 0x x Make sure the equation is equal to 0.
2
2
2 14 19 133 0
2 14 19 133 0
2 7 19 7 0
7 2 19 0
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x
Factor.
Jordan School District Page 149 Secondary Mathematics 2
7 0
7
x
x
2 19 0
2 19
19
2
x
x
x
Use the Zero Product Property to solve for
x.
First term: 7
Second term: 8
Third term: 9
The numbers are integers so x has to be 7.
Example:
A photo is 6 in longer than it is wide. Find the length and width if the area is 187 2in .
width
length 6
6
187 6
x
x
A x wl x x
x x
The width is the basic unit, so let it equal
x. The length is 6 inches longer than width
or 6x . A photo is rectangular so the
area is equal to the width times the length.
The area is 187 square inches.
2187 6x x Multiply the right side.
20 6 187x x Make sure the equation equals 0.
0 11 17x x Factor the expression on the right side of
the equation.
11 0
11
x
x
17 0
17
x
x
Use the Zero Product Property to solve for
x.
The width is 11 inches and the length is
17 inches.
The length of a photo cannot be negative.
Therefore, x must be 11. The length is
6 11 6 17x .
Note: Often problems will require information from more than one equation to solve. For
example, you might need the perimeter equation to help you write the area equation or vice
versa. The primary equation is the equation you solve to find the answer you are looking for.
The secondary equation is the equation you use to help set up your primary equation.
Example:
Find two numbers that add to 150 and have a maximum product. What is the maximum
product?
Secondary equation:
150x y
One number is x. The other
number is y.
The sum is 150. Write an
equation for this.
Jordan School District Page 150 Secondary Mathematics 2
150y x Use the sum equation to solve for
y.
Primary Equation:
150P x x x Write an equation for the product
in terms of x.
2150P x x x Simplify the right side of the
equation.
2
2
2
2
150
( 150 )
( 150 5625) 5625
( 75) 5625
P x x x
P x x x
P x x x
P x x
Find the maximum. Remember
the maximum is the vertex. Using
the method of your choice from
Unit 2 Lesson F.IF.8. 150
2( 1)
75
x
x
2
2
150
75 150 75 75
75 11250 5625
75 5625
P x x x
P
P
P
75
75
x
y
The two numbers are 75 and 75
The second number is 150 x or
75.
75 75 5625
The maximum product is 5625. Find the maximum product.
Example:
Jason wants to fence in a rectangular garden in his backyard. If one side of the garden is
against the house and Jason has 48 feet of fencing, what dimensions will maximize the
garden area while utilizing all of the fencing?
First draw a picture of the house
and garden. Label the sides of
your garden. The amount of fence
used is the distance around the
garden excluding the side next to
the house. This is the same as the
perimeter.
y
xx Garden
Jordan School District Page 151 Secondary Mathematics 2
2 48x y
The length of the garden is x and
the width is y.
The perimeter is 48. Write an
equation for this.
48 2y x Use the sum equation to solve for
y.
48 2
A x lw
A x x x
Write an equation for the product
in terms of x.
248 2P x x x Simplify the right side of the
equation.
2
2
2
2
2 48
2( 24 )
2( 24 144) 288
2( 12) 288
A x x x
A x x x
A x x x
A x x
Find the maximum area.
Remember the maximum is the
vertex. Using the method of your
choice from Unit 2 Lesson F.IF.8. 48
2( 2)
12
x
x
2
2
48 2
12 48 12 2 12
12 576 288
12 288
A x x x
P
P
P
12
24
x
y
The length is 12 feet and the width is 24 feet.
The second number is 48 2 12
or 24.
12 24 288
The maximum area is 288 2ft . Find the maximum area.
Practice Problems A
Solve
1. The maximum size envelope that can
be mailed with a large envelope rate is
3 inches longer than it is wide. The
area is 2180 in . Find the length and the
width.
2. A rectangular garden is 30 ft. by 40 ft.
Part of the garden is removed in order
to install a walkway of uniform width
around it. The area of the new garden
is one-half the area of the old garden.
How wide is the walkway?
3. The base of a triangular tabletop is 20
inches longer than the height. The area
is 2750 in . Find the height and the
base.
4. Find two numbers that differ by 8 and
have a minimum product.
Jordan School District Page 152 Secondary Mathematics 2
5. Alec has written an award winning
short story. His mother wants to frame
it with a uniform border. She wants the
finished product to have an area of2315 in . The writing portion occupies
an area that is 11 inches wide and 17
inches long. How wide is the border?
6. Britton wants to build a pen for his
teacup pig. He has 36 feet of fencing
and he wants to use all of it. What
should the dimensions of the pen be to
maximize the area for his pig? What is
the maximum area?
7. The product of 2 numbers is 476. One
number is 6 more than twice the first
number. Find the two numbers.
8. Find three consecutive integers such
that the square of the second number
plus the product of the first and third
numbers is a minimum.
VOCABULARY
Objects that are shot, thrown, or dropped into the air are called projectiles. Their height,
measured from the ground, can be modeled by a projectile motion equation. The object is
always affected by gravity. The gravitational constant is different depending on the units of
measurement. For example, the gravitational constant in feet is 232 ft/sec and in meters it is 29.8 m/sec . Similarly, the projectile motion equation for an object shot or thrown straight up or
down is different depending on the units of measurement.
Feet: 2
0 0( ) 16h t t v t h
Meters: 2
0 0( ) 4.9h t t v t h
( )h t represents the height at any time t. The time is measured in seconds. The initial velocity,
0v , is the speed at which the object is thrown or shot. It is measured in ft/sec or m/sec. The
initial height, 0h , is the height that the object is shot or thrown from. It is measured in feet or
meters.
Example:
The Willis Tower (formerly Sears Tower) in Chicago, Illinois is the tallest building in the
United States. It is 108 stories or about 1,451 feet high. (Assume that each floor is 13
feet high.)
a. A window washer is 28 floors from the top and he drops a piece of equipment,
how long will it take for the equipment to reach the ground?
b. How far from the ground is the piece of equipment after 5 seconds?
c. When does the equipment pass the 16th
floor?
Jordan School District Page 153 Secondary Mathematics 2
a. 2
0 0( ) 16h t t v t h The building is measured in feet so use
the projectile motion equation for feet.
2
2
2
( ) 16 (0) 108 28 13
( ) 16 80 13
( ) 16 1040
h t t t
h t t
h t t
The equipment was dropped making the
initial velocity 0 ft./sec. The building has
108 floors, but he stopped 28 short of the
top floor. Each floor is 13 feet high;
multiply the number of floors by the
height of each floor to get the initial
height.
20 16 1040t
We want to know when the equipment
hits the ground making the final height
zero. 2
2
2
0 16 1040
16 1040
65
65
t
t
t
t
Solve for t.
65 sec. or 8.062 sec.t
Negative time means you are going back
in time. Therefore, time is positive.
b.
2
2
16 1040
5 16 5 1040
5 400 1040
5 640
h t t
h
h
h
We want to know when the height of the
equipment at 5 seconds.
The equipment is 640 feet from the ground after 5 seconds.
c.
216 1040h t t
We want to know when the equipment
passes the 16th
floor. The equation is the
same equation written in part a. 2
2
16 13 16 1040
208 16 1040
t
t
The 16th
floor is 208 feet above the
ground.
2
2
2
2
0 16 832
832 16
52
52
2 13
t
t
t
t
t
Solve for t.
2 13 sec. or 7.211 sec.t
Negative time means you are going back
in time. Therefore, time is positive.
Jordan School District Page 154 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
The Salt Lake Bees are planning to have a fireworks display after their game with the
Tacoma Rainiers. Their launch platform is 5 feet off the ground and the fireworks will be
launched with an initial of 32 feet per second. How long will it take each firework to
reach their maximum height?
a. 2
0 0( ) 16h t t v t h
The height of the fireworks is measured in
feet so use the projectile motion equation
for feet. 2
2
( ) 16 (32) 5
( ) 16 32 5
h t t t
h t t t
The fireworks were launched with an
initial velocity 32 ft./sec. The launch
platform is 5 feet off the ground.
2
2
2
2
( ) 16 32 5
16 2 5
16 2 1 5 16
16 1 21
h t t t
h t t t
h t t t
h t t
Using the method of your choice from
Unit 2 Lesson F.IF.8. Find the amount of
time it will take to reach the maximum
height. The t coordinate of the vertex
indicates WHEN the firework will reach
its maximum height.
2
321
2 16
bt
a
t
The firework will reach its maximum height after 1 second.
Practice Exercises B
Solve.
1. A bolt falls off an airplane at an altitude of
500 m. How long will it take the bolt to
reach the ground?
2. A ball is thrown upward at a speed of 30
m/sec from an altitude of 20 m. What is
the maximum height of the ball?
3. How far will an object fall in 5 seconds if
it is thrown downward at an initial
velocity of 30 m/sec from a height of 200
m?
4. A ring is dropped from a helicopter at an
altitude of 246 feet. How long does it take
the ring to reach the ground?
5. A coin is tossed upward with an initial
velocity of 30 ft/sec from an altitude of 8
feet. What is the maximum height of the
coin?
6. What is the height of an object after two
seconds, if thrown downward at an initial
velocity of 20 ft/sec from a height of 175
feet?
7. A water balloon is dropped from a height
of 26 feet. How long before it lands on
someone who is 6 feet tall?
8. A potato is launched from the ground with
an initial velocity of 15 m/sec. What is its
maximum height?
Jordan School District Page 155 Secondary Mathematics 2
Solving Quadratic Inequalities in One Variable
Example:
Solve 2 2 3 0x x .
Find where the expression on the left side of the inequality equals zero. 2 2 3 0x x
3 1 0x x
3 0 or 1 0
3 or 1
x x
x x
We are asked to find where the expression is greater than zero, in other words, where the
expression is positive. Determine if the expression is positive or negative around each
zero. Select a value in the interval and evaluate the expression at that value, then decide
if the result is positive or negative.
1x 1 3x 3x
2x
22 2 2 3
4 4 3
4 4 3
5
Positive
0x
2
0 2 0 3
0 0 3
0 3
3
Negative
4x
2
4 2 4 3
16 8 3
8 3
5
Positive
There are two intervals where the expression is positive: when 1x and when 3x .
Therefore, the answer to the inequality is , 1 3, . The answer could be
represented on a number line as follows:
Look at the graph of the function 2 2 3f x x x . Determine the intervals where the
function is positive.
Jordan School District Page 156 Secondary Mathematics 2
The function is positive , 1 3, . Notice that this interval is the same interval
we obtained when we tested values around the zeros of the expression.
Example:
Solve 23 5 2 0x x .
Find where the expression on the left side of the inequality equals zero.
2
2
3 5 2 0
3 5 2 0
3 1 2 0
x x
x x
x x
3 1 0 or 2 0
3 1 or 2
1 or 2
3
x x
x x
x x
We are asked to find where the expression is less than or equal to zero, in other words,
where the expression is negative or zero. Determine if the expression is positive or
negative around each zero. Select a value in the interval and evaluate the expression at
that value, then decide if the result is positive or negative.
13
x 13
2x 2x
1x
23 1 5 1 2
3 1 5 2
3 5 2
6
Negative
0x
2
3 0 5 0 2
3 0 0 2
0 0 2
2
Positive
3x
2
3 3 5 3 2
3 9 15 2
27 15 2
10
Negative
Jordan School District Page 157 Secondary Mathematics 2
There are two intervals where the expression is negative: when 13
x and when 2x .
It equals zero at 13
x and 2x . Therefore, the answer to the inequality is
13
, 2, . The answer could be represented on a number line as follows:
Example:
Solve 2
04x
.
Find where the denominator is equal to zero.
4 0
4
x
x
We are asked to find where the expression is less than zero, in other words, where the
expression is negative. Determine if the expression is positive or negative around where
the denominator is equal to zero. Select a value in the interval and evaluate the
expression at that value, then decide if the result is positive or negative.
4x 4x
5x
2
5 4
2
1
2
Negative
3x
2
3 4
2
1
2
Positive
The function is negative when 4x . Therefore, the answer to the inequality is
, 4 . The answer could be represented on a number line as follows:
Jordan School District Page 158 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Solve 3
02 5
x
x
.
Find where both the numerator and the denominator are equal to zero.
3 0
3
x
x
2 5 0
5
2
x
x
We are asked to find where the expression is greater than or equal to zero, in other words,
where the expression is positive. Determine if the expression is positive or negative
around where the numerator and denominator are equal to zero. Select a value in the
interval and evaluate the expression at that value, then decide if the result is positive or
negative.
3x 5
32
x 5
2x
4x
3
2 5
4 3
2 4 5
1
13
1
13
x
x
Positive
0x
3
2 5
0 3
2 0 5
3
5
3
5
x
x
Negative
3x
3
2 5
3 3
2 3 5
6
1
6
x
x
Positive
There are two intervals where the expression is positive: when 3x and when 52
x .
The function is only equal to zero when 3x because the denominator cannot equal
zero. Therefore, the answer to the inequality is 5
, 3 ,2
. The answer could be
represented on a number line as follows:
Jordan School District Page 159 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
A rocket is launched with an initial velocity of 160 ft/sec from a 4 foot high platform.
How long is the rocket at least 260 feet?
Write an inequality to represent the situation. The initial velocity, 0v , is 160 ft/sec and
the initial height, 0h , is 4 feet. The height will be at least (greater than or equal to) 260 ft. 2
0 016t v t h h 216 160 4 260t t
You need to determine the real world domain for this situation. Time is the independent
variable. It starts at 0 seconds and ends when the rocket hits the ground at 10 seconds.
Move all the terms to one side of the inequality so the expression is compared to zero. 216 160 256 0t t
Find where the expression is equal to zero.
2
2
16 160 256 0
16 10 16 0
16 2 8 0
t t
t t
t t
2 0 or 8 0
2 or 8
t t
t t
Determine if the expression is positive or negative around each zero. Select a value in
the interval and evaluate the expression at that value, then decide if the result is positive
or negative.
0 2t 2 8t 8 10t
1t
2
2
16 160 256
16 1 160 1 256
16 1 160 1 256
16 160 256
112
t t
negative
3t
2
2
16 160 256
16 3 160 3 256
16 9 480 256
144 480 256
80
t t
Positive
9t
2
2
16 160 256
16 9 160 9 256
16 81 1440 256
1296 1440 256
112
t t
negative
The rocket is at or above 260 feet from 2t seconds to 8t seconds. The difference is
6, so the rocket is at least 260 feet for 6 seconds.
Jordan School District Page 160 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
Solve.
1. 2 18 80 0x x 2. 2 11 30 0x x 3. 2 6 8x x
4. 2 4 3x x 5. 23 6 0x x 6. 23 17 10 0x x
7. 1
05x
8.
20
4
x
x
9.
2 10
3
x
x
10. A bottle of water is thrown upward with an initial velocity of 32 ft/sec from a cliff that is
1920 feet high. For what time does the height exceed 1920 feet?
11. A company determines that its total profit function can be modeled by
22 480 16,000.P x x x Find all values of x for which it makes a profit.
12. A rocket is launched with an initial velocity of 24 m/sec from a platform that is 3 meters
high. The rocket will burst into flames unless it stays below 25 meters. Find the interval of
time before the rocket bursts into flames.
Jordan School District Page 161 Secondary Mathematics 2
Solving for a Specified Variable
Sometimes it is necessary to use algebraic rules to manipulate formulas in order to work with a
variable imbedded within the formula.
Given the area of a circle, solve for the radius.
Given: 2A r Solve for r:
2Ar
Ar
Surface area of a right cylindrical solid with
radius r and height h
22 2A r rh
You may have to use the quadratic formula.
Solve for r:
2
2
2
2 2
2 2
2 2
2 2
0 2 2
2 2
2 2 4 2
2 2
2 4 8
4
2 2 2
4
2
2
A r rh
r rh A
a b h c A
h h Ar
h h Ar
h h Ar
h h Ar
Practice Exercises D
Solve for the indicated variable.
1. 2 2 2; solve for a b c b 2. 2 2 2 ;solve for S hl hw lw h
3. 26 ; solve for A s s
4. 2
0 1 ; solve for A A r r
5. 2 3
; solve for 2
k kN k
6. 1 2
2; solve for
Gm mF r
r
7. 21; solve for
2N n n n 8.
2 2 21 3 ; solve for x y r y
Jordan School District Page 162 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 3 Cluster 3 Honors: Polynomial and Rational Inequalities
Cluster 3: Creating equations that describe numbers or relationships
H.1.2 Solve polynomial and rational inequalities in one variable.
Example:
Solve 4 213 30 0x x .
4 213 30 0x x Find where 4 213 30 0x x .
4 2
2 2
13 30 0
10 3 0
x x
x x
2
2
10 0
10
10
x
x
x
or
2
2
3 0
3
3
x
x
x
This expression is quadratic in nature.
Factor the expression using that technique
and use the zero product property to solve
for each factor.
Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.
Interval Test
Point
Expression evaluated
at point Positive/Negative
10x 4x
4 24 13 4 30
78
Positive
10 3x 2x
4 22 13 2 30
6
Negative
3 3x 0x
4 20 13 0 30
30
Positive
3 10x 2x
242 13 2 30
6
Negative
10x 4x
4 24 13 4 30
78
Positive
The expression is less than zero when it is negative.
The expression is negative on the intervals 10 3x and 3 10x .
The answer can also be written as 10, 3 10, 3 .
Jordan School District Page 163 Secondary Mathematics 2
The answer could also be represented on a number line.
Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function
below the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.
Example:
Solve 3 26 0x x
3 26 0x x Find where 3 26 0x x
3 2
2
6 0
6 0
x x
x x
2 0
0
x
x
or
6 0
6
x
x
Factor the expression and use the zero product
property to solve for each factor.
Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.
Interval Test
Point
Expression evaluated
at point Positive/Negative
6x 10x
3 210 6 10
400
Negative
6 0x 1x
3 21 6 1
5
Positive
0x 5x
3 25 6 5
275
Positive
Jordan School District Page 164 Secondary Mathematics 2
The expression is greater than zero when it is positive.
The expression is positive on the intervals 6 0x and 0x . Keep in mind it is also
equal to zero so the endpoints are also included. The intervals that satisfy the inequality
are 6 0x and 0.x The interval would be written 6x .
The answer can also be written as 6, .
The answer could also be represented on a number line.
Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function
above the x-axis, including the values on the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.
Example:
1 2 4 0x x x
1 2 4 0x x x Find where 1 2 4 0x x x
1 2 4 0x x x
1 0
1
x
x
or
2 0
2
x
x
or
4 0
4
x
x
Use the zero product property to solve for each
factor.
Jordan School District Page 165 Secondary Mathematics 2
Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.
Interval Test Point Expression evaluated at
point Positive/Negative
2x 5x 5 1 5 2 5 4
162
Negative
2 1x 0x 0 1 0 2 0 4
8
Positive
1 4x 2x 2 1 2 2 2 4
8
Negative
4x 6x 6 1 6 2 6 4
80
Positive
The expression is less than zero when it is negative.
The expression is negative on the intervals 2x and1 4x . Keep in mind it is also
equal to zero so the endpoints are also included. The intervals that satisfy the inequality
are 2x and 1 4.x
The answer can also be written , 2 1,4 .
The answer could also be represented on a number line.
Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function
below the x-axis, including the values on the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.
Jordan School District Page 166 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
2 5 1
1 1
x x
x x
2 5 1
1 1
2 5 10
1 1
2 5 10
1
2 5 10
1
60
1
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x
x x
x
x
x
Compare the inequality to zero.
Make sure the denominators (the bottoms) are
the same.
Combine the numerators (the tops).
6 0
6
x
x
or
1 0
1
x
x
Set all of the factors in the numerator and
denominator equal to zero, and then solve.
Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.
Interval Test Point Expression
evaluated at point Positive/Negative
6x 10x
10 6 4
10 1 9
4
9
Positive
6 1x 3x
3 6 3
3 1 2
3
2
Negative
1x 0x
0 6 6
0 1 1
6
Positive
The expression is greater than zero when it is positive.
The expression is positive on the intervals 6x and 1x . Keep in mind it is also equal
to zero so the endpoints are also included except for the denominator which cannot be
equal to zero. The intervals that satisfy the inequality are 6x and 1.x
The answer can also be written as , 6 1, .
The answer could also be represented on a number line.
Jordan School District Page 167 Secondary Mathematics 2
Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function
above the x-axis, including the values on the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.
Example:
3
13
x
x
31
3
31 0
3
3 31 0
3 3
3 30
3 3
20
3
x
x
x
x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x
x
Compare the inequality to zero.
Make sure the denominators (the bottoms) are
the same.
Combine the numerators (the tops).
2 0
0
x
x
or
3 0
3
x
x
Set all of the factors in the numerator and
denominator equal to zero, and then solve.
Jordan School District Page 168 Secondary Mathematics 2
Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.
Interval Test Point Expression
evaluated at point Positive/Negative
0x 5x
2 5 10
5 3 8
5
4
Positive
0 3x 1x
2 1 2
1 3 2
1
Negative
3x 5x
2 5 10
5 3 2
5
Positive
The expression is greater than zero when it is positive.
The expression is positive on the intervals 0x and 3x . Keep in mind the denominator
cannot be equal to zero.
The answer can also be written as ,0 3, .
The answer could also be represented on a number line.
Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function
above the x-axis, including the values on the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.
Jordan School District Page 169 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
4 3
2 1x x
4 3
2 1
4 30
2 1
4 1 3 20
2 1 1 2
4 1 3 20
2 1 2 1
4 4 3 60
2 1
100
2 1
x x
x x
x x
x x x x
x x
x x x x
x x
x x
x
x x
Compare the inequality to zero.
Make sure the denominators (the bottoms)
are the same.
Combine the numerators (the tops).
10 0
10
x
x
or
2 0
2
x
x
or
1 0
1
x
x
Set all of the factors in the numerator and
denominator equal to zero, and then solve.
Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.
Interval Test Point Expression
evaluated at point Positive/Negative
10x 15x
15 10
15 2 15 1
5
238
Negative
10 1x 5x
5 10
5 2 5 1
5
28
Positive
1 2x 0x 0 10 10
0 2 0 1 2
5
Negative
2x 5x
5 10 15
5 2 5 1 18
5
6
Positive
Jordan School District Page 170 Secondary Mathematics 2
The expression is less than zero when it is negative.
The expression is negative on the intervals 10x and 1 2x . Keep in mind the
denominator cannot be equal to zero.
The answer can also be written as , 10 1,2 .
The answer could also be represented on a number line.
Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function
below the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.
Practice Exercises A Solve.
1.
3 4 1 0x x x
2.
5 1 2 0x x x
3. 3 25 0x x
4. 4 2 2x x 5. 3 2x x 6. 4 24x x
7. 6
2 2
x
x x
8. 4 5
32
x
x
9.
2
3 20
1
x x
x
10. 5 7 8
2 2
x
x x
11.
1 1
2 3x x
12.
5 3
5 2 1x x
Jordan School District Page 171 Secondary Mathematics 2
You Decide
Carter’s spaceship is trapped in a gravitational field of a newly discovered Class M planet. Carter
will be in danger if his spaceship’s acceleration exceeds 500 m/h/h. If his acceleration can be
modeled by the equation
2
2500( ) m/h/h
5A t
t
, for what range of time is Carter’s spaceship
below the danger zone?
Jordan School District Page 172 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 3 Cluster 3 (A.CED.2)
Writing and Graphing Equations in Two Variables
Cluster 3: Creating equations that describe numbers or relationships
3.3.2 Write and graph equations in 2 or more variables with labels and scales
Writing Quadratic Functions Given Key Features
A quadratic function can be expressed in several ways to highlight key features.
Vertex form: 2
f x a x h k highlights the vertex ,h k .
Factored from: f x a x p x q highlights the x-intercepts ,0p and ,0 .q
It is possible to write a quadratic function when given key features such as the vertex or the
x-intercepts and another point on the graph of the parabola.
Example:
Write a quadratic equation for a parabola that has its vertex at 2,4 and passes through
the point 1,6 .
Answer:
2
f x a x h k
You are given the vertex which is a key feature
that is highlighted by the vertex form of a
quadratic function. Use this form to help you
write the equation for the parabola graphed.
2
2 4f x a x
The vertex is 2,4 . 2h and 4k . Substitute
these values into the equation and simplify if
necessary.
2
6 1 2 4a
Use the point 1,6 to help you find the value of
a. The value of the function is 6 when x = 1 so
substitute 1 in for x and 6 in for f(x).
2
2
6 1 2 4
6 1 4
6 1 4
6 4
2
a
a
a
a
a
Use order of operations to simplify the expression
on the right side of the equation then solve for a.
2
2 2 4f x x Rewrite the expression substituting in the value
for a.
Jordan School District Page 173 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example: Write an equation for the parabola graphed below.
Answer:
2
f x a x h k
You are given the vertex which is a key feature
that is highlighted by the vertex form of a
quadratic function. Use this form to help you
write the equation for the parabola graphed.
2
( 3) ( 1)f x a x
2
3 1f x a x
The vertex is 3, 1 . 3h and 1k .
Substitute these values into the equation and
simplify if necessary.
2
5 5 3 1a
Use the point 5, 5 to help you find the value
of a. The value of the function is -5 when x = -5
so substitute -5 in for x and -5 in for f(x).
2
5 2 1
5 4 1
5 4 1
4 4
1
a
a
a
a
a
Use order of operations to simplify the expression
on the right side of the equation then solve for a.
2
3 1f x x Rewrite the expression substituting in the value
for a.
5, 5
vertex
3, 1
Jordan School District Page 174 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Write an equation for a parabola with x-intercepts 3,0 and 5,0 and passes through
the point 3, 3 .
Answer:
f x a x p x q
You are given the x-intercepts which are a key
feature that is highlighted by the factored form of
a quadratic function. Use this form to help you
write the equation for the parabola graphed.
( 3) 5f x a x x
3 5f x a x x
One x-intercept is 3,0 so 3p . The other
x-intercept is 5,0 5q . Substitute these
values into the equation and simplify if
necessary.
3 3 3 3 5a
Use the point 3, 3 to help you find the value
of a. The value of the function is -3 when x = 3
so substitute 3 in for each x and -3 in for f(x).
3 3 3 3 5
3 6 2
3 12
3
12
1
4
a
a
a
a
a
Use order of operations to simplify the
expression on the right side of the equation then
solve for a.
1
3 54
f x x x Rewrite the expression substituting in the value
for a.
Jordan School District Page 175 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Write an equation for the parabola graphed below.
Answer:
f x a x p x q
You are given the x-intercepts which are a key
feature that is highlighted by the factored form of
a quadratic function. Use this form to help you
write the equation for the parabola graphed.
( 2) 2f x a x x
2 2f x a x x
One x-intercept is 2,0 so 2p . The other
x-intercept is 2,0 2q . Substitute these
values into the equation and simplify if
necessary.
6 0 2 0 2a
Use the point 0,6 to help you find the value of
a. The value of the function is 6 when x = 0 so
substitute 0 in for each x and 6 in for f(x).
6 0 2 0 2
6 2 2
6 4
6
4
3
2
a
a
a
a
a
Use order of operations to simplify the
expression on the right side of the equation then
solve for a.
3
2 22
f x x x Rewrite the expression substituting in the value
for a.
Jordan School District Page 176 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Write a quadratic equation for the parabola described.
1. Vertex: 2,3
Point: 0,7
2. Vertex: 1,4
Point: 1,8
3. Vertex: 3, 1
Point: 2,0
4. Intercepts: 2,0 4,0
Point: 1,3
5. Intercepts: 1,0 7,0
Point: 5, 12
6. Intercepts: 5,0 4,0
Point: 3,8
Write a quadratic equation for the parabola graphed.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Jordan School District Page 177 Secondary Mathematics 2
Graphing Quadratic Equations
Graphing from Standard Form 2f x ax bx c
Example:
2 2 2f x x x
2
21
2 1
bx
a
x
2
2
2 2
1 1 2 1 2
3
f x x x
f
f x
Find the vertex.
The vertex is (1, -3)
Plot the vertex.
2
0 0 2 0 2
(0) 2
f
f
Find the y-intercept.
The y-intercept is (0, -2)
Plot the y-intercept.
Use the axis of symmetry to find another point
that is the reflection of the y-intercept.
Connect the points, drawing a smooth curve.
Remember quadratic functions are “U”
shaped.
Jordan School District Page 178 Secondary Mathematics 2
Graphing from Vertex Form 2( )f x a x h k
Example:
21
5 25
f x x
2( )f x a x h k
21
5 25
f x x
The vertex is (h, k).
Find the vertex.
The vertex is (-5, -2)
Plot the vertex.
21
0 0 5 25
(0) 3
f
f
Find the y-intercept.
The y-intercept is (0, 3)
Plot the y-intercept.
Use the axis of symmetry to find another point
that is the reflection of the y-intercept.
Connect the points, drawing a smooth curve.
Remember quadratic functions are “U”
shaped.
Jordan School District Page 179 Secondary Mathematics 2
Graphing from Factored Form ( )f x a x p x q
Example:
1
4 32
f x x x
1
4 32
4 0 3 0
4 3
f x x x
x x
x x
Find the x-intercepts.
The x-intercepts are
(-4, 0) and (3, 0)
Plot the x-intercepts.
4 3 1
2 2
Find the x-coordinate between the two
intercepts.
1 1 1 14 3
2 2 2 2
1 1 7 7
2 2 2 2
1 496.125
2 8
f
f
f
Use the x-coordinate
to find the y-
coordinate.
The vertex is
1 49,
2 8
Plot the vertex.
Connect the points, drawing a smooth curve.
Remember quadratic functions are “U”
shaped.
Jordan School District Page 180 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B Graph the following equations.
1. 2( ) 6 6f x x x
2. 2( ) 2 4 1f x x x
3. 21( ) 2
3f x x x
4. 21
( ) 1 32
f x x
5. 2
( ) 2 5f x x
6. 2
( ) 3 8f x x
7. 1
( ) 2 52
f x x x
8. ( ) 1 5f x x x
9. ( ) 2 1 3f x x x
Jordan School District Page 181 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 3 Cluster 6 (A.REI.7): Solve Systems of Equations
3.6.1 Solve simple systems containing linear and quadratic functions algebraically and
graphically.
Recall solving systems of equations in Secondary 1. We are looking for the intersection of the
two lines. There were three methods used. Below are examples of each method.
Solve: 2 4
2 3 1
x y
x y
Graphing
Graph the two equations and find the
intersection.
The intersection is (-10, -7).
Substitution
2 4x y 1. Solve for x in the first equation.
2(2 4) 3 1y y 2. Substitute the solution for x in the second
equation
4 8 3 1
8 1
7
y y
y
y
3. Solve for y
2 4
2 7 4
14 4
10
x y
x
x
x
4. Substitute y back into the first equation to
solve for x.
The solution is (-10, -7) 5. The solution is the intersection.
Jordan School District Page 182 Secondary Mathematics 2
Elimination
2 4
2 3 1
x y
x y
2 2 4
2 3 1
2 4 8
2 3 1
x y
x y
x y
x y
1. In order to eliminate the x’s, multiply the top
equation by -2.
7y 2. Combine the two equations.
2 4
2 7 4
14 4
10
x y
x
x
x
3. Substitute 7y into either original
equation in order to solve for x
The intersection is (-10, -7) 4. The solution is the intersection.
We will use these methods to help solve systems involving quadratic equations.
Example:
Find the intersection of the following two equations:
2 4
2
y x
x y
Graphing
Graph the two equations and find the
intersection(s).
The intersections are (-2, 0) and (3, 5).
Substitution
2 4 2x x
1. The first equation is already solved for y;
substitute 2 4x for y in the second
equation.
Jordan School District Page 183 Secondary Mathematics 2
2
2
2
4 2
4 2
6 0
6 0
x
x x
x x
x x
2. Simplify and write in standard polynomial
form.
2 6 0
3 2 0
3 or 2
x x
x x
x x
3. Solve for x using the method of your choice
2 2
2 2
4 4
3 4 2 4
9 4 4 4
5 0
y x y x
y y
y y
y y
4. Substitute the x values back into the first
equation to solve for y.
The solutions are (3, 5) and (-2, 0) 5. The solutions are the intersections.
Elimination
2 0 4
2
x x y
x y
1. Line up like variables.
2
2
2
0 4
1( 2 )
0 4
2
6 0
x x y
x y
x x y
x y
x x
2. Multiply the second equation by -1 then
combine the two equations.
2 6 0
3 2 0
3 or 2
x x
x x
x x
3. Solve using the method of your choice.
2 2
2 2
4 4
3 4 2 4
9 4 4 4
5 0
y x y x
y y
y y
y y
4. Substitute the x values back into the first
equation to solve for y.
The solutions are (3, 5) and (-2, 0) 5. The solutions are the intersections.
Jordan School District Page 184 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Using the method of your choice, find the intersection between the following equations: 2 2 4
2 1
x y
x y
Substitution
2 1y x
1. Solve for x in the second equation.
22 2 1 4x x
2. Substitute 2 1x for y in the first
equation.
2 2
2
2
4 4 1 4
5 4 3 0
4 4 4 5 3
2 5
4 16 60
10
4 76
10
4 2 19
10
2 19
5
2 19 2 19 or
5 5
0.472 or 1.272
x x x
x x
x
x
x
x
x
x x
x x
3. Simplify and solve for x.
2 1 2 1
2 19 2 192 1 2 1
5 5
1 2 19 1 2 19
5 5
1.944 1.544
y x y x
y y
y y
y y
4. Substitute the x values back into the
first equation to solve for y.
Jordan School District Page 185 Secondary Mathematics 2
The solutions are 2 19 1 2 19
,5 5
and
2 19 1 2 19,
5 5
Or approximately (0.472, -1.944) or (-1.272, 1.544)
5. The solutions are the intersections.
Practice Exercises A
Solve each of the systems of equations.
1. 2
6
3
x y
y x
2.
2 2 41
1
x y
y x
3. 2
3 7
4 5 24
x y
x y
4.
2
3 2
y x
x y
5.
2 3
2 4
y x
y x
6.
2 24 9 36
3 2 6
x y
y x
7.
2
2
y x
x y
8. 2
2 1
4
x y
y x
9.
2 2 89
3
x y
x y
10.
2 2 45
3
x y
y x
11.
2 2
2 2
14
4
x y
x y
12. 2 2
1 3 4x y
y x
Jordan School District Page 186 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 3 Cluster 6 Honors (A.REI.8 and A.REI.9)
Solving Systems of Equations with Vectors and Matrices
H.3.1 Represent a system of linear equations as a single matrix equation in a vector
variable.
H.3.2 Find the inverse of a matrix if it exists and use it to solve systems of linear
equations (using technology for matrices of dimension 3 × 3 or greater).
In Secondary Mathematics 1 Honors you learned to solve a system of two equations by writing
the corresponding augmented matrix and using row operations to simplify the matrix so that it
had ones down the diagonal from upper left to lower right, and zeros above and below the ones.
1 0
0 1
g
h
When a matrix is in this form it is said to be in reduced row-echelon form. The process for
simplifying a matrix to reduced row-echelon form is called Gauss-Jordan elimination after the
two mathematicians, Carl Friedrich Gauss and Wilhelm Jordan. This process, using row
operations, can be used for systems of two or more variables.
Row operations are listed below using the original matrix
0 2 6 3
1 4 7 10
2 6 9 1
.
Note: R indicates row and the number following indicates which row. For instance, R1 indicated
row one.
Interchange Rows
We want to have ones
along the diagonal. We
can switch rows so that
the one ends up in the
correct position.
Symbol: 1 2R R
All of the elements of
Row 1 will switch
positions with all the
elements of Row 2.
1 4 7 10
0 2 6 3
2 6 9 1
Multiply a row by a scalar
We want positive ones
down the diagonal.
Multiplying each
element by a scalar k,
0 ,k allows us to
change values in one
row while preserving
the overall equality.
Symbol: 1k R
11
2R
=3
0 1 32
The matrix is now: 32
0 1 3
1 4 7 10
2 6 9 1
Jordan School District Page 187 Secondary Mathematics 2
Combine Two Rows
You can add or subtract
two rows to replace a
single row. This enables
you to get ones along
the diagonal and zeros
elsewhere.
2: 1 2R R R
2 : 0 2 6 3 1 4 7 10
2 : 1 6 1 13
R
R
The matrix is now:
0 2 6 3
1 6 1 13
2 6 9 1
Multiply by a scalar, then combine rows
Sometimes it is
necessary to multiply a
row by a scalar before
combining with another
row to get a one or a
zero where needed.
3: 2 2 3R R R
3: 2 1 4 7 10 2 6 9 1
3: 2 8 14 20 2 6 9 1
3: 0 2 23 19
R
R
R
The matrix is now:
0 2 6 3
1 4 7 10
0 2 23 19
Practice Exercises A
Perform the row operations on the given matrix.
3 3 1 6
8 5 5 1
0 6 9 3
1. 2 3R R 2. 13
1R 3. 2: 1 3 2R R R
Using the matrix below, write appropriate row operation(s) to get the desired results.
(Recall that mna indicates the element of the matrix is located in row m and column n.)
3 8 3 10
2 5 10 9
7 5 5 5
4. 11 1a 5. 21 0a 6. 32 0a
Jordan School District Page 188 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example: Solve the following systems of equations using the Gauss-Jordan elimination method.
2 7
3 5 14
2 2 3
x y z
x y z
x y z
1 2 1 7
3 5 1 14
2 2 1 3
Rewrite the equations in matrix form.
1 2 1 7
0 1 2 7
2 2 1 3
2 : 3 1 2
2 : 3 6 3 21 3 5 1 14
2 : 0 1 2 7
R R R
R
R
1 2 1 7
0 1 2 7
0 2 3 11
3: 2 1 3
3: 2 4 2 14 2 2 1 3
3: 0 2 3 11
R R R
R
R
1 0 3 7
0 1 2 7
0 2 3 11
1: 2 2 1
1: 0 2 4 14 1 2 1 7
1: 1 0 3 7
R R R
R
R
1 0 3 7
0 1 2 7
0 0 1 3
3: 2 2 2
3: 0 2 4 14 0 2 3 11
3: 0 0 1 3
R R R
R
R
1 0 0 2
0 1 2 7
0 0 1 3
1:3 3 1
1: 0 0 3 9 1 0 3 7
1: 1 0 0 2
R R R
R
R
1 0 0 2
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 3
2 : 2 3 2
2 : 0 0 2 6 0 1 2 7
2 : 0 1 0 1
R R R
R
R
The solution is 2, 1,3
Rewriting the answer in equation form you end
up with:
2
1
3
x
y
z
Jordan School District Page 189 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Using Gauss-Jordan Elimination solve the following systems of equations.
1. 3 2 19
2 1
x y
x y
2.
2 3 13
2 2 3
3 4
x y z
x y z
x y z
Technology can be used to help solve systems of equations. The following system of equations
can be solved using your graphing calculator.
2 11
2 2 11
3 24
x y z
x y z
x y z
2 1 1 11
1 2 2 11
1 1 3 24
Write the augmented matrix.
Enter the matrix into your calculator.
Note: [A] is the default matrix
Push 2nd
1x
Arrow over to choose EDIT
Push ENTER
Type the dimensions. After each number push
ENTER.
For this example: 3 ENTER 4 ENTER
Type each element in the first row. Push
ENTER after each number. Continue until
every row has been entered.
Push 2nd
MODE to return to the home screen
Push 2nd
1x Then ENTER ENTER
This will give you a chance to check your
matrix for accuracy.
Push 2nd
1x arrow over to MATH.
Either arrow down to option B or push
ALPHA APPS to get to rref(
This is row reduced echelon form.
Jordan School District Page 190 Secondary Mathematics 2
Push 2nd
1x ENTER )
Or select the matrix in which your equations
are stored.
Push ENTER to obtain the answer.
The answer is (-1, 2, 7)
Rewriting the answer in equation form you end
up with:
1
2
7
x
y
z
Practice Exercises C
Solve each of the following systems using technology.
1.
3 2 31
2 19
3 2 25
x y z
x y z
x y z
2.
5 2 3 0
5
2 3 4
x y z
x y
x z
3.
2 2 2
3 5 4
2 3 6
x y z
x y z
x y z
Not every system has a single point as the solution. The following situations may also occur.
Consistent and
Independent
5
4 2 1
9 3 13
x y z
x y z
x y z
A single point solution
1 0 0 4
0 1 0 6
0 0 1 5
4, 6, 5
Jordan School District Page 191 Secondary Mathematics 2
Consistent and
Dependent
6 4
12 2 2 8
5 3
x y z
x y z
x y z
A line solution defined by one
variable
72
11 11
1 211 11
1 0
0 1
0 0 0 0
Rewriting the answer in
equation form you end up with: 72
11 11
1 211 11
0 0 this is always true
x z
y z
Note: z is an independent
variable and can take on
any real value
The solution is written as:
7 2 2 111 11 11 11
, ,z z z
Consistent and
Dependent
3 1
2
2 4 3
x y z
x z w
x y z w
A plane solution defined by
two variables
1 0 1 1 2
0 1 2 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
Rewriting the answer in
equation form you end up with:
2
2 1
0 0 this is always true
x z w
y z w
Note: z and w are independent
variables and can take on any
real value
The solution is written as:
2 , 1 2 , ,w z w z z w
All three planes coincide.
Jordan School District Page 192 Secondary Mathematics 2
Inconsistent
6
2 3
2 2 0
x y z
x y z
x y z
No solution
There are no intersections
common to all three planes or
the three planes are parallel
1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
0 0 0 1
The equations would be:
0
0
0 1 this is not true
x
y z
No Solution
or
Practice Exercises D
Solve the following systems. Indicate if the system is consistent or inconsistent.
1.
2 0
2 2 3 3
1
4 2 13
x y z
x y z
y z
x y z
2.
5 8 6 14
3 4 2 8
2 2 3
x y z
x y z
x y z
3.
5 12 10
2 5 2 1
2 3 5
x y z
x y z
x y z
4.
2 2
2 3 6 5
3 4 4 12
x y z
x y z
x y z
5.
2 3
3 2 4
3 3 1
2 4 2
x y w
x y w
x y z w
x y z w
6.
2 3 7
2 3 4
4 3
x y z w
x y z
x y w
Jordan School District Page 193 Secondary Mathematics 2
Find the Inverse of a Matrix
Two n n matrices are inverses of one another if their product is the n n identity matrix. Not
all matrices have an inverse. An n n matrix has an inverse if and only if the determinant is not
zero. The inverse of A is denoted by 1A . There are two ways to find the inverse both can be
done using technology.
1 1 0
1 3 4
0 4 3
A
1 1 0
1 3 4 4
0 4 3
The determinant is not zero therefore the matrix has an inverse.
Method 1:
Rewrite the matrix with the 3 3 identity
matrix.
1 1 0 1 0 0
1 3 4 0 1 0
0 4 3 0 0 1
Enter the matrix in your calculator and find
reduced row echelon form.
To convert to fractions push MATH Frac
The inverse matrix is:
7 34 4
1 3 34 4
1
1
1 1 1
A
Method 2:
Enter the matrix in your calculator as
matrix A.
From the home screen push 2nd
1x to select
your matrix.
Then push 1x
Then push ENTER
To convert to fractions push MATH Frac
The inverse matrix is:
7 34 4
1 3 34 4
1
1
1 1 1
A
Jordan School District Page 194 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises E
Find the inverse of the following matrices.
1.
1 1 1
4 5 0
0 1 3
2.
1 1 1
0 2 1
2 3 0
3.
2 1 3
1 2 2
0 1 1
4.
1 2 1
2 1 3
1 0 1
5.
2 3 1
1 0 4
0 1 1
6.
5 0 2
2 2 1
3 1 1
Using the Inverse to Solve a System of Linear Equations
If AX B has a unique solution, then 1X A B . Where A is the coefficient matrix, X is the
column variable matrix, and B is the column solution matrix.
Given:
ax by cz d
ex fy gz h
kx my nz p
then,
a b c
A e f g
k m n
,
x
X y
z
, and
d
B h
p
Example:
3
3 4 3
4 3 2
x y
x y z
y z
1 1 0 3
1 3 4 , , 3
0 4 3 2
x
A X y B
z
Identify the A, X, and B matrices
7 34 4
1 3 34 4
1
1
1 1 1
A
Find the inverse of A
X
7 34 4
3 34 4
1
1
1 1 1
3
3
2
Use 1X A B to find the solution.
The solution is:
1
2
2
Written as: (1, 2, -2)
1
2
2
x
y
z
Jordan School District Page 195 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises F
Solve using the inverse matrix.
1.
2 6 6 8
2 7 6 10
2 7 7 9
x y z
x y z
x y z
2.
2 5 2
2 3 8 3
2 3
x y z
x y z
x y z
3.
8
2 7
2 3 1
x y z
y z
x y
4.
6 3 11
2 7 3 14
4 12 5 25
x y z
x y z
x y z
5.
6
4 2 9
4 2 3
x y z
x y z
x y z
6.
2 0
1
2 1
y z
x y
x y z
7.
3 2 2
4 5 3 9
2 5 5
x y z
x y z
x y z
8.
1
6 20 14
3 1
x y
x y z
y z
9.
3 4 3
2 3 2
4 3 6
x y z
x y z
x y z
Jordan School District Page 196 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 2 Cluster 2b (F.IF.8b), Unit 3 Cluster 1b (A.SSE.1b), Unit 3
Cluster 2c (A.SSE.3c)
Forms and Uses of Exponential Functions
Cluster 2: Analyzing functions using different representations
2.2.2b Use properties of exponents to interpret expressions for exponential functions
Cluster 1: Interpreting the structure of expressions
3.1.1b Interpret complicated expressions by looking at one or more of their parts
separately (focus on exponential functions with rational exponents using mainly
square roots and cube roots)
Cluster 2: Writing expressions in equivalent forms to solve problems
3.2.1c Use properties of exponents to rewrite exponential functions
VOCABULARY
An exponential function is a function of the form xf x ab where a and b are constants and
0a , 0b , and 1b .
Exponential functions can also be of the form 1t
A P r . This is the simplified interest
formula. Each part of the formula has a specific meaning. The principal, P, is the original
amount of money that is deposited. The interest rate, r, is expressed as a decimal and represents
the growth rate of the investment. Time, t, is the number of years that the money remains in the
account. The amount, A, after t years can be calculated by using the formula.
Example:
Austin deposits $450 into a savings account with a 2.5% interest rate. How much money
will be in the account after 5 years?
1t
A P r
$450
2.5% 0.025
5 years
P
r
t
5
450 1 0.025A
Substitute the known values into the
equation
5
450 1.025
509.1336958
A
A
Evaluate.
Austin will have $509.13 in his account after 5 years.
Jordan School District Page 197 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
Interest is commonly assessed multiple times throughout the year. This is referred to as
compound interest because the interest is compounded or applied more than once during the
year. The formula is 1
ntr
A Pn
where n is the number of times that the interest is
compounded during the year.
1
ntr
A Pn
Example:
Cyndi received a lot of money for her high school graduation and she plans to invest
$1000 in a Dream CD. A CD is a certified account that pays a fixed interest rate for a
specified length of time. Cyndi chose to do a 3 year CD with a 0.896% interest rate
compounded monthly. How much money will she have in 3 years?
1
ntr
A Pn
$1000
0.896% 0.00896
12 times
3 years
P
r
n
t
12 30.00896
1000 112
A
Substitute the known values into the
equation
360.00896
1000 112
1027.234223
A
A
Simplify the exponent and evaluate.
Cyndi will have $1027.23 after 3 years.
Final
Amount Principal Number of times
compounded per year
Interest
Rate
Time
(in years)
Jordan School District Page 198 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
There is another interest formula where the interest is assessed continuously. It is called
continuous interest. The formula is rtA Pe . It uses the same P, r, and t from the other
interest formulas but it also utilizes the Euler constant e. Similar to pi, e is an irrational number.
It is defined to be 1
lim 1 2.718281828
n
ne
n
. It is also called the natural base.
Example:
Eva invested $750 in a savings account with an interest rate of 1.2% that is compounded
continuously. How much money will be in the account after 7 years?
rtA Pe
$750
1.2% 0.012
7 years
P
r
t
0.012 7750A e Substitute the known values into the
equation 0.084750
815.7216704
A e
A
Simplify the exponent and evaluate.
Eva will have $815.72 after 7 years.
VOCABULARY
There are times when the value of an item decreases by a fixed percent each year. This can be
modeled by the formula 1t
A P r where P is the initial value of the item, r is the rate at
which its value decreases, and A is the value of the item after t years.
Example:
Jeff bought a new car for $27,500. The car’s value decreases by 8% each year. How
much will the car be worth in 15 years?
1t
A P r
$27,500
8% 0.08
15 years
P
r
t
15
27,500 1 0.08A Substitute the known values into the
equation
15
27,500 0.92
7873.178612
A
A
Evaluate.
Jeff should sell the car for at least $7873.18.
Jordan School District Page 199 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A Use the compound and continuous interest formulas to solve the following. Round to the nearest
cent.
1. Bobbi is investing $10,000 in a money market account that pays 5.5% interest quarterly.
How much money will she have after 5 years?
2. Joshua put $5,000 in a special savings account for 10 years. The account had an interest
rate of 6.5% compounded continuously. How much money does he have?
3. Analeigh is given the option of investing $12,000 for 3 years at 7% compounded monthly
or at 6.85% compounded continuously. Which option should she choose and why?
4. Mallory purchased a new Road Glide Ultra motorcycle for $22,879. Its value depreciates
15% each year. How much could she sell it for 8 years later?
Example:
Emily invested $1250 after 2 years she had $1281.45. What was the interest rate, if the
interested was assessed once a year?
1t
A P r The interest is assessed only once a year;
use the simplified interest formula.
1t
A P r
$1281.45
$1250
2 years
A
P
t
2
1281.45 1250 1 r Substitute the known values into the
equation
21281.45
11250
r
Isolate the squared term.
21281.45
11250
r
Find the square root of each side.
1281.451
1250
1281.451
1250
r
r
1 1.0125
0.0125
r
r
or
1 1.0125
2.0125
r
r
Solve for r.
The interest rate is positive; therefore it is 0.0125 or 1.25%.
Jordan School District Page 200 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Sam invested some money in a CD with an interest rate of 1.15% that was compounded
quarterly. How much money did Sam invest if he had $1500 after 10 years?
1
ntr
A Pn
The interest is compounded quarterly; use
the compound interest formula.
1
ntr
A Pn
$1500
1.15% 0.015
4 times
10 years
A
r
n
t
4 100.015
1500 14
P
Substitute the known values into the
equation
40
40
40
1500 1 0.00375
1500 1.00375
1500
1.00375
P
P
P
Isolate P.
1291.424221 P Evaluate.
Ten years ago Sam invested $1291.42.
Example:
Suzie received $500 for her birthday. She put the money in a savings account with 4%
interest compounded monthly. When will she have $750?
1
ntr
A Pn
$500
4% 0.04
12 times
P
r
n
120.04
500 112
t
A
Substitute the known values into the
equation
$750A
Put the interest formula in Y1 and $750 in
Y2. Graph the two equations and use 2nd
,
Trace, intersect to find their intersection.
Suzie will have $750 in 10.154 years.
Jordan School District Page 201 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B Solve.
1. Jace invested $12,000 in a 3-year Dream CD with interest compounded annually. At the
end of the 3 years, his CD is worth $12,450. What was the interest rate for the CD?
2. Jaron has a savings account containing $5,000 with interest compounded annually. Two
years ago, it held $4,500. What was the interest rate?
3. Lindsey needs to have $10,000 for the first semester of college. How much does she have
to invest in an account that carries an 8.5% interest rate compounded monthly in order to
reach her goal in 4 years?
4. If Nick has $20,000 now, how long will it take him to save $50,000 in an account that
carries an interest of 5.83% compounded continuously?
VOCABULARY
When interest is assessed more than once in the year, the effective interest rate is actually higher
than the interest rate. The effective interest rate is equivalent to the annual simple rate of
interest that would yield the same amount as compounding after 1 year.
Annual Rate Effective Rate
Annual compounding 10% 10%
Semiannual compounding 10% 10.25%
Quarterly compounding 10% 10.381%
Monthly compounding 10% 10.471%
Daily compounding 10% 10.516%
Continuous compounding 10% 10.517%
Example:
$1000 is put into a savings account with 5% interest compounded quarterly. What is the
effective interest rate?
1
ntr
A Pn
$1000
5% 0.05
4 times
P
r
n
40.05
1000 14
t
A
Substitute the known values into the
equation
Jordan School District Page 202 Secondary Mathematics 2
4
4
1000 1 0.0125
1000 1.0125
t
t
A
A
Simplify what is inside the parentheses.
41000 1.0125
1000 1.050945337
t
t
A
A
Use properties of exponents to rewrite the
function so that is to the power of t.
1000 1 0.050945337t
A
Rewrite it so that it is 1 plus the interest
rate. This is the simplified interest
formula.
In the new simplified interest formula 0.0509 5.09%r
Example:
If $1000 were put into a savings account that paid 5% interest compounded continuously,
what would the monthly interest rate be?
rtA Pe $1000
5% 0.05
P
r
0.051000 tA e Substitute the known values into the
equation.
0.051000
1000 1.051271096
t
t
A e
A
Use properties of exponents to rewrite the
function so that is to the power of t.
121/12
12
12
1000 1.051271096
1000 1.004175359
1000 1 0.004175359
t
t
t
A
A
A
Remember that t is the number of years
the money is being invested. It is
necessary to multiply t by 12 to convert it
to months.
Using algebra rules, we must also divide
by 12 so that the equation does not change
since 12
112
. Perform the division inside
the parenthesis so the interest rate is
affected.
Rewrite the information in the parenthesis
so that it is 1 plus the interest rate. This is
the simplified interest formula.
In the monthly interest rate is 0.00418 0.418%r
Jordan School District Page 203 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
Find the monthly rate or effective interest rate.
1. If $2,500 is invested in an account with an interest rate of 7.23% compounded semi-
annually, what is the effective rate?
2. If $7,700 is invested in an account with an interest rate of 9% compounded quarterly,
what is the monthly interest rate?
3. If $235,000 is invested in an account with an interest rate of 22.351% compounded
monthly, what is the effective rate?
4. If $550 is invested in an account with an interest rate of 45.9% compounded annually,
what is the monthly interest rate?
Exponential Growth and Decay
VOCABULARY
Money is not the only real world phenomenon that can be modeled with an exponential function.
Other phenomena such as populations, bacteria, radioactive substances, electricity, and
temperatures can be modeled by exponential functions.
A quantity that grows by a fixed percent at regular intervals is said to have exponential growth.
The formula for uninhibited growth is 0 , 0ktA t A e k , where 0A is the original amount, t is
the time and k is the growth constant. This formula is similar to the continuous interest formula rtA Pe . Both formulas are continuously growing or growing without any constraints.
0
ktA t A e
Final
amount
Initial
Amount
Time
Growth
Constant
Jordan School District Page 204 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
A colony of bacteria that grows according to the law of uninhibited growth is modeled by
the function 0.045100 tA t e , where A is measured in grams and t is measured in days.
(a) Determine the initial amount of bacteria.
(b) What is the growth constant of the bacteria?
(c) What is the population after 7 days?
(d) How long will it take for the population to reach 140 grams?
a.
0.045100 tA t e
0A is the initial amount and in the
equation 0 100A , therefore the initial
amount is 100 grams.
b.
0.045100 tA t e
k is the growth constant and in the
equation 0.045k , therefore the growth
rate is 0.045/day.
c.
0.045
0.045(7)
100
(7) 100
(7) 137.026
tA t e
A e
A
Substitute 7 in for time, t, then evaluate.
After 7 days, there will be 137.026 grams
of bacteria.
d.
140A t
Put the exponential growth equation in
Y1 and 140 in Y2. Graph the two
equations and use 2nd
, Trace, intersect to
find their intersection.
It will take 7.477 days for the bacteria to grow to 140 grams.
VOCABULARY
A quantity that decreases by a fixed percent at regular intervals is said to have exponential
decay. The formula for uninhibited decay is 0 , 0ktA t A e k where 0A is the original
amount, t is the time and k is the constant rate of decay.
The decay formula is the same as the growth formula. The only difference is that when k > 0 the
amount increases over time making the function have exponential growth and when k < 0 the
amount decreases over time making the function have exponential decay.
Jordan School District Page 205 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
A dinosaur skeleton was found in Vernal, Utah. Scientists can use the equation 0.000124( ) 1100 tA t e , where A is measured in kilograms and t is measured in years, to
determine the amount of carbon remaining in the dinosaur. This in turn helps to
determine the age of the dinosaur bones.
(a) Determine the initial amount of carbon in the dinosaur bones.
(b) What is the growth constant of the carbon?
(c) How much carbon is left after 5,600 years?
(d) How long will it take for the carbon to reach 900 kilograms?
a.
0.000124( ) 1100 tA t e
0A is the initial amount and in the
equation 0 1,100A , therefore the initial
amount is 1,100 kilograms.
b.
0.000124( ) 1100 tA t e
k is the growth constant and in the
equation 0.000124k . Since k is
negative, therefore the carbon is
decaying at a rate 0.000124/year.
c.
0.000124
0.000124 5600
( ) 1100
(5600) 1100
(5600) 549.311
tA t e
A e
A
Substitute 5600 in for time, t, then
evaluate.
After 5600 years, there will be 549.311
kilograms of carbon remaining.
d.
900A t
Put the exponential growth equation in
Y1 and 900 in Y2. Graph the two
equations and use 2nd
, Trace, intersect to
find their intersection.
It will take 1,618.312 years for the carbon to decrease to 900 kilograms.
Jordan School District Page 206 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Problems D Solve.
1. India is one of the fastest growing countries in the world. 0.026574 tA t e describes the
population of India in millions t years after 1974.
a. What was the population in 1974?
b. Find the growth constant.
c. What will the population be in 2030?
d. When will India’s population be 1,624 million?
2. The amount of carbon-14 in an artifact can be modeled by 0.00012116 tA t e , where A is
measured in grams and t is measured in years.
a. How many grams of carbon-14 were present initially?
b. Find the growth constant.
c. How many grams of carbon-14 will be present after 5,715 years?
d. When will there be 4 grams of carbon-14 remaining?
VOCABULARY
An exponential function is a function of the form 0 0( ) 1ttA t A b A r where 0A is the initial
amount, 1b r is the growth factor, and 0 0A , 0b , and 1b .
Growth factor = 1 + r
If r < 0, is exponential decay If r > 0, is exponential growth
Jordan School District Page 207 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
A culture of bacteria obeys the law of uninhibited growth. Initially there were 500
bacteria present. After 1 hour there are 800 bacteria.
a. Identify the growth rate.
b. Write an equation to model the growth of the bacteria
c. How many bacteria will be present after 5 hours?
d. How long is it until there are 20,000 bacteria?
a.
8001.6
500
1.6 1 0.6
0.6
b
r
Find the common ratio. 1n
n
a
a
Rewrite b in the form of 1 r .
Identify the growth rate.
0.6 60%r
The bacterial is increasing at a rate of 60%
each hour.
b.
0( ) tA t A b
( ) 500(1.6)tA t
0 500
1.6
A
b
Substitute known values into the equation.
c.
5
( ) 500(1.6)
(5) 500(1.6)
(5) 5242.88
tA t
A
A
Substitute 5t into the equation and
evaluate.
Round down to the nearest whole number.
There are 5,242 bacteria present after 5
hours.
d.
20,000A t
Graph this equation and your equation in
Y1 and Y2.
Use 2nd
, Trace, intersect to find the
intersection.
There will be 20,000 bacteria after 7.849
hours.
Jordan School District Page 208 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
Michael bought a new laptop for $1,800 last year. A month after he purchased it, the
price dropped to $1,665.
a. Identify the growth rate.
b. Write an equation to model the value of the computer.
c. What will the value of the computer be after 9 months?
d. When will the value of the computer be $500?
a.
1665
0.9251800
0.925 1 0.075b
0.075r
Find the common ratio. 1n
n
a
a
Rewrite b in the form of 1 r .
Identify the growth rate.
0.075 7.5%r
The value of the computer is decreasing at
a rate of 7.5% each month.
b.
0( ) tA t A b
( ) 1800 0.925
tA t
0 1800
0.925
A
b
Substitute known values into the equation.
c.
9
( ) 1800 0.925
(9) 1800 0.925
(9) 892.38
tA t
A
A
Substitute 9t into the equation and
evaluate.
Round to the nearest cent.
After 9 months, the computer is worth
$892.38.
d.
500A t
Graph this equation and your equation in
Y1 and Y2.
Use 2nd
, Trace, intersect to find the
intersection.
It will take 16.430 months for the
computer’s value to decrease to $500.
Jordan School District Page 209 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
The population of West Jordan was 106,863 in 2011. The population is growing at a rate
of 5% each year.
a. Write an equation to model the population growth.
b. If this trend continues, what will the population be in 2020?
c. How long before the population grows to 125,000 people?
a.
0( ) 1
( ) 106863 1.05
t
t
A t A r
A t
0 106863
5% 0.05
1 1 0.05 1.05
A
r
r
Substitute known values into the equation.
b.
9(9) 106863 1.05
9 165779.587
A
A
2020 2011 9t
Substitute 9t into the equation and
evaluate.
Round down to the nearest whole person.
After 9 years, the population of West
Jordan is 165,779 people.
c.
125000A t
Graph this equation and your equation in
Y1 and Y2.
Use 2nd
, Trace, intersect to find the
intersection.
It will take 16.430 months for the
computer’s value to decrease to $500.
Jordan School District Page 210 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example:
A culture of 200 bacteria is put in a petri dish and the culture doubles every hour.
a. Write an equation to model the bacteria growth.
b. If this trend continues, how many bacteria will there be in 5 hours?
c. How long before the bacteria population reaches 7000,000?
a.
0( ) tA t A b
( ) 200 2
tA t
0 200
100% 1.00
1 1 1 2
A
r
b r
Substitute known values into the equation.
b.
5
( ) 200 2
(5) 200 2
(5) 6,400
tA t
A
A
Substitute 5t into the equation and
evaluate.
After 5 hours, there are 6,400 bacteria.
c.
700,000A t
Graph this equation and your equation in
Y1 and Y2.
Use 2nd
, Trace, intersect to find the
intersection.
It will take 11.773 hours for the bacteria to
reach 700,000.
Jordan School District Page 211 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises E Solve
1. A bird species is in danger of extinction. Last year there were 1,400 birds and today only
1,308 of the birds are alive.
a. Identify the growth rate.
b. Write an equation to model the population.
c. If this trend continues, what will the population be in 10 years?
d. If the population drops below 100 then the situation will be irreversible. When
will this happen?
2. There is a fruit fly in your house. Fruit fly populations triple every day until the food
source runs out.
a. Write an equation to model the fruit fly growth.
b. If this trend continues, how many fruit flies will there be at the end of 1 week?
c. How long before the fruit fly population reaches 50,000?
3. In 2003 the population of Nigeria was 124,009,000. It has a growth rate of 3.1%.
a. Write an equation to model the population growth since 2003.
b. If this trend continues, what will the population be in 2050?
c. How long before the population grows to 200,000,000 people?
YOU DECIDE
Utah’s population was 2,763,885 in 2010 and 2,817,222 in 2011, find the growth rate. Can the
population in Utah continue to grow at this rate indefinitely? Why or why not? Justify your
answer.
Jordan School District Page 213 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 4 Cluster 1 (S.CP.1)
Applications of Probability
Cluster 1: Understand independence and conditional probability and use them to interpret data
4.1.1 Describe events as subsets of a sample space (the set of outcomes) using
characteristics (or categories) of the outcomes, or as unions, intersections, or
complements of other events (“or,” “and,” “not”).
VOCABULARY An event is an activity or experiment which is usually represented by a capital letter. A sample
space is a set of all possible outcomes for an activity or experiment. A smaller set of outcomes
from the sample space is called a subset. The complement of a subset is all outcomes in the
sample space that are not part of the subset. A subset and its complement make up the entire
sample space. If a subset is represented by A, the complement can be represented by any of the
following: not A, ~A, or Ac .
Example 1:
Event Sample Space Possible Subset Complement
Flip a coin S={heads, tails} B={heads} B tailsc
Roll a die S={1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} even
E={2, 4, 6} ~E ={1, 3, 5}
Pick a digit 0-9 S={0,1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} N={2, 5, 7, 9} not N= {0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 8}
VOCABULARY
Definition Example Venn Diagram
The union of two events
includes all outcomes from
each event. The union can
be indicated by the word
“or” or the symbol .
A= 0,2,4,6,8,10
B= 0,5,10,15,20
A B= 0,2,4,5,6,8,10,15,20
The intersection of two
events includes only those
outcomes that are in both
events. The intersection
can be indicated by the
word “and” or the symbol . If the two events do
NOT have anything in
common, the intersection
is the “empty set”,
indicated by { } or .
A= 0,2,4,6,8,10
B= 0,5,10,15,20
A B 0,10
Jordan School District Page 214 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2:
The sample space is S={Green, Violet,
Turquoise, Yellow, Blue, Red, White,
Brown, Peach, Black, Magenta, Orange}
The subset of primary colors is P={Yellow,
Blue, Red}
The subset of American Flag colors is:
A={Blue, Red, White}
P A= {Yellow, Blue, Red, White}
P A= {Blue, Red}
Pc {Green, Violet, Turquoise, White,
Brown, Peach, Black, Magenta, Orange}
~ P A ={Green, Violet, Turquoise,
Brown, Peach, Black, Magenta, Orange}
Practice Exercises A
1. Choosing a letter from the alphabet.
A. List the sample space.
B. List a subset of the letters in your first name.
C. List a subset of the letters in your last name.
D. Find the union of the subsets of your first name and last name.
E. Find the intersection of the subsets of your first name and last name.
2. Given the sample space S = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} with event A = {3, 4, 5, 6, 7} and
event B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}.
A. Draw a Venn diagram representing the sample space with events A and B.
B. List all the outcomes for AB.
C. List all the outcomes for AB.
D. List all the outcomes for Ac .
3. Given a standard deck of 52 cards, event A is defined as a red card and event B is defined
as the card is a diamond.
A. List all the outcomes for AB.
B. List all the outcomes for AB.
C. What is ~A?
D. What is A Ac ?
Jordan School District Page 215 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 4 Clusters 1–2 (S.CP.2, S.CP.3, S.CP.4, S.CP.5, S.CP.6, S.CP.7)
Conditional Probability
Cluster 1: Understanding and using independence and conditional probability
4.1.2 Independence of 2 events (use the product of their probabilities to determine if
they are independent) 4.1.3 Understand conditional probability and interpret the independence of A and B
using conditional probability 4.1.4 Construct and interpret two-way frequency tables; Use two-way frequency tables
to determine independence and to find conditional probabilities 4.1.5 Explain conditional probability and independence
Cluster 2: Computing probabilities of compound events 4.2.1 Find conditional probabilities 4.2.2 Apply the Addition Rule
VOCABULARY
Probability is a value that represents the likelihood that an event will occur. It can be
represented as a fraction, decimal 0 1probabiltiy , or percent. A probability of zero (0)
means that the event is impossible and a probability of one (1) means that the event must occur.
Events are independent if the occurrence of one event does not change the probability of
another event occurring. Events are dependent if the occurrence of one changes the probability
of another event occurring. For example, drawing marbles from a bag with replacement is
independent, while drawing marbles from a bag without replacement is dependent.
Joint probability is the likelihood of two or more events occurring at the same time.
Formula Description Example
number of favorable outcomes
P Atotal number of outcomes
Probability of the
individual event A
occurring.
Flipping a coin
P(heads)=1
2
P(AB)=P(A) P(B)
Joint probability
of independent
events.
Flipping a coin AND rolling a die P(heads and 5)=P(heads) P(5)
1 1=
2 6
1
12
Jordan School District Page 216 Secondary Mathematics 2
The Addition Rule
(A B) (A) (B) (A B)P P P P The addition rule finds the probability of event
A occurring or event B occurring.
A letter in the word Algebra or a letter in the
word Geometry. Where event A is Algebra and
event B is Geometry.
(A B)= (A) (B) (A B)
6 7 3
26 26 26
10 5
26 13
P P P P
Practice Exercises A
1. You have an equally likely chance of choosing an integer from 1 to 50. Find the
probability of each of the following events.
A. An even number
B. A perfect square
C. A factor of 150 is chosen
D. A two digit number is chosen
E. A multiple of 4 is chosen
F. A number less than 35 is chosen
G. A prime number is chosen
H. A perfect cube is chosen
2. You randomly chose two marbles, replacing the first marble before drawing again, from a
bag containing 10 black, 8 red, 4 white, and 6 blue marbles. Find the probability of each
of the following events.
A. A white marble, then a red marble is selected.
B. A red marble is not selected, then a blue marble is selected.
C. A green marble, then a green marble is selected.
D. A blue or black marble is selected, then a white marble is selected.
3.
Drawing a card from the cards on the left, determine
the probability of each of the following.
A. P(Even or shaded)
B. P(White or odd)
C. P(Less than four or shaded)
D. P(Greater than five or shaded)
E. P(Factor of ten or white)
Jordan School District Page 217 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 1:
P(peach)=1
12
P(color in American flag)=3 1
12 4
P(primary color and American flag)=2 1
12 6
P(pink)=0
012
Practice Exercises B Using the Venn diagram, answer the following questions.
1. P(girls)
3. P(not sports)
5. P(girls and sports)
2. P(sports, not girls)
4. P(not sports, not girls)
6. P(Mr. P class)
Example 2:
Curfew:
Yes
Curfew:
No Total
Chores:
Yes 13 5 18
Chores:
No 12 3 15
Total 25 8 33
P(has chores)=18
33
P(doesn’t have a curfew)=8
33
P(has a curfew and chores)=13
33
P(has chores doesn’t have a curfew)=5
33
P(has a curfew)=25
33
Jordan School District Page 218 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
Find the marginal totals. Then use the table to find the probabilities below.
Brown hair Blonde hair Red hair Black hair Other hair Total
Male 42 11 3 17 27
Female 47 16 13 9 15
Total
1. P(male) 2. P(red hair) 3. P(other hair)
4. P(blonde hair male) 5. P(black hair and female) 6. P(brown hair not male)
7. P(female not other hair) 8. P(not female not male) 9. P(red hair and black hair)
VOCABULARY Two events are independent if P(A) P(B)=P(AB)
Example 3:
10th
11th
12th
Total
Male 320 297 215 832
Female 285 238 216 739
Total 605 535 431 1571
1. Are being a male and being in 10th
independent?
2. Are being a female and being in 12th
grade independent?
1.
P(male)=832
1571
P(10th
grade)=605
1571
P(male 10th
grade)=320
1571
832
1571
605
1571
?
320
1571
0.204 0.204
The product of the probabilities of the
individual events is equal to the probability of
the intersection of the events; therefore the
events are independent.
2.
P(female)=739
1571
P(12th
grade)=431
1571
P(female 12th
grade)=216
1571
739
1571
431
1571
?
216
1571
0.129 0.137
The product of the probabilities of the
individual events is not equal to the probability
of the intersection of the events; therefore the
events are not independent.
Jordan School District Page 219 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises D
Determine whether or not the following events are independent.
1. If P(A)=0.7, P(B)=0.3, and P(AB)=0.21, are events A and B independent? Why or why
not?
2. Jaron has a dozen cupcakes. Three are chocolate with white frosting, three are chocolate with
yellow frosting, four are vanilla with white frosting, and two are vanilla with yellow frosting.
Are cake flavor and frosting color independent?
3.
Dance Sports TV Total
Men 2 10 8 20
Women 16 6 8 30
Total 18 16 16 50
The above table represents the favorite leisure activities for 50 adults. Use it to answer the
following:
A. Find the probability of your gender.
B. Find the probability of your favorite leisure activity.
C. Find the probability of P(your gender your favorite leisure activity).
D. Are your gender and your favorite leisure activity independent?
VOCABULARY
A probability that takes into account a given condition is called a conditional probability. A
given condition is when we already know the outcome of one of the events. For example, when
flipping a coin and rolling a die, the probability of “rolling a 6 given heads”, means we already
know the coin has resulted in heads. This is written P(6 | heads).
The conditional probability formula is ( )
|( )
P A BP A B
P B
.
Jordan School District Page 220 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 4:
A bakery sells vanilla and chocolate cupcakes
with white or blue icing.
White Blue Total
Vanilla 3 5 8
Chocolate 6 7 13
Total 9 12 21
(Vanilla Blue)(Vanilla Blue)
(Blue)
5
12
PP
P
(White Chocolate)(White Chocolate)
(Chocolate)
6
13
PP
P
Alex’s favorite cupcake is chocolate with blue
icing. What is the probability he will get his
favorite cupcake if all the vanilla cupcakes
have already been sold?
(Blue Chocolate)(Blue Chocolate)
(Chocolate)
7
13
PP
P
Example 5:
(iPod CellPhone)(iPod CellPhone)
(CellPhone)
10 2
25 5
PP
P
(CellPhone NoiPod)(CellPhone NoiPod)
(NoiPod)
15 15 5
15 6 21 7
PP
P
Miss K finds an iPod after class. What is the
probability the owner has an iPod and no cell
phone?
(iPod NoCellPhone)(iPod NoCellPhone)
(NoCellPhone)
4 4 2
4 6 10 5
PP
P
Jordan School District Page 221 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises E
Bus Private Car Walk Total
Male 146 166 82 394
Female 154 185 64 403
Total 300 351 146 797
Use the table above to answer the following questions.
1. P(Walk | Female) 2. P(Male | Private Car)
3. P(Bus | Male) 4. P(Female | Doesn’t Walk)
5. What is the probability that Melissa
rides the bus? Write the conditional
probability equation and then find
the probability.
6. Jordan walks to school. What is the
probability Jordan is male? Write the
conditional probability equation and
then find the probability.
Use the Venn diagram above to answer the following questions.
7. P(After School Job | Male)
8. P(Female | No After School Job)
9. P(No After School Job | Male) 10. P(Male | After School Job)
11. Is the probability of having an after
school job given you are male the
same as the probability of being
male given that you have an after
school job? Use the probabilities in
#7 and #10 to justify your answer.
12. A student works at McTaco Chimes
what is the probability the student is
female?
Jordan School District Page 222 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY Events A and B are independent if and only if they satisfy the probability A given B equals the
probability of A OR the probability of B given A equals the probability of B.
( ) ( )P A B P A or ( ) ( )P B A P B
Example 6:
A bakery sells vanilla and chocolate cupcakes
with white or blue icing.
White Blue Total
Vanilla 3 5 8
Chocolate 6 7 13
Total 9 12 21
Are color of icing and cupcake flavor
independent?
?
?
?
( ) ( )
( )( )
( )
5 12
8 21
0.625 0.571
P Blue Vanilla P Blue
P Blue VanillaP Blue
P Vanilla
Therefore the color of icing and cupcake flavor
are not independent.
Note: Keep in mind the above can also be tested using any of the following options.
1. ?
(Blue Chocolate) (Blue)P P 2. ?
(Vanilla Blue) (Vanilla)P P
3. ?
(Chocolate Blue) (Chocolate)P P 4. ?
(White Chocolate) (White)P P
5. ?
(White Vanilla) (White)P P 6. ?
(Vanilla White) (Vanilla)P P
7. ?
(Chocolate White) (Chocolate)P P
Jordan School District Page 223 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 7:
Are having an iPod and having a cell phone
independent?
?
?
?
(iPod Cell Phone) (iPod)
(iPod Cell Phone)(iPod)
(Cell Phone)
10 14
25 35
2 2
5 5
P P
PP
P
Therefore, having an iPod and having a cell
phone are independent.
Practice Exercises F
Students were asked what their main goal for their high school years was. The reported goals
were getting good grades, being popular, or excelling at sports.
Goals
Grades Popular Sports Total
Boy 117 50 60 227
Girl 130 91 30 251
Total 247 141 90 478
Use the table above to answer the following questions.
1. Is the probability of having good grades as a goal independent of gender?
2. Is gender independent of having popularity as a goal?
3. Workers at Cal Q Lus Copies were polled to see if Vitmain C was a way to reduce the
likelihood of getting a cold. According to the diagram, are you less likely to catch a cold
if you are taking vitamin C? Justify your answer using conditional probability.
4. Real estate ads suggest that 64% of homes for sale have garages, 21% have swimming
pools, and 17% have both features. Are having a garage and having a pool independent
events? Justify your answer using conditional probability.
Jordan School District Page 224 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 4 Cluster 2 & 3 Honors (S.CP.8, S.CP.9, S.MD.6, S.MD.7)
Applications of Probability
Cluster 2: Computing probabilities of compound events
4.2.3 Apply the general Multiplication Rule
4.2.4 Use permutations and combinations to compute probabilities of compound events
Cluster 3: Using probability to evaluate outcomes of decisions
4.3.1 Use probability to make fair decisions
4.3.2 Analyze decisions and strategies
VOCABULARY A compound event consists of two or more simple events. Tossing a coin is a simple event.
Tossing two or more coins is a compound event. A compound event is shown as
P(A ) ( ) ( )B P A P B
A tree diagram is a way of illustrating compound events. Each simple event adds new branches
to the tree diagram. The end result shows all possible outcomes.
When events are independent, the probability of a compound event is the product of the
probability of the desired outcome for each simple event. This is the general Multiplication Rule.
Example 1:
This is a tree diagram
representing the possible
outcomes when tossing three
different coins.
There are eight possible
outcomes.
This would be the same
representation if looking at the
outcomes of tossing one coin
three separate times.
1 1 1 1P(HHH)
2 2 2 8
1 1 1 1P(THH)
2 2 2 8
Start
H
H H HHH
T HHT
T H HTH
T HTT
T
H H THH
T THT
T H TTH
T TTT
Penny Nickel Result
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Dime
1(H)
2
1(T)
2
P
P
Jordan School District Page 225 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2:
This is a tree diagram
representing the possible
outcomes when tossing
one coin and rolling one
die.
1 1 1P(H 1)
2 6 12
1 5 5P(T 1)
2 6 12not
Practice Exercises A
Using a tree diagram find the following probabilities.
1. Sophomores are required to either take English 10 or English 10H. They need Secondary
Math 2, Secondary Math 2H, or Pre-Calculus. Sophomores also need either Biology or
Chemistry.
A. Draw a tree diagram representing all
sophomore choices.
B. P(Eng10, Sec2H, Chem.)
C. P(Eng10H, Sec2, Bio.)
D. P(Eng10H, Sec2H, PreCalc)
2. You have the following objects: a spinner with five choices, a six-sided die, and a coin.
P(spinner, die, coin)
A. Draw a tree diagram satisfying the following: a choice on the spinner, a one or two
vs. anything else on the die (Hint: (1 2)P vs ( 1 2)P not ), and heads or tails.
B. P(5, 1 or 2, H) C. P(even, not 1 or 2, T)
D. P(1, 1 or 2, H) E. P(6, not 1 or 2, T)
F. P(number < 6, not 1 or 2, H) G. P(odd, 1 or 2, T)
Start
H "1" H 1
not "1" H not 1
T "1" T1
not "1" T not 1
1¢
COIN DIE RESULT
12
12
16
16
56
56
112
112
512
512
1( )
2P H
1( )
2P T
1(1)
6P
5( 1)
6P not
Jordan School District Page 226 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
Probability of Two Dependent Events: If two events, A and B, are dependent, then the
probability of both events occurring is .P A B P A P B A In other words, the
probability of both events occurring is the probability of event A times the probability of event B
given that A has already occurred. Likewise, ( )P B A P B P A B . These formulas can be
extended to any number of independent events.
Example 3:
There are 7 dimes and 9 pennies in a wallet. Suppose two coins are to be selected at random,
without replacing the first one. Find the probability of picking a penny and then a dime.
(penny, then dime) penny dime|first coin was penny
number of pennies number of dimes after a penny has been drawn
number of coins number of coins after a penny has been drawn
9 7
16 15
21
80
P P P
Example 4:
A basket contains 4 plums, 6 peaches, and 5 oranges. What is the probability of picking 2
oranges, then a peach if 3 pieces of fruit are selected at random?
Example 5:
A cereal company conducts a blind taste test. 55% of those surveyed are women and 45% are
men. 75% of the women surveyed like the cereal, and 85% of the men like the cereal. What is the
probability that a person selected at random is:
A. A woman who likes the cereal?
B. A man who likes the cereal?
C. A woman who doesn’t like the
cereal?
D. A man who doesn’t like the
cereal?
A. woman like woman like womanP P P
0.55 0.75 0.4125
B. man like man like manP P P
0.45 0.85 0.3825
C. woman dislike woman dislike womanP P P
0.55 0.25 0.1375
D. man dislike man dislike manP P P
0.45 0.15 0.0675
2 oranges, then peach orange orange after orange peach after 2 oranges
5 4 6 120 4
15 14 13 2730 91
P P P P
Jordan School District Page 227 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
1. A photographer has taken 8 black and white photographs and 10 color photographs for a
brochure. If 4 photographs are selected at random, what is the probability of picking first 2
black and white photographs, then 2 color photographs?
2. There are 7 blue pens, 3 black pens, and 2 red pens in a drawer. If you select three pens at
random with no replacement, what is the probability that you will select a blue pen, then a
black pen, then another blue pen?
3. Tammy’s mom is baking cookies for a bake sale. When Tammy comes home, there are 22
chocolate chip cookies, 18 sugar cookies, and 15 oatmeal cookies on the counter. Tammy
sneaks into the kitchen, grabs a cookie at random, and eats it. Five minutes later, she does
the same thing with another cookie. What is the probability that neither of the cookies was a
chocolate chip cookie?
4. There are 2 Root Beers, 2 Sprites, 3 Mountain Dews, and 1 Gatorade left in the vending
machine at school. The machines buttons are broken and will randomly give you a random
drink no matter what button you push. Find the probability of each outcome?
A. root beer, root beerP
C. sprite, gatoradeP
B. root beer, mountain dewP
D. mountain dew, mountain dew, mountain dewP
5. A department store employs high school students, all juniors and seniors. 60% of the
employees are juniors. 50% of the seniors are females and 75% of the juniors are males.
One student employee is chosen at random. What is the probability of choosing:
A. A female junior
C. A male junior
B. A female senior
D. A male senior
6. There are 400 fans at a baseball game that get popcorn and hotdogs. 75% of the fans getting
food are adults and the rest are children. 80% of the children getting food are eating hotdogs
and 40% of the adults getting food are getting popcorn. One fan is chosen at random to
receive free food. What is the probability of choosing:
A. An adult with popcorn
C. An adult with a hotdog
B. A child with popcorn
D. A child with a hotdog
Jordan School District Page 228 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY
The factorial function (symbol: !) is a way to multiply a series of descending natural numbers.
! 1 2 3 2 1n n n n is the general formula representing a factorial function. For
instance, 5! 5 4 3 2 1 120 . By definition 0! 1 and 1! 1 .
A permutation is a combination, or an arrangement of a group of objects, where order matters.
For instance a lock combination or batting orders are examples where the order matters. If we
look at the letters A, B, and C there are six ways to arrange the letters, ie: ABC, ACB, BAC,
BCA, CBA, CAB.
The number of ways to arrange n distinct objects is indicated by !n
For example, in how many orders can a person read 5 different magazines?
This is found by finding 5! or 5 4 3 2 1 120 . So, there are 120 different orders in which are
person can read 5 different magazines.
The number of ways to arrange n distinct objects taking them r at a time is indicated by
n r
!P
!
n
n r
, where n and r are whole numbers and n r . If n r then nPr !n .
For example, in how many orders can a person read 5 magazines selected from a list of 9
possibilities?
This is found by finding 9 5
9! 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1P 9 8 7 6 5 15,120
9 5 ! 4 3 2 1
. So, there
are 15,120 different orders in which a person can ready 5 magazines selected from a list of 9
possibilities.
Permutations with n objects where one or more objects repeats, requires taking into consideration
each item that is repeated. Use the formula 1 2
!
! ! !k
n
s s s where 1s represents the number of times
the first object is repeated.
For example, how many way can you arrange the letters in ? KNICKKNACK
There are 10 letters with 4 K’s, 2 C’s, and 2 N’s. The total number of arrangements is
1 2
! 10!37,800
! ! ! 4! 2! 2!k
n
s s s
Note: All of the probability functions on your graphing calculator can be found by selecting
MATH then arrow over to PRB.
Jordan School District Page 229 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 6: You have just purchased 15 new CDs and want to add them to your iPod. You don’t want to
remove any music already on your iPod and there is only room for 5 more CDs. How many ways
can you add 5 different CDs to your iPod?
15 5
15!
15 5 !
15!360,360
10!
P
There are 360,360 ways you can add 5
different CDs from your15 choices to your
iPod.
n =15
r = 5
Use
!nPr
!
n
n r
Example 7:
Find the number of distinguishable permutations for the word MISSISSIPPI.
11!34,650
4! 4! 2!
There are 34, 650 distinguishable permutations
for the word MISSISSIPPI
n = 11
1s = I = 4
2s = S = 4
3s = P = 2
Use 1 2
!nPr
! ! !k
n
s s s
Practice Exercises C
Compute.
1. 8 3P 2. 6 6P 3. 7 0P 4. 10 1P
Find the number of distinguishable permutations for the following words.
5. MATHEMATICS 6. SALT LAKE CITY 7. CHEMISTRY
Solve the following.
8. It is time to elect sophomore class officers. There are 12 people running for four positions:
president, vice president, secretary, and historian. How many distinct ways can those
positions be filled?
9. You just received 7 new movies in the mail. You only have time to watch 3 this weekend.
How many distinct ways can you watch the movies this weekend?
10. The Discriminants are giving a short evening performance. Their latest CD has 14 songs on
it; however they only have enough time to perform 8 songs. How many distinct
performances can they give?
Jordan School District Page 230 Secondary Mathematics 2
VOCABULARY When we are considering combinations we are only considering the number of groupings. For
instance selecting people to a committee or choosing pizza toppings are examples where the order
does not matter.
The number of ways to group n distinct objects taking them r at a time is indicated by
n r
!C
! !
n
r n r
, where n and r are whole numbers and n r .
Example 8: Honors English students are required to read 8 books from a list of 25. How many combinations
could a student select?
25 8
25!C
8! 25 8 !
25!
8! 17 !
1,081,575
A student has 1,081,575 different groupings of
books they could read.
n =25
r = 8
Use n r
!C
! !
n
r n r
Practice Exercises D
Compute
1. 11 6C 2. 32 0C 3. 65 62C 4. 100 96C
Solve the following.
5. Four members from a group of 18 on the board of directors at the Fa La La School of Arts
will be selected to go to a convention (all expenses paid) in Hawaii. How many different
groups of 4 are there?
6. You have just purchased a new video game console. With the purchase you are given the
option of obtaining three free games from a selection of ten. How many combinations of
games can you choose?
7. You are the manager of a new clothing store. You need 5 new employees and have 20
qualified applicants. How many ways can you staff the store?
Jordan School District Page 231 Secondary Mathematics 2
You Decide You are registering for your junior year in school. Your school is on a block schedule, four
periods each day. You must take the following courses: English, history, math, and science. You
can fill the other four periods with classes of your choice.
English Math Science History Elective
English 11
English 11H
Concurrent
AP
Sec Math 3
Sec Math 3H
PreCalculus
Calculus
Concurrent
Intro. to Stats
AP Stats
Personal Finance
Biology
Chemistry
Physics
AP Biology
AP Chem
AP Physics
Anatomy
Wild Life Bio
Bio Ag.
Genetics
Astronomy
Geology
Zoology
U.S.
U.S. Honors
AP U.S
Law Enforcement
World Religions
European Hist. Craft
Psychology
AP Psychology
Sociology
Language
Band
Orchestra
Choir
Dance
Drama
Photo
Ceramics
Painting
Drawing
PE
Sports Medicine
Interior Design
Business
Marketing
Web Page Design
Woods
Drafting
Auto
Sewing
Foods
Child Development
Pre-School
Financial Lit
Green House
Release Time
A. If you are not focusing on the order of your classes, how many different schedules could
you construct?
B. Now that you have chosen your classes, how many ways could you set up your schedule?
C. Now that you have chosen your classes, if your Math class must be the first period of the
day, how many different schedules can you now have?
Jordan School District Page 232 Secondary Mathematics 2
Using Permutations and Combinations to Determine Probabilities of Events
Recall
Probability is number of favorable outcomes ( )
total number of outcomes ( )
P EP
P S .
Example 9:
A standard deck of face cards consists of 52 cards, 4 suits (red diamonds, red hearts, black
spades, black clubs), and 13 cards in each suit, (numbers 2 through 10, jack, queen, king, ace).
What is the probability that the hand consists of 5 red cards?
26 5
52 5
5 red cards
65,780
2,598,960
0.025
CP
C
The total number of outcomes is 52 5C .
There are 26 red cards, so 26 5C is the number
of ways to choose 5 red cards.
Example 10:
Using a standard deck of face cards, what is the probability that the hand consists of 1 diamond?
39 4 13 1
52 5
one diamond
82,251 13
2,598,960
1,069,2630.411
2,598,960
C CP
C
The total number of outcomes is 52 5C .
There are 39 cards that are not diamonds, so
39 4C is the number of ways to choose 4 cards
that are not diamonds. There are 13
diamonds so 13 1C is the way to choose 1
diamond.
Practice Exercises E
1. There are 14 black pens and 8 blue pens in a drawer. If 3 pens are chosen at random, what is
the probability that they are all blue?
2. Sam has 9 pairs of socks in a drawer: 5 white pairs and 4 gray pairs. If he chooses three
pairs at random to pack for a trip, find the probability that he chooses exactly two white
pairs.
3. A bag contains 14 cherry, 15 lime, and 10 grape suckers. Find the probability of picking 3
cherry suckers and 2 grape suckers if 5 suckers are chosen at random.
4. Barbara has a collection of 28 movies, including 12 comedies and 16 dramas. She selects 3
movies at random to lend to a friend. What is the probability of her selecting 3 comedies?
5. Five books are chosen at random from a best-seller list that includes 12 novels and 6
biographies. Find the probability of selecting 3 novels, and 2 biographies.
Jordan School District Page 233 Secondary Mathematics 2
Using Probability Models to Analyze Situations and Make Decisions
Example 11: The addition game is played by rolling two dice. Player 1 gets a point if the sum of the two dice
is even. Player 2 gets a point if the sum of the two dice is odd. Use probability to determine if
this game is fair.
VOCABULARY
A game in which all participants have an equal chance of winning is a fair game. Similarly, a
fair decision is based on choices that have the same likelihood of being chosen.
Fair Decisions and Random Numbers
In order for a decision to be fair each possible outcome must be equally likely. For example if
you are hosting a party that includes 20 people and want to randomly choose 5 people to bring
treats there are multiple ways in which to make a fair and unfair decision.
A fair decision would be to assign each person a number. Write each of these numbers on a
separate piece of paper and drop them into a hat. Shuffle the numbers in the hat and choose five
papers to match five party members. These five people would be assigned to bring treats. This is
often referred to as “drawing lots”.
An unfair decision would be to write each person’s name on a piece of paper. Then arrange the
papers in alphabetical order. Starting with the first paper, flip a coin and record the result: heads
or tails. The first five friends that have a tail flipped for them must bring treats. This is unfair
because you will probably never flip a coin for your friends that have names that begin with
letters at the end of the alphabet.
Often Random Numbers are used to help you make fair decisions. For an event to be random
there is no pre-determined bias towards any particular outcome. Often people use random
number tables, random number generators on a calculator, or simply shuffle pieces of papers that
have numbers printed on them.
There are six possible outcomes for each
dice.
Using the general multiplication rule
6 6 36 .
Start by determining how many different
outcomes can occur when rolling two dice.
Rolling Sums that are Even
1, 1 2, 2 3, 1 4, 2 5, 1 6, 2
1, 3 2, 4 3, 3 4, 4 5, 3 6, 4
1, 5 2, 6 3, 5 4, 6 5, 5 6, 6
Determine the number of ways that you can roll
an even number and an odd number by listing all
possible outcomes
Jordan School District Page 234 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 12: The multiplication game is played by rolling two dice. Player 1 gets a point if the product of the
two dice is even and player 2 gets a point if the product of the two dice is odd. Use probability
to determine if this game is fair.
Rolling Sums that are Odd
1, 2 2, 1 3, 2 4, 1 5, 2 6, 1
1, 4 2, 3 3, 4 4, 3 5, 4 6, 3
1, 6 2, 5 3, 6 4, 5 5, 6 6, 5
There are 18 ways to roll an even sum and 18
ways to roll an odd sum.
18(even) 0.50
36
18(odd) 0.50
36
P
P
Calculate the probability of rolling an even sum.
Calculate the probability of rolling an odd sum.
This game is fair because each player has the same probability of rolling and even or odd
number.
There are six possible outcomes for each dice.
Using the general multiplication rule 6 6 36 .
Start by determining how many different
outcomes can occur when rolling two dice.
Rolling a Product that is Even
1, 2 2, 1 3, 2 4, 1 5, 2 6, 1
1, 4 2, 2 3, 4 4, 2 5, 4 6, 2
1, 6 2, 3 3, 6 4, 3 5, 6 6, 3
2, 4 4, 4 6, 4
2, 5 4, 5 6, 5
2, 6 4, 6 6, 6
Rolling a Product that is Even
1, 1 3, 1 5, 1
1, 3 3, 3 5, 3
1, 5 3, 5 5, 5
There are 27 ways to roll a product that is even and
9 ways to roll a product that is odd.
Determine the number of ways that you
can roll and even number and an odd
number by listing all possible outcomes
27(even) 0.75
36
9(odd) 0.25
36
P
P
Calculate the probability of rolling an even
product.
Calculate the probability of rolling an odd
product.
This game is not fair because the probability of rolling an even product is higher than rolling an
odd product.
Jordan School District Page 235 Secondary Mathematics 2
Spinner BSpinner A
43
85
91
Example 13:
Suppose each player spins the spinner once. Player A using spinner A, and Player B using
spinner B. The one with the larger number wins.
To determine how many possible outcomes there
are, list all the outcomes or use the general
multiplication rule.
1, 4 1, 3 1, 8
5, 4 5, 3 5, 8
9, 4 9, 3 9, 8
3 3 9
There are 9 possible outcomes.
Start by determining how many possible
outcomes there are.
List the number of ways in which player A wins
5, 4 5, 3 9, 4 9, 3 9, 8
List the number of ways in which play B wins
1, 4 1, 3 1, 8 5, 8
Count the number of ways in which player A
wins and the number of ways in which player
B wins.
number of ways player A wins 5( ) .5
total number of outcomes 9P A
number of ways player B wins 4( ) .4
total number of outcomes 9P B
Find the probability that player A will win or
P(A) and the probability that player B will
win or P(B).
This game is not fair because player A has a higher probability of winning.
Jordan School District Page 236 Secondary Mathematics 2
Using Probability to Analyze Decisions
Understanding the probability or expected outcomes from probability models and experiments
can help us make good decisions.
Example 14:
Mr. Green created a frequency table to collect data about his students and how their study habits
related to performance in his class. The table is shown below.
Studied Did not Study Totals
Passed 16 6 22
Failed 2 12 14
Totals 18 18 36
What is the probability that a student who studies will pass the class?
What is the probability that a student that does not study will pass his class?
Based off of these probabilities, if you want to pass the class should you study or not?
Find (studied | passed)P and (didnot study | passed)P .
number of students that studiedand passed 16(studied | passed) 0.8
totalnumber of students that studied 18P
number of students that did not studyand passed 6(did not study | passed) .3
totalnumber of students that studied 18P
There is a higher probability that a student will pass the class if they study
Example 15:
A teacher is conducting an action research project to determine the effectiveness of an
instructional strategy. The new instructional strategy was used with two class periods of 45
students each, and the traditional teaching method was used with 2 class periods of 45 students
each. Students were given a pre- and a post-exam to determine whether or not they improved
after the instruction. The results are shown in the table below.
Improved
Did not
Improve Total
Received the new
strategy
78 12 90
Received the traditional
method
35 55 90
Totals 123 67 180
Jordan School District Page 237 Secondary Mathematics 2
What is the probability that a student improved given that he was instructed with the new
strategy?
What is the probability that a student received the traditional method of instruction given that he
did not improve?
If the teacher decided that the new instructional strategy was more effective than the traditional
method of teaching, did she make a good decision?
Find (improved | new)P and (traditional | no improvement)P .
number of students that improved with the new stratgy 78(improved | new) 0.86
totalnumber of students with new strategy 90P
number of students that did not improve with traditional(traditional | no improvement)
totalnumber of students that did not improve
55(traditional | no improvement) .821
67
P
P
There is a higher probability that a student will improve from the pre- to the post-exam if the
new instructional strategy is used.
Practice Exercises F
The table below shows the number of students at a certain high school who took an ACT
preparatory class before taking the ACT exam and the number of students whose scores were at
or above the minimum requirement for college entrance.
Prep Class
No Prep
Class Totals
At or above minimum
requirement 268 210 478
Below minimum
requirement 57 115 172
Totals 325 325 650
1. What is the probability that a student scored at or above the minimum requirement for
college entrance given that he or she took the ACT preparatory class?
2. What is the probability that a student scored below the minimum requirement given that he
or she did not take the ACT preparatory class?
3. A student decides not to take the preparatory class before taking the ACT exam. Is this a
good decision? Explain your answer.
Jordan School District Page 238 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5
Similarity, Right
Triangle Trigonometry,
and Proof
Jordan School District Page 239 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 1 (G.SRT.1, G.SRT.2, G.SRT.3)
Understand Similarity in terms of similarity transformations
Cluster 1: Understanding similarity in terms of transformations
5.1.1: Dilation with a center and scale factor, with a parallel line and a line segment
5.1.2: Transformations with similarity using equality of corresponding angles and
proportionality of corresponding sides
5.1.3: Establish criterion of AA using similarity transformations
VOCABULARY
A dilation is a transformation that produces an image that is the same shape as the original
figure but the image is a different size. The dilation uses a center and a scale factor to create a
proportional figure.
The center of dilation is a fixed point in the plane about which all points are expanded or
contracted.
The scale factor is the ratio of the new image to the original image (i.e. if the original figure has
a length of 2 and the new figure has a length of 4, the scale factor is 4
22 .)
' ' 'A B C (the image) is a dilation of ABC
(the pre-image) with a scale factor of 3.
The origin, point O, is the center of dilation.
1,0
1, 2
5, 2
A
B
C
' 3,0
' 3,6
' 15,6
A
B
C
The ratio of the lengths from the center of
dilation to each coordinate is equal to the scale
factor.
' ' '
3OA OB OC
OA OB OC
Jordan School District Page 240 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 1: Center at the origin
Dilate the triangle with vertices (0,0)A , (4,0)B and (4,3)C by a scale factor of 2 and center at
(0,0) .
Draw the triangle and label its vertices.
' ' will be twice as long as .A B AB Since the center of the
dilation is at (0,0) , 'A is mapped to (0,0) while 'B is
mapped to (8,0) . This makes ' ' 8A B which is twice the
length of AB . Similarly, ' 'A C will be twice as long as
AC , mapping 'C to (8,6) . ' 'B C will be twice as long as
BC .
Example 2: Center at the origin
Dilate the triangle with vertices (1,1)A , (4,1)B and (4,4)C by a scale factor of 3 and center at
(0,0) .
Draw the triangle and label its vertices.
A B
C
A B
C
'C
'B
A B
C
Jordan School District Page 241 Secondary Mathematics 2
' 'A B will be three times as long as AB . Since the center of
the dilation is at (0,0) , 'A is mapped to (3,3) while 'B is
mapped to (12,3) . This makes ' ' 9A B which is three
times the length of AB . Similarly, ' 'A C will be three
times as long as AC , mapping 'C to (12,12) . ' 'B C will
be three times as long as BC .
Dilations can be performed on other shapes besides triangles. The shapes can be in any of the
four quadrants or even in more than one quadrant. The dilation can also shrink the original shape
instead of enlarging it.
Example 3: Center at the origin
Dilate a parallelogram with vertices ( 4,4)A , (6,6)B , (6, 2)C and ( 4, 4)D by a scale factor
of 1
2 and center at (0,0) .
Draw the parallelogram and label its vertices.
Coordinates of Vertices
4,4 ' 2,2A A
6,6 ' 3,3B B
6, 2 ' 3, 1C C
4, 4 ' 2, 2D D
Measure of Side Lengths
2 26, ' ' 26AB A B
2 26, ' ' 26CD C D
8, ' ' 4AD A D
8, ' ' 4BC B C
AB
C
'C
'B'A
AB
C
'C
'B'A
'D
D
A
B
C
D
Jordan School District Page 242 Secondary Mathematics 2
If the center of the dilation is not at the origin, then you will want to use graph paper and rulers
or dynamic geometry software such as: Geogebra or Geometer’s Sketchpad. Geogebra is a free
download and can be found at http://www.geogebra.org/cms/.
Example 4: Center not at the origin
Dilate the triangle with vertices ( 1,1)A , ( 4,4)B and ( 5,1)C by a scale factor of 2 and center
at ( 1,1) .
Coordinates of Vertices
1,1 ' 1,1A A
4,4 ' 7,7B B
5,1 ' 9,1C C
Measure of Side Lengths
3 2, ' ' 6 2AB A B
4, ' ' 8AC A C
10, ' ' 2 10CB C B
Example 5: Center not at the origin
Dilate the square with vertices ( 1,1)A , ( 4,1)B , ( 4,4)C and ( 1,4)D by a scale factor of 2
and center at ( 4,4) .
Coordinates of Vertices
1,1 ' 2, 2A A
4,1 ' 4, 2B B
4,4 ' 4,4C C
1,4 ' 2,4C C
Measure of Side Lengths
3, ' ' 6AB A B
3 ' ' 6AD A D
3, ' ' 6BC B C
3, ' ' 6CD C D
'C
'B
'A
B
C
B
C D
A
'B 'A
'D
Jordan School District Page 243 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Draw the dilation image of each figure with given center and scale factor.
1. Center 0,0 ; scale factor 3
2. Center 0,0 ; scale factor 2
3. Center 0,0 ; scale factor 12
4. Center 4, 1 ; scale factor
2
5. Center 3,4 ; scale factor 3
6. Center 2, 5 ; scale factor
2
7. Graph the pre-image with given vertices.
2,4J , 4,4K , and 3,2P . Then
graph the image with center of dilation at
the origin and a scale factor of 2.
8. Graph the pre-image with given vertices.
2,4J , 4,4K , and 3,2P . Then
graph the image with center of dilation at
the origin and a scale factor of 12.
Determine whether each statement is true or false.
9. A dilation with a scale factor greater than
1 will shrink the image.
10. For a dilation, corresponding angles of
the image and pre-image are congruent.
11. A dilation image cannot have any points
in common with its pre-image.
12. A dilation preserves length.
Jordan School District Page 244 Secondary Mathematics 2
Similarity
VOCABULARY
Two figures are similar if and only if there is a dilation that maps one figure onto the other. In
the new figure, corresponding angles are congruent and corresponding sides are proportional to
the original figure. You can denote that two figures are similar by using the symbol . For
example, ABC DEF .
Optional Exploration Activity
Is it sufficient to know that two angles are congruent to two corresponding angles in another
triangle in order to conclude that the two triangles are similar?
Step 1: Using graph paper, dynamic geometry software or patty paper, have students construct
any triangle and label its vertices.
Step 2: Construct a second triangle with two angles that measure the same as two angles in the
first triangle.
Step 3: Measure the lengths of the sides of both triangles and compare the ratios of the
corresponding sides.
Step 4: Compare your results to those of other students.
Example 1: State if the triangles in each pair are similar. If so, state how you know they are
similar and create the similarity statement.
Since VUT LKJ , VTU LJK , and
the angles of a triangle add to 180 , the third
set of angles must also be congruent. The
angles are congruent which forces the
corresponding sides to be proportional.
TUV JKL because the corresponding angles are congruent.
LK
J
T
V
U
55
45
55 45
Jordan School District Page 245 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2: State if the triangles in each pair are similar. If so, state how you know they are
similar and create the similarity statement.
Find the sets of corresponding sides and show
that they have the same ratio of proportionality.
AC looks similar to HF , 84
614
AC
HF
BC looks similar to GF , 48
68
BC
GF
AB looks similar to HG , 72
612
AB
HG
ABC HGF because the sets of corresponding sides are proportional which will force the
angles to be congruent. This is SSS similarity.
Example 3: State if the triangles in each pair are similar. If so, state how you know they are
similar and create the similarity statement.
DE ST , therefore D T because
alternate interior angles are congruent.
EUD SUT because they are vertical
angles.
By AA similarity SUT EUD .
You can also show that the corresponding sides
are proportional.
SU looks similar to EU , 32
216
SU
EU
TU looks similar to DU , 24
212
TU
EU
SUT EUD because the sets of corresponding sides are proportional and the included
angle is congruent. This is called SAS similarity.
C B
A
H
G F
14
8
12
72
84
48
Jordan School District Page 246 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Are the following triangles similar? If so, write a similarity statement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Jordan School District Page 247 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
Identify the similar triangles and write a similarity statement. Then find the value for x and the
measure of the indicated sides.
1. ML and LK
2. MN and MJ
3. KM and OP
4. JK and JL
Jordan School District Page 248 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 2 (G.CO.9)
Prove Theorems about Lines and Angles
Cluster 2: Prove Geometric Theorems
5.2.1 Prove theorems about lines and angles: vertical angles, alternate interior
angles, corresponding angles, points on a perpendicular bisector of a segment
VOCABULARY
Two nonadjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines
are called vertical angles or opposite angles. For example,
AEB and DEC are vertical angles.
A line that intersects two or more lines in a plane at
different points is called a transversal. Transversal p
intersects lines q and r.
When two parallel lines are intersected by a transversal,
angles that are in the same position at each intersection are
called corresponding angles. For example, 1 and 5 ,
2 and 6 , 3 and 7 , 4 and 8 are all corresponding
angles.
When two parallel lines are intersected by a transversal,
angles that are inside of the two parallel lines, but on
opposite sides of the transversal are called alternate
interior angles. For example, 3 and 5 , and 4 and
6 are both alternate interior angles.
A segment, line, or ray perpendicular to a given segment
that cuts the segment into two congruent parts is called a
perpendicular bisector. For example, CD is the
perpendicular bisector of AB .
Jordan School District Page 249 Secondary Mathematics 2
Theorems and Postulates
This unit of the core requires students to create proofs, formal or informal, to prove the following
theorems and postulates. Example proofs will be provided; however, teachers will probably do
tasks with students to complete these proofs in class.
Vertical Angle Theorem: If two angles are vertical angles, then they are congruent.
Corresponding Angle Postulate: If two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, then each pair of
corresponding angles is congruent.
Alternate Interior Angle Theorem: If two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, then each pair
of alternate interior angles is congruent.
Perpendicular Bisector Theorem: Any point on the perpendicular bisector of a segment is
equidistant from the endpoints of the segment.
Example 1: Proof of the Vertical Angle Theorem
Given: ABC and EBD are vertical angles.
Prove: ABC EBD
ABC and CBD are vertical angles. Given.
ABC is supplementary to CBD and
EBD is supplementary to CBD .
ABC and CBD form a straight angle.
EBD and CBD form a straight angle.
180m ABC m CBD
180m EBD m CBD Definition of supplementary angles.
180m ABC m CBD 180m EBD m CBD
Subtraction property of equality.
m ABC m EBD Transitive property.
Jordan School District Page 250 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2: Proof of Corresponding Angle Postulate
Given: ||q r , 1 and 5 are corresponding angles
Prove: 1 5
We know that angle 4 is supplementary to angle 1 from the straight angle theorem. 5 and
4 are also supplementary, because they are interior angles on the same side of transversal p
(same side interior angles theorem).
Therefore, since 4 180 1 180 5m m m , we know that 1 5m m which means that
1 5 . This can be proven for every pair of corresponding angles in the same way.
Example 3: Proof of Alternate Interior Angle Theorem
Given: q r
Prove: 3 7
1 3 and 5 7 because they are vertical angles.
If q r then 1 5 and 3 7 because they are
corresponding angles.
Therefore, using the transitive property, 3 7 .
A similar argument can be given to show 4 6 .
Jordan School District Page 251 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Use the figure below for problems 1–2.
1. Identify the pairs of angles that are vertical angles, corresponding angles, and alternate
interior angles.
Vertical Angles Corresponding Angles Alternate Interior Angles
2. Given 1 72 ,m find the measure of the remaining angles.
2m 3m 4m 5m
6m 7m 8m
Use the figure below for problems 3–4.
3. Identify the pairs of angles that are vertical angles, corresponding angles, and alternate
interior angles.
Vertical Angles Corresponding Angles Alternate Interior Angles
Jordan School District Page 252 Secondary Mathematics 2
4. Given 5 110m and 17 95 ,m find the measure of the remaining angles.
1m 2m 3m 4m 6m
7m 8m 9m 10m 11m
12m 13m 14m 15m 16m
Use the figure at the right for questions 5–7.
5. Given: ||l m prove that 2 7 .
6. Given: ||l m prove that 3 5 180m m .
7. Given: ||l m prove that 2 8 180m m .
Example: Proof of the Perpendicular Bisector Theorem
Given: CD is the perpendicular bisector of AB
Prove: AC BC
Because CD is the perpendicular bisector of AB , AE BE . CEA CEB because they are
both right angles. CE is congruent to itself because of the reflexive property. This means that
CEA CEB using SAS. Since the triangles are congruent, all of their corresponding parts
must be congruent. Therefore, AC BC .
Jordan School District Page 253 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
1. CD is the perpendicular bisector of AB . Solve for x.
2. Lines l, m, and n are perpendicular bisectors of
PQR and meet at T. If 2TQ x ,
3 1PT y , and 8TR , find x, y, and z.
3. Given that PA PB and PM AB at M, prove that
PM is the perpendicular bisector of AB .
4. Given that BD is the perpendicular bisector of ,AC
prove that ABD CBD .
Jordan School District Page 254 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 2 (G.CO.10)
Prove Theorems about Triangles
Cluster 2: Prove Geometric Theorems
5.2.2 Prove theorems about triangles: sum of interior angles, base angles of
isosceles triangles, segment joining midpoints of two sides is parallel to third
side and half the length, and medians meet at a point
VOCABULARY
The angles inside of a triangle are called interior angles.
A triangle with at least two congruent sides is called an
isosceles triangle. In an isosceles triangle, the angles that
are opposite the congruent sides are called base angles.
A point that is halfway between the endpoints of a segment
is called the midpoint. Point C is the midpoint of AB .
A segment whose endpoints are the midpoints of two sides
of a triangle is called the midsegement of a tiangle.
The line connecting midpoints to the opposite vertex of a
triangle is called the median. Point S is the midpoint of
AC . Point Q is the midpoint of BC . Point R is the
midpoint of AB .
The point where all three medians of a triangle intersect is
called a centroid. Point T is the centroid of ABC .
Jordan School District Page 255 Secondary Mathematics 2
Theorems
This unit of the core requires students to create proofs, formal or informal, to prove the following
theorems. Example proofs will be provided; however, teachers will probably do tasks with
students to complete these proofs in class.
Angle Sum Theorem: The sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle is 180 .
Isosceles Triangle Theorem: If two sides of a triangle are congruent, then the angles opposite
those sides are congruent.
Triangle Midsegment Theorem: A midsegment of a triangle is parallel to one side of the
triangle, and its length is one-half the length of that side.
Theorem: The medians of a triangle meet at a point.
Example 1: Proof of the Angle Sum Theorem
Given: ABC
Prove: 2 180m C m m B
Draw XY through A so it is parallel to CB . Because 1 and CAY form a linear pair they are
supplementary, so 1 180m m CAY . 2 and 3 form CAY , so 2 3 .m m m CAY
Using substitution, 1 2 3 180m m m . Because you drew XY parallel to CB , we know
1 C and 3 B since they are alternate interior angles. Because the angles are
congruent, their measures are equal. Therefore, using substitution again, we know
2 180m C m m B .
Jordan School District Page 256 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2: Proof of the Isosceles Triangle Theorem
Given: ,PQR PQ RQ
Prove: P R
Let S be the midpoint of PR . Draw SQ . Since S is the midpoint, PS RS . QS is congruent
to itself. Since were were given that PQ RQ , we know that all 3 corresponding pairs of sides
are congruent and we can say PQS RQS because of SSS congruency. Therefore, P R
since they are corresponding angles of congruent triangles.
Example 3: Proof of the Triangle Midsegment Theorem
Given: Points D, E, and F are the midpoints of the sides
of the triangle.
Prove: ||DE AC and 2
ACDE
Statement
1. D and E are midpoints
2. 1
2DB AB ,
1
2BE BC
3. ~BDE BAC
4. ||DE AC
5. 2
ACDE
Reason
1. Given
2. By definition of a midpoints
3. B is the center of dilation and scale
factor is ½
4. Dilations take lines to parallel lines
5. Scale factor is ½
Jordan School District Page 257 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 4:
ABC has vertices A(-4, 1), B(8, -1), and C(-2, 9). DE is a midsegment of ABC .
A. Find the coordinates of D and E.
B. Verify that AC is parallel to DE .
C. Verify that 1
2DE AC .
Answers:
A.
2 8 9 ( 1) 6 8, , 3,4
2 2 2 2D D D
4 8 1 ( 1) 4 0, , 2,0
2 2 2 2E E E
Use the Midpoint Formula to find the
midpoints of AB and CB .
B.
slope of AC = 9 1 8
42 ( 4) 2
slope of DE = 4 0 4
43 2 1
If the slopes of AC and DE are equal,
||AC DE .
Because the slopes of AC and DE are equal, ||AC DE .
C. 2 2 2 2( 2 ( 4)) (9 1) (2) (8) 4 64 68AC
2 2 2 2
3 2 4 0 1 4 1 16 17DE
First, use the distance formula
to find AC and DE.
17 17 1 1
68 4 268
DE
AC
Now show 1
2DE AC
Because 1
2
DE
AC ,
1
2DE AC .
Jordan School District Page 258 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 5: The medians of a triangle meet at a point.
Given a triangle with vertices at 0,1A , 6,1B , and 4,5C , prove that the medians meet at a
single point.
Draw the triangle and label its vertices.
0 6 1 1 6 2
, , 3,12 2 2 2
D
0 4 1 5 4 6
, , 2,32 2 2 2
E
6 4 1 5 10 6
, , 5,32 2 2 2
F
Find the midpoint of AB and label it D.
Find the midpoint of AC and label it E.
Find the midpoint of CB and label it F.
3 1 2 1
2 6 4 2EBm
12
3 2y x
1 5 44
3 4 1DCm
1 4 3y x
3 1 2
5 0 5FAm
25
3 5y x
Write an equation for EB , DC , and FA .
0,1A 6,1B
4,5C
4,5C
6,1B 0,1A
5,3F
3,1D
2,3E
Jordan School District Page 259 Secondary Mathematics 2
12
12
3 2
4
y x
y x
and
1 4 3
4 11
y x
y x
12
4 4 11
4.5 15
10
3
x x
x
x
1 104
2 3
54
3
7
3
y
y
y
Using two of the equations, try to solve the
system.
25
3 5
7 2 103 5
3 5 3
2 2 5
3 5 3
2 2
3 3
y x
See if the solution10 7
,3 3
works in the third
equation.
All three medians of a triangle intersect in a single point.
Jordan School District Page 260 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
1. A base angle in an isosceles triangle measures 37°. Draw and label the triangle. What is the
measure of the vertex angle?
Find the missing angle measures.
2.
3.
4.
Find the value of x.
5.
6.
Jordan School District Page 261 Secondary Mathematics 2
7. Find the values of both x and y
8. Can the given measurements be accurate? Why or why not?
9. Find the length of DE given that D and E are midpoints.
10. Find the length of FG given that IJ is a midsegment of the triangle.
Jordan School District Page 262 Secondary Mathematics 2
11. Solve for x given NO is a midsegment of the triangle.
12. ABC has vertices 2,6A , 4,0B , and 10,0C . DE is a midsegment with D being
the midpoint of of AB and E being the midpoint of AC .
a. Find the coordinates of D and E.
b. Verify that BC is parallel to DE .
c. Verify that 1
2DE BC .
13. ABC has vertices at 5, 4A , 0,4B , and 13, 4C .
a. Find the coordinates of D, E, and F, the midpoints of AB , AC , and BC .
b. Find the equations for two of the medians. Use a system of equations to find the location
of the centroid (the point where the medians intersect).
A
B
C
D E
F
Jordan School District Page 263 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 2 (G.CO.11)
Prove Geometric Theorems about Parallelograms
Cluster 2: Prove Geometric Theorems
5.2.3 Prove theorems about parallelograms: opposite sides are congruent, opposite
angles are congruent, the diagonals bisect each other, and rectangles are
parallelograms with congruent diagonals.
VOCABULARY
A polygon with four sides is called a quadrilateral.
A quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides is called a
parallelogram.
A segment that connects two nonconsecutive vertices is
called a diagonal.
A parallelogram with four right angles is called a
rectangle.
Jordan School District Page 264 Secondary Mathematics 2
Theorems
This unit of the core requires students to create proofs, formal or informal, to prove the following
theorems. Example proofs will be provided; however, teachers will probably do tasks with
students to complete these proofs in class.
If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its opposite sides are congruent.
If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its opposite angles are congruent.
If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its diagonals bisect each other.
If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, then the quadrilateral is a
parallelogram.
If the diagonals of a parallelogram are congruent, then the parallelogram is a rectangle.
Exmaple 1: If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its opposite sides are congruent.
Given: QUAD is a parallelogram
Prove: QU AD and DQ UA
Statements Reasons
1. QUAD is a parallelogram. 1. Given.
2. ||QU AD and ||DQ UA 2. Definition of parallelogram.
3. 1 3 and 2 4 3. Alternate interior angles are congruent.
4. QA QA 4. Reflexive property.
5. QUA ADQ 5. ASA congruence.
6. QU AD and DQ UA 6. Corresponding parts of congruent
triangles are congruent (CPCTC).
Jordan School District Page 265 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2: If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its opposite angles are congruent.
Given: ABCD is a parallelogram
Prove: A C and B D
Since ABCD is a parallelogram, the opposite sides must be parallel.
Draw BD as a diagonal of the parallelogram. We know AD BC and AB CD because
opposite sides of a parallelogram are congruent. BD is congruent to itself. This creates two
congruent triangles by SSS: ABD CDB . Because the triangles are congruent, the
corresponding parts will be congruent. Therefore, A C . The same logic can be used using
AC as the diagonal to show B D .
Example 3: If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its diagonals bisect each other.
Given: ACDE is a parallelogram
Prove: AB BD and EB BC
It is given that ACDE is a parallelogram. Since opposite sides of a parallelogram are congruent,
EA DC . By definition of a parallelogram, ||EA DC . AEB DCB and EAB CDB
because alternate interior angles are congruent. EBA CBD by ASA. Since the triangles are
congruent, their corresponding parts are also congruent. Therefore, AB BD and EB BC .
The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.
Jordan School District Page 266 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 4: If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, then the quadrilateral is a
parallelogram.
Given: AC and BD bisect each other at E.
Prove: ABCD is a parallelogram
AC and BD bisect each other at E.
Given
ABCD is a parallelogram.
Definition of parallelogram.
AE EC
BE ED Definition of a segment bisector
AEB CED
Vertical Angles
BEC DEA
Vertical Angles
BEA DEC
SAS AED CEB
SAS
BAE DCE
Corresponding parts of congruent
triangles are congruent (CPCTC).
ECB EAD
Corresponding parts of congruent
triangles are congruent (CPCTC).
AB CD
If alternate interior angles are
congruent, then lines are
BC AD
If alternate interior angles are
congruent, then lines are
Jordan School District Page 267 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 5: If the diagonals of a parallelogram are congruent, then the parallelogram is a
rectangle.
Given: WXYZ is a parallelogram with WY XZ
Prove: WXYZ is a rectangle
Statements Reasons
1. WY XZ 1. Given.
2. XY ZW 2. Definition of a parallelogram.
3. WX XW 3. Segment congruent to itself (reflexive
property).
4. WZX XYW 4. SSS congruence.
5. ZWX YXW 5. Corresponding parts of congruent
triangles are congruent.
6. m ZWX m YXW 6. Definition of congruent.
7. 180m ZWX m WXZ m XZW 7. Triangle sum theorem.
8. XZW ZXY 8. Alternate interior angles are congruent.
9. m XZW m ZXY 9. Definition of congruent.
10. 180m ZWX m WXZ m ZXY 10. Substitution.
11. m WXZ m ZXY m YXW 11. Angle addition postulate.
12. 180m ZWX m YXW 12. Substitution.
13. ZWX and YXW are right angles 13. If two angles are congruent and
supplementary, each angle is a right
angle.
14. WZY and XYZ are right angles 14. Opposite angles of a parallelogram are
congruent.
15. WXYZ is a rectangle 15. Definition of a rectangle.
Jordan School District Page 268 Secondary Mathematics 2
M
L
J
K
Practice Exercises A
1. Complete the flow proof by filling in the blanks for the theorem: If a quadrilateral is a
parallelogram, then its opposite angles are congruent.
Given: JKLM is a parallelogram
Prove: and J L K M
is a parallelogramJKLM
a._____________
and K are consecutive s.
Def. of consecutive s
J
and are consecutive s.
.________________________
K L
b
.___________________
Def. of consecutive s
c
.______________________
Consecutive s are supplementary
d
and are supplementary
Consecutive s are supplementary
K L
and are supplementary
Consecutive s are supplementary
L M
._______________
Supplements of the
same are
e
.___________________
__________________
K M
f
2. Complete the two column proof by filling in the blanks for the theorem: If a parallelogram is a
rectangle, then its diagonals are congruent.
Given: ABCD is a rectangle
Prove: AC BD
Statements Reasons
1. ABCD is a rectangle 1. a. ______________________
2. is a ABCD 2. b. ______________________
3. BC CB 3. c.______________________
4. and DCB are right s.ABC 4. d.______________________
5. ABC DCB 5. e.________________________
6. f. _______________________ 6. Opposite sides of a parallelogram are
congruent.
7. g.________________________ 7. SAS
8. AC BD 8. h._________________________
Jordan School District Page 269 Secondary Mathematics 2
3. Find the values(s) of the variables(s) in each parallelogram.
a.
b.
c.
4. For what values of a and b must EFGH be a parallelogram?
a.
b.
c.
5. QRST is a rectangle. Find the value of x and the length of each diagonal.
a. and 2 - 4QS x RT x b. 7 2 and 4 3QS x RT x c. 5 8 and 2 1QS x RT x
6. Is the given information enough to prove that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram? Explain
why or why not.
a.
b.
c.
Jordan School District Page 270 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 3 (G.SRT.4, G.SRT.5)
Prove Theorems Involving Similarity
Cluster 3: Prove theorems involving similarity
5.3.1 Prove theorems about triangles: a line parallel to one side divides the other 2
proportionally, the Pythagorean Theorem
5.3.2 Use congruence and similarity criteria to solve problems and prove relationships
Theorems
This unit of the core requires students to create proofs, formal or informal, to prove the following
theorems. Example proofs will be provided; however, teachers will probably do tasks with
students to complete these proofs in class.
Triangle Proportionality Theorem: If a line is parallel to one side of a triangle, then it divides
the other two sides proportionally.
Converse of the Triangle Proportionality Theorem: If a line intersects two sides of a triangle
proportionally, then that line is parallel to one side of the triangle.
Pythagorean Theorem: If a triangle is a right triangle with hypotenuse c, then 2 2 2a b c .
Proof of the Triangle Proportionality Theorem: A line parallel to one side of a triangle
divides the other two sides proportionally.
Given: BD || AE
Prove: BA DE
=CB CD
Since , 3 1 and 4 2BD AE because they are corresponding angles. Then by AA
Similarity, ACE BCD . By definition of similar polygons, CA CE
CB CD . From the Segment
Addition Postulate, and CA BA CB CE DE CD . Substituting for CA and CE in the ratio,
we get the following proportion.
Jordan School District Page 271 Secondary Mathematics 2
1 1
BA CB DE CD
CB CD
CB BA CD DE
CB CB CD CD
BA DE
CB CD
BA DE
CB CD
Proof of the Converse of the Triangle Proportionality Theorem: If a line intersects two sides
of a triangle proportionally, then that line is parallel to one side of the triangle.
Given: BA DE
= CB CD
Prove: BD || AE
Statements Reasons
1. BA DE
= CB CD
1. Given.
2.
BA DE1 + = 1 +
CB CD 2. Addition property of equality.
3. CB BA CD DE
+ = + CB CB CD CD
3. Substitution for 1.
4. CB + BA CD + DE
= CB CD
4. Common denominator.
5. CA = CB + BA and CE = CD + DE 5. Segment addition postulate.
6. CA CE
= CB CD
6. Substitution; sides are proportional.
7. C C 7. Reflexive property of congruence.
8. ACE ~ BCD 8. SAS Similarity.
9. CBD CAB 9. By definition of similar triangles.
10. BD || AE 10. CBD and CAB are corresponding
angles. Since they are congruent, the
segments BD and AE are parallel.
Rewrite as a sum.
1 and 1CB CD
CB CD
Subtract 1 from each side
Jordan School District Page 272 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Solve for x and y given ~ABC AED .
1.
2.
Solve for x.
3.
4.
5. In HKM , HM = 15, HN = 10, and HJ is twice the
length of JK . Determine whether ||NJ MK .
Explain.
6. Find TO, SP, OR, and RP.
Jordan School District Page 273 Secondary Mathematics 2
Proof of the Pythagorean Theorem: If a triangle is a right triangle with hypotenuse c, then 2 2 2a b c .
Given: ABC is a right triangle with hypotenuse c
Prove: 2 2 2a b c
Draw CD so it is perpendicular to AB . This creates three right triangles, ABC , ACD , and
CBD . All three of these triangles are similar by AA similarity. ~ABC CBD because they
both have a right angle and they have B in common. ~ABC ACD because they both have
a right angle and they have A in common. ~ACD CBD because they are both similar to
ABC .
Since we know the triangles are similar, we also know the ratios of the sides are all the same.
Start with ABC and CBD .
2BC BD a da cd
AB CB c a
Now use the same logic with ABC and ACD .
2AC AD b eb ce
AB AC c b
Next, add the two equations together and factor out c.
2 2a b cd ce
2 2 ( )a b c d e
Looking at the original picture we see d e c , so we can substitute.
2 2
2 2 2
( )a b c c
a b c
Therefore, given a right triangle with hypotenuse c, 2 2 2a b c .
Jordan School District Page 274 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Solve for x.
1. 2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
3 3
x
x
915
x
25
65 x
4
9
5
9
x16
33
x
11
28
Jordan School District Page 275 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 4 (G.GPE.6)
Coordinte Proofs
Cluster 4: Use coordinates to prove simple geometric theorems algebraically.
5.4.1 Find the point on a directed line segment between two given points that partitions
that segment in a given ratio
Concept For any segment with endpoints A and B, a point C between A and B will partition the segment
into a given ratio.
Example 1: Horizontal Line Segment
Find the coordinates of C so that the ratio 4AC
CB .
Answer:
, ,2C x y C x Because AB is a horizontal line, the y-coordinate of C
must be 2.
3 ( 7) 10 10 Find the horizontal distance from point A to point B.
AC AB CB
Use the segment addition postulate AC CB AB and
solve for AC.
4AB CB
CB
Substitute AC AB CB into 4.
AC
CB
4
5
AB CB CB
AB CB
Multiply each side by CB.
Add CB to each side.
10 5
2
CB
CB
Since 10AB , substitute 10 in for AB and solve for CB.
, 1,2C x y C Since 2CB , the x-coordinate of the point C must be
3 2 1 .
Jordan School District Page 276 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2: Vertical Line Segment
Find the coordinates of C so that the ratio 2
5
AC
CB .
Answer:
, 3,C x y C y Because AB is a vertical line, the x-coordinate of C must
be 3.
5 2 7 7 Find the vertical distance from point A to point B.
AC AB CB
Use the segment addition postulate AC CB AB and
solve for AC.
2
5
AB CB
CB
Substitute AC AB CB into
2.
5
AC
CB
2
5
5 2
5 5 2
5 7
AB CB CB
AB CB CB
AB CB CB
AB CB
Multiply each side by CB.
Multiply each side by 5 and simplify.
Add 5CB to each side.
5 7 7
35 7
5
CB
CB
CB
Since 7AB , substitute 7 in for AB and solve for CB.
, 3,0C x y C Since 5CB , the y-coordinate of the point C must be
5 5 0 .
Jordan School District Page 277 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 3: Positive Slope Line Segment
Find the coordinates of C such that 2
3
AC
CB
Answer:
2 2
2 2
4 2 7 1
6 8
36 64
100
10
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
Find the length of AB using the distance formula.
AC AB CB Use the segment addition postulate AC CB AB and
solve for AC.
2
3
AB CB
CB
Substitute AC AB CB into
2.
3
AC
CB
2
3
3 2
3 3 2
AB CB CB
AB CB CB
AB CB CB
Multiply each side by CB.
Multiply each side by 3 then simplify.
3 5
3(10) 5
30 5
6
AB CB
CB
CB
CB
Add 3CB to each side.
Since 10AB , substitute 10 in for AB and solve for CB.
6 10
4
AC CB AB
AC
AC
We can find AC by using the segment addition postulate
and substituting in the known values.
Jordan School District Page 278 Secondary Mathematics 2
To find the coordinates of point C, you will
need to draw a right triangle with AB as the
hypotenuse. Then draw a line from point C
perpendicular to each leg of the right triangle.
The two small triangles created within the
larger triangle are similar to each other and the
larger triangle by AA similarity. Therefore the
ratio of their sides is equal.
4
10 6
10 24
2.4
AC AF
AB AD
AF
AF
AF
You need the coordinates of point F to find the x-coordinate
of point C. Use the ratios to find AF.
2 2.4, 1 (0.4, 1)F Point F will have the same y-coordinate as point A. The x-
coordinate will be the same as A plus 2.4 because AF is 2.4.
4
10 8
10 32
3.2
AC DE
AB BD
DE
DE
DE
You need the coordinates of point E to find the y-coordinate
of point C. Use the ratios to find DE.
4, 1 3.2 (4,2.2)E
Point E will have the same x-coordinate as point D. The y-
coordinate will be the same as D plus 3.2 because DE is 3.2.
0.4,2.2C The x-coordinate of F is 0.4 and the y-coordinate of E is 2.2.
Jordan School District Page 279 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 4: Negative Slope Line Segment
Find the coordinates of C such that 7
6
AC
CB
Answer:
22
2 2
7 5 4 1
12 5
144 25
169
13
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
Find the length of AB using the distance formula.
AC AB CB Use the segment addition postulate AC CB AB and
solve for AC.
7
6
AB CB
CB
Substitute AC AB CB into
7.
6
AC
CB
7
6
6 7
6 6 7
AB CB CB
AB CB CB
AB CB CB
Multiply by each side by CB.
Multiply each side by 6 then simplify.
6 13
6(13) 13
78 13
6
AB CB
CB
CB
CB
Add 6CB to each side.
Since 13AB , substitute 13 in for AB and solve for CB.
6 13
7
AC CB AB
AC
AC
We can find AC by using the segment addition postulate
and substituting in the known values.
Jordan School District Page 280 Secondary Mathematics 2
To find the coordinates of point C,
you will need to draw a right
triangle with AB as the
hypotenuse. Then draw a line from
point C perpendicular to each leg of
the right triangle. The two small
triangles created within the larger
triangle are similar to each other
and the larger triangle by AA
similarity. Therefore the ratio of
their sides is equal.
7
13 5
13 35
352.69
13
AC AF
AB AD
AF
AF
AF
You need the coordinates of point F to find the y-
coordinate of point C. Use the ratios to find AF.
35 17
7,4 7, 7,1.3113 13
F
Point F will have the same x-coordinate as point
A. The y-coordinate will be the same as A minus 3513
because AF is 3513
.
7
13 12
13 84
846.46
13
AC DE
AB BD
DE
DE
DE
You need the coordinates of point E to find the x-
coordinate of point C. Use the ratios to find DE.
84 7
7 , 1 , 1 0.54, 113 13
E
Point E will have the same y-coordinate as point
D. The x-coordinate will be the same as D plus 8413
because DE is 8413
.
7 17
, 0.54,1.3113 13
C C
The x-coordinate of F is 7
13 and the y-coordinate
of E is 1713
.
Jordan School District Page 281 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
1. C is between A and B with A (3, -5) and B (3, 7). Find the coordinates of C such that
3AC
CB .
2. C is between A and B with 3, 1A and 6, 1B . Find the coordinates of C such that
5
4
AC
CB .
3. C is between A and B with 2, 4A and 2,4B . Find the coordinates of C such that
1
3
AC
CB .
4. C is between A and B with 2,5A and 6,5B . Find the coordinates of C such that
5
3
AC
CB .
5. C is between A and B with A (-5, -3) and B (3, 3). Find the coordinates of C such that
3
7
AC
CB .
Jordan School District Page 282 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 5 (G.SRT.6, G.SRT.7, G.SRT.8)
Right Triangle Trigonometry
Cluster 5: Defining trigonometric ratios and solving problems
5.5.1 Similarity of triangles leads to the trigonometric ratios of the acute angles.
5.5.2 Understand the relationship between the sine and cosine of complementary
angles.
5.5.3 Use trigonometric ratios and the Pythagorean Theorem to solve right triangles in
applied problems
Two figures that have congruent angles and proportional sides are similar. The requirements for
proving that two right triangles are similar are less than the requirements needed to prove non-
right triangles similar. It is already known that both triangles have one right angle. Therefore,
two right triangles are similar if one acute angle is congruent to one acute angle in the other right
triangle. In a right triangle, the ratio between the side lengths is a function of an acute angle ( 0
to 90 ). There are six distinct trigonometric ratios that are functions of an acute angle in a right
triangle. Right triangles that are similar will have the same trigonometric ratios.
VOCABULARY
The side opposite the right angle is the called the
hypotenuse.
The side that meets the hypotenuse to form the angle
is called the adjacent side.
The side that is opposite the angle is called the
opposite side.
Trigonometric Ratios
Let be an acute angle in the right ABC as shown in the figure above. Then,
sine opposite
sinhypotenuse
cosine adjacent
coshypotenuse
tangent opposite
tanadjacent
cosecant 1 hypotenuse
cscsin opposite
secant 1 hypotenuse
seccos adjacent
cotangent 1 adjacent
cottan opposite
Jordan School District Page 283 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example: Given the figure below, identify all six trigonometric ratios of the angle .
Answer:
The opposite side is 8. The adjacent side is 15. The hypotenuse is 17. Therefore,
8sin
17
15cos
17
8tan
15
817
1 1 17csc
sin 8
1517
1 1 17sec
cos 15
815
1 1 15cot
tan 8
Example: Given the figure below, identify all six trigonometric ratios of the angle .
Answer:
The opposite side is 12. The adjacent side is 5. The hypotenuse is not known. Use the
Pythagorean Theorem to find the missing hypotenuse and then calculate the six trigonometric
ratios.
2 2 2
2
2
5 12
25 144
169
13
c
c
c
c
The hypotenuse is 13.
Jordan School District Page 284 Secondary Mathematics 2
12sin
13
5cos
13
12tan
5
1213
1 1 13csc
sin 12
513
1 1 13sec
cos 5
125
1 1 5cot
tan 12
Practice Exercises A
Given the figures below, identify all six trigonometric ratios of the angle .
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use a calculator to find each value.
7. sin 9 8. cos 37 9. tan 48
10. cos 55 11. tan 72 12. sin 23
Angle in standard position
θ
Adjacent
Hypotenuse
Opposite
5
7
11
θ
Jordan School District Page 285 Secondary Mathematics 2
When solving equations, you use the inverse operation to find the value of the variable. In
trigonometry, you can find the measure of the angle by using the inverse of sine, cosine, or
tangent.
Equation Inverse Equation Meaning
sinx
y 1sin
x
y
The inverse, or arcsine, of
x
y is equal to the
angle .
cosx
y 1cos
x
y
The inverse, or arccosine, of
x
y is equal to the
angle .
tanx
y 1tan
x
y
The inverse, or arctangent, of
x
y is equal to
the angle .
Practice Exercises B
Use a calculator to find each value.
1. 1sin 0.5 2. 1cos 0.86
3. 1tan 6
4. 1tan 1 5. 1sin 0.75
6. 1cos 0.33
Given the figures below, find the measure of the angle .
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Angle in standard position
θ
Adjacent
Hypotenuse
Opposite
5
7
11
θ
Jordan School District Page 286 Secondary Mathematics 2
Relationship Between Complementary Angles (Cofunction Identities)
1 1
2 1
cos 90 sin
cos sin
4 4
5 5
1 1
2 1
sin 90 cos
sin cos
3 3
5 5
Practice Exercises C
Use the relationship of complementary angles to find the missing angle.
1. If 1
sin 302
, then 1
cos ____2
2. If cos 0 1 , then sin ____ 1
3. If cos 23 0.92 , then sin ____ 0.92 4. If sin 75 0.97 , then cos ____ 0.97
VOCABULARY
An angle of elevation is the angle made with the
ground and your line of sight to an object above
you.
An angle of depression is the angle from the
horizon and your line of sight to an object below
you.
1
2
2
1
Jordan School District Page 287 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 1:
You are standing 196 feet from the base of an office building in downtown Salt Lake City. The
angle of elevation to the top of the building is 65 . Find the height, h, of the building.
Draw a picture of the situation and label what
you know.
tan 65196
h
You know the adjacent side and want the
opposite side. Use the tangent ratio to help
you set up the problem.
tan 65196
h
196 tan 65 h
420.32 h
Solve for h.
The height of the building is approximately 420.32 feet high.
Example 2:
John is standing on the roof of a building that is 300 feet tall and sees Sarah standing on the
ground. If the angle of depression is 60 how far away is Sarah from John?
Draw a picture of the situation and label what
you know.
300
sin 60d
You know the opposite side and want the
hypotenuse. Use the sine ratio to help you set
up the problem.
Jordan School District Page 288 Secondary Mathematics 2
300
sin 60d
sin 60 300d
300
sin 60d
346.41d
Solve for d.
Sarah is approximately 346.41 feet away from John.
Practice Exercises D
Solve each problem.
1. The angle of depression from the top of a
lighthouse 150 feet above the surface of
the water to a boat is 13 . How far is the
boat from the lighthouse?
2. A guy wire connects the top of an antenna
to a point on the level ground 7 feet from
the base of the antenna. The angle of
elevation formed by this wire is 75 .
What are the length of the wire and the
height of the antenna?
3. A private jet is taking off from Telluride,
Colorado. The runway is 46,725 feet from
the base of the mountain. The plane needs
to clear the top of Mount Sneffels, which
is 14,150 feet high, by 100 feet. What
angle should the plane maintain during
takeoff?
4. A person is 75 feet from the base of a
barn. The angle of elevation from the
level ground to the top of the barn is 60 .
How tall is the barn?
5. From the top of a building 250 feet high, a
man observes a car moving toward him.
If the angle of depression of the car
changes from 18 to 37 , how far does
the car travel while the man is observing
it?
6. A rocket is launched from ground level.
A person standing 84 feet from the launch
site observes that the angle of elevation is
71 at the rocket’s highest point. How
high did the rocket reach?
7. A hot-air balloon is 700 feet above the
ground. The angle of depression from the
balloon to an observer is 5 . How far is
the observer from the hot-air balloon?
8. If a wheelchair access ramp has to have an
angle of elevation of no more than 4.8
and it has to rise 18 inches, how long must
the ramp be?
9. A kite has 25 feet of string. The wind is
blowing the kite to the west so that the
angle of elevation is 40 . How far has the
kite traveled horizontally?
10. A sledding run is 400 yards long with a
vertical drop of 40.2 yards. Find the angle
of depression of the run.
Jordan School District Page 289 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 5 Honors (N.CN.3, N.CN.4, N.CN.5 and N.CN.6)
Using Complex Numbers in Rectangular and Polar Form
H.5.1 Find moduli of complex numbers.
H.5.2 Represent complex numbers on the complex plane in rectangular and polar form
and explain why the rectangular and polar forms of a given complex number
represent the same number.
H.5.3 Represent addition, subtraction, multiplication, and conjugation of complex
number geometrically on the complex plane; use properties of this representation
for computation.
H.5.4 Calculate the distance between numbers in the complex plane as the modulus of
the difference
H.5.4 Calculate the midpoint of a segment as the average of the numbers at its
endpoints.
VOCABULARY
The complex plane is where the horizontal axis represents the
real component, a, and the vertical axis represents the imaginary
component, bi, of a complex number.
The rectangular form of a complex number, a bi , is written
as ,a b . Traditionally known as ,x y . To graph a point in
the complex plane, graph a units horizontally and b units
vertically.
The modulus (plural form is moduli) of a complex number is
defined by 2 2z a b and is the length, or magnitude, of the
vector in component form created by the complex number in the
complex plane.
Example 1:
Write the following complex numbers in rectangular form, then graph them on the complex
plane.
a. 3 2i
b. 4 5i
c. 2 i
d. 5 3i
Jordan School District Page 290 Secondary Mathematics 2
Answer:
a. 3 2 3, 2i
b. 4 5 4,5i
c. 2 2, 1i
d. 5 3 5,3i
The rectangular form of complex number
a bi is written as ,a b .
Since a is the real component it is graphed
horizontally. Similarly, bi is the complex
component and is graphed vertically.
a. 3 units right and 2 units down
b. 4 units right and 5 units up
c. 2 units left and 1 unit down
d. 5 units left and 3 units up
Example 2:
Find the modulus of 3 4z i .
3 4z i 3a and 4b
223 4z Modulus formula:
2 2z a b
9 16
25
5
z
z
z
Simplify.
Example 3:
Find the modulus of the complex number in rectangular form 3, 6 .
3, 6 3a and 6b
223 6z Modulus formula:
2 2z a b
9 36
45 6.71
z
z
Simplify.
Jordan School District Page 291 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Write the following complex numbers in rectangular form then graph them on the complex
plane.
1. 2 3i 2. 5 4i
3. 1 2i 4. 3 5i
5. 1 i 6. 5 6i
Find the moduli of the following complex numbers.
7. 5 12i 8. 5 4i 9. 1, 2 10. 8, 6
VOCABULARY
The polar form of a complex number, z a bi , is
represented by cos sinz r i (sometimes called
trigonometric form) where cosa r , sinb r , r is the
modulus, 2 2r z a b , of a complex number and is
an argument of z. An argument of a complex number,
z a bi , is the direction angle of the vector ,a b .
To find , when given a complex number z a bi , use
1tanb
a
.
To graph a complex number in polar form, plot a point r
units from the origin on the positive x-axis, then rotate the
point the measure of .
To convert from polar to rectangular form use the fact that cosa r and sinb r .
Jordan School District Page 292 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 4:
Write 3 3i in polar form then graph it.
Answer
3 3i 3a and 3b
2 23 3
9 9
18
3 2
z
z
z
z
Compute the modulus 2 2z a b .
1 3tan
3
45
Find . Make sure that your calculator is in
degrees.
3 2 cos45 sin 45i
Remember that a complex number in polar
form is cos sinz r i . The modulus is r
so 3 2r .
Plot the point 3 2 units from the origin on the
positive x-axis. Rotate it 45 .
Example 5:
Write 3,1 in polar form then graph it.
Answer:
3 i 3a and 1b
2
23 1
3 1
4
2
z
z
z
z
Compute the modulus 2 2z a b .
1 1tan
3
30
Find . Make sure that your calculator is in
degrees.
Jordan School District Page 293 Secondary Mathematics 2
30 180 150
The calculator only returns values between
90 and 90 . In order to get the correct
angle, so that the point is in quadrant II, add
180 to the angle. (If the point is in quadrant
III, you will also add 180 , but if it is in
quadrant IV, you will need to add 360 .)
2 cos150 sin150z i
Remember that a complex number in polar
form is cos sinz r i . The modulus is r
so 2r .
Plot the point 2 units from the origin on the
positive x-axis. Rotate the point from 150 the
positive x-axis.
Example 6:
Write 2 cos135 sin135i in rectangular form.
Answer:
2 cos135 sin135i 2r and 135
2 cos135 1a
2 sin135 1b
To convert from polar to rectangular form use
cosa r and sinb r . Make sure that
your calculator is in degree mode.
The rectangular form is 1,1 . Rectangular form is ,a b .
Example 7:
Write 3 cos210 sin 210i in rectangular form.
Answer:
3 cos210 sin 210i 3r and 210
3 33 cos 210 3 1.5
2 2a
1 33sin 210 3 0.866
2 2b
To convert from polar to rectangular form use
cosa r and sinb r . Make sure that
your calculator is in degree mode.
The rectangular form is 3 3
,2 2
. Rectangular form is ,x y .
Jordan School District Page 294 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Write the following complex numbers in polar form.
1. 5 12i 2. 5 4i 3. 0,2 4. 8, 6
Write the following complex numbers in rectangular form.
5. 3 cos270 sin 270i 6. 6 cos60 sin 60i
7. 3 cos135 sin135i 8. 4 cos30 sin30i
9. a. Write 10 24i in rectangular form.
b. Write your answer to part a) in polar form.
c. Write your answer to part b) in rectangular form.
d. Compare your answers form part a) and part c).
Representing Addition, Subtraction and Multiplication of Complex Numbers
A Complex Number and its
Conjugate Adding Complex Numbers
Subtracting a Complex
Number
The conjugate is a reflection
through the x-axis.
Adding complex numbers can
be demonstrated geometrically
by showing the addition of the
vector associated with each
complex number z. The sum
of 3 2 1 3i i is the
resultant vector 2,5 or
2 5i .
Subtracting complex numbers
can be demonstrated
geometrically by showing the
subtraction of the vector
associated with each complex
number z. The difference of
3 2 1 3i i is the
resultant vector 4, 1 or
4 i .
Jordan School District Page 295 Secondary Mathematics 2
Multiplying a Complex Number
Multiplication of complex numbers is
geometrically represented by adding the angles
and multiplying the moduli of the two vectors.
2 1 3 2 7 3 1 7i i i i
1 7tan 81.870 180 98.13
1
2 21 7 1 49 50 7.071z
1 2z i
1
1
1tan 26.6
2
2 2
1 2 1 4 1 5z
2 1 3z i
1
2
3tan 71.6
1
2 2
2 1 3 1 9 10z
Sum of angles 1 2 26.565 71.565 98.13
Product of moduli: 1 2 5 10 50 7.071z z z
Example 8:
Add 5 2 2 4i i and represent the sum by graphing it on the complex plane.
Answer:
5 2 2 4i i
5 2 2 4i i Remove the parenthesis.
5 2 2 4
3 2
i i
i
Combine like terms.
Represent the two complex numbers with
vectors.
Jordan School District Page 296 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 9:
Subtract 4 2 2 3i i and represent the difference by graphing it on the complex plane.
Answer:
4 2 2 3i i
4 2 2 3i i Remove the parenthesis.
4 2 2 3
6
i i
i
Combine like terms.
Represent the two complex numbers with
vectors.
Example 10:
Multiply 2 3 1 4i i and represent the product by graphing it on the complex plane.
Answer:
2 3 1 4i i 22 3 8 12
2 11 12
10 11
i i i
i
i
Use your preferred method to multiply.
Simplify and remember that 2 1i .
1
1
3tan 56.310
2
1
2
4tan 75.964
1
Sum of angles: 56.310 75.964 132.27
2 2
1 2 3 4 9 13z
2 2
2 1 4 1 16 17z
Product of moduli: 13 17 221 14.866
Jordan School District Page 297 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
Find the conjugate of the complex numbers.
1. 9i 2. 4 i 3. 9 6i 4. 3 7i
Add or subtract and represent the sum or difference on the complex plane.
5. 8 5 7 6i i 6. 4 7 4i i 7. 3 6 4 6i i
8. 1 3 6 4i i 9. 1 7 5 8i i 10. 5 2 9 10i i
Multiply and represent the product on the complex plane.
11. 1 2i i 12. 3 2 4 3i i 13. 3 5 2i i
Powers of Complex Numbers
De Moivre’s Theorem
If cos sinz r i is a complex number and n is any positive integer, then
cos sinn nz r n i n .
Example 11:
Use De Moivre’s Theorem to simplify 8
3 i
Answer:
8
3 i You need the radius and the angle. To get the
radius find the modulus.
2
23 1
3 1
4
2
z
z
z
z
3a , 1b , and 2 2r z a b .
1 1tan
3
30
To get the angle use 1tanb
a
.
30 180 150 The point should be in the second quadrant so
add 180 to the angle.
Jordan School District Page 298 Secondary Mathematics 2
88
8
8
8
8
3 2 cos 8 150 sin 8 150
3 256 cos 1200 sin 1200
1 33 256
2 2
3 128 128 3
3 128 128 3
i i
i i
i i
i i
i i
Substitute 2r , 150 , and 8n into De
Moivre’s Theorem.
Example 12:
Use De Moivre’s Theorem to simplify 3
1 3i .
Answer:
3
1 3i You need the radius and the angle. To get the
radius find the modulus.
22
1 3
1 3
4
2
z
z
z
z
1,a 3,b 2 2and r z a b .
1 3tan
1
60
To get the angle use 1tanb
a
.
60 180 120 The point should be in the second quadrant so
add 180 to the angle.
33
3
3
3
3
1 3 2 cos 3 120 sin 3 120
1 3 8 cos 360 sin 360
1 3 8 1 0
1 3 8 0
1 3 8
i i
i i
i i
i
i
Substitute 2r , 120 , and 3n into De
Moivre’s Theorem.
Jordan School District Page 299 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises D
Use De Moivre’s Theorem to simplify the following.
1. 3
2 2i 2. 3
1 i 3. 4
2 3i
4. 4
2 i 5. 4
3 i 6. 5
3 3 3i
VOCABULARY
The distance between numbers in the complex plane is the modulus, 2 2 ,z a b of the
difference of the complex numbers.
The midpoint of a segment in the complex plane is the average of the endpoints.
Example 13:
Find the distance between 6 2i and 2 3i .
Answer:
6 2 2 3
6 2 2 3
8
i i
i i
i
Find the difference between the two points.
2 2
8 1
64 1
65 8.06
z
z
z
Compute the modulus,
2 2z a b , of the
difference. 8 and 1a b
Example 14:
Find the midpoint between 8 2i and 1 4i .
Answer:
8 2i and 1 4i
The endpoints of the first complex number are
1 8a and 1 2b . The endpoints of the
second complex number are 2 1a and 2 4b .
8 1 2 4,
2 2
9 2,
2 2
9,1
2
is the midpoint or 9
2i
Compute the midpoint by averaging the a
endpoints and the b endpoints.
1 2 1 2,2 2
a a b b
Jordan School District Page 300 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises E
Find the distance and midpoint between the complex numbers.
1. 3 2 and 1 3i i 2. 7 4 and 2 2i i 3. 5 12 and 10 7i i
4. 3 8 and 2 12i i 5. 2 7 and 7 9i i 6. 11 3 and 3 3i i
Jordan School District Page 301 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 6 (F.TF.8)
Using the Pyathagorean Identity
Cluster 6: Prove and apply trigionometric identities
5.6.1 Prove the Pythagorean identity 2 2sin cos 1 , then use it to find sin(θ),
cos(θ), or tan(θ), given sin(θ), cos(θ), or tan(θ) (limit angles between 0 and 90
degrees).
Proof of the Pythagorean Identity 2 2sin cos 1
2 2 2a b c Given a right triangle with side lengths a, b, and c, use the
Pythagorean Theorem to relate the sides of the triangle.
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2
2 21
a b c
c c c
a b
c c
Divide each side by 2c so that the expression on the left is
equal to 1 on the right.
2 2
1a b
c c
Use the properties of exponents to rewrite the expression on
the left.
2 2
2 2
sin cos 1
sin cos 1
Substitute sin
a
c and cos
b
c .
VOCABULARY
An angle is in standard position when the vertex is at the origin,
one ray is on the positive x-axis, and the other ray extends into the
first quadrant.
Jordan School District Page 302 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 1:
If 4
sin5
is in the first quadrant, find cos and tan .
Draw a triangle with the angle in standard position.
Then label the information you know.
2 2 2
2
2
2
4 5
16 25
25 16
9
3
b
b
b
b
b
Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the missing side.
adjacent 3
coshypotenuse 5
opposite 4
tanadjacent 3
Use the definitions of the trigonometric ratios to find
cos and tan .
Example 2:
If 8
tan15
is in the first quadrant, find sin and cos .
Draw a triangle with the angle in standard position.
Then label the information you know.
2 2 2
2
2
8 15
64 225
289
17
c
c
c
c
Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the missing side.
opposite 8
sinhypotenuse 17
adjacent 15
coshypotenuse 17
Use the definitions of the trigonometric ratios to find
sin and cos .
Jordan School District Page 303 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
1. Find sin and cos if 3
tan4
. 2. Find sin and cos if tan 3 .
3. Find sin and tan if 1
cos4
. 4. Find sin and tan if 4
cos5
.
5. Find cos and tan if 5
sin13
. 6. Find cos and tan if 1
sin2
.
7. Find sin and cos if 8
tan5
. 8. Find sin and tan if 1
cos2
.
9. Find cos and tan if 3
sin2
10. Find sin and cos if tan 3 .
Jordan School District Page 304 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Honors Unit Circle
Defining Trigonometric Ratios on the Unit Circle
H.5.6 Define trigonometric ratios and write trigonometric expressions in equivalent
forms.
There are special right triangles. These triangles have special relationships between the lengths
of their sides and their angles that can be used to simplify calculations when finding missing
angles and sides.
45 45 90 Triangle
The Pythagorean Theorem allows us to derive the relationships that
exist for these triangles. Consider a right isosceles triangle with leg
lengths x and hypotenuse h. Since this is a right isosceles triangle, the
measures of the angles are 45 45 90 .
Using the Pythagorean Theorem, we know that 2 2 2x x h . Solving the equation for h, we get: 2 2 2
2 2
2
2
2
2
h x x
h x
h x
h x
45 45 90 Triangle
In any 45 45 90 triangle, the length of the hypotenuse is 2 times the length of its leg.
Therefore, in a 45 45 90 , the measures of the side lengths are x, x, and 2x .
2x
Jordan School District Page 305 Secondary Mathematics 2
30 60 90 Triangles
There is also a special relationship for triangles with angles of
30 60 90 . When an altitude, a, is drawn from the vertex of an
equilateral triangle, it bisects the base of the triangle and two
congruent 30 60 90 triangles are formed. If each triangle has a
base of length x, then the entire length of the base of the equilateral
triangle is 2x.
Using one of the right triangles and the Pythagorean Theorem, we know that 2 2 22a x x .
Solving for a we get:
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2
2
2
4
3
3
3
a x x
a x x
a x
a x
a x
Therefore, in a 30 60 90 triangle, the measures of the side lengths are , 3, and 2x x x .
30 60 90 Triangles
In any 30 60 90 triangle, the length of the hypotenuse is twice the length of the shorter leg,
and the length of the longer leg is 3 times the length of the shorter leg.
Jordan School District Page 306 Secondary Mathematics 2
Trigonometric Ratios for a Circle of Radius 1
oppositesin
hypotenuse
sin1
sin
y
y
adjacentcos
hypotenuse
cos1
cos
x
x
For any point ,x y on a circle of radius 1, the x-coordinate is the cosine of the angle and the y-
coordinate is the sine of the angle. A circle of radius 1 is called a unit circle. Special values on
the unit circle are derived from the special right triangles, 45 45 90 triangles and
30 60 90 triangles, and their trigonometric ratios.
Special Right Triangles and the Unit Circle
Recall that if you reflect any point ,x y , on the coordinate plane over the x axis, y axis, or the
origin, then the following relationships exist:
Reflection over the y axis ( , ) ( , )x y x y
Reflection over the x axis ( , ) ( , )x y x y
Reflection over the origin ( , ) ( , )x y x y
Jordan School District Page 307 Secondary Mathematics 2
We will use this reasoning to show relationships of special right triangles on the unit circle.
To illustrate a 45 45 90 triangle on the unit circle, we are going to rotate a point 45 from
the positive x-axis. The right triangle formed has a hypotenuse of 1 and leg lengths of x and y.
Since two of the angles are congruent this is an isosceles right triangle and the lengths of the legs
are the same, x y . Finding the value of x will help us identify the numerical coordinates of the
point ,x y .
The length of the hypotenuse in a 45 45 90 is equal to the length of a leg times 2 .
Using this property we can find the length of a leg.
1 2x The hypotenuse, which is length 1, is 2
times the length of leg x.
1
2x Solve for x.
1 2
2 2
2
2
x
x
Rationalize the denominator.
Since both legs are equal, 2 2
and 2 2
x y .
If we relate this to the unit circle where 45 , then the following is true:
2adjacent 22cos cos 45
hypotenuse 1 2x
2opposite 22sin sin 45
hypotenuse 1 2y
Jordan School District Page 308 Secondary Mathematics 2
Thus, the point 2 2
( , ) ,2 2
x y
. If we reflect this point so that it appears in Quadrants II, III,
and IV, then we can derive the following:
The reflection of the point over the y-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 135 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the point are
2 2
( , ) cos 45 ,sin 45 cos135 ,sin135 ,2 2
x y
.
The reflection of the point through the origin is equivalent to a rotation of 225 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are
2 2
( , ) cos 45 , sin 45 cos 225 ,sin 225 ,2 2
x y
.
The reflection of the point over the x-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 315 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are
2 2
( , ) cos 45 , sin 45 cos315 ,sin 315 ,2 2
x y
.
To illustrate a 30 60 90 triangle on the unit circle, we are going to rotate a point 60 from
the positive x-axis and drop a perpendicular line to the positive x-axis. The right triangle formed
has a hypotenuse of 1 and leg lengths of x and y.
The length of the hypotenuse in a 30 60 90 is twice the length of the shorter side. Thus,
1 2x . Upon solving the equation for x we find that 1
2x . We can use this value of x to find
the length of the longer leg, y. The longer leg is 3 times the length of the shorter leg.
Therefore, 3y x and since 1
2x then
13
2y
or 3
2y .
Jordan School District Page 309 Secondary Mathematics 2
If we relate this to the unit circle where 60 then the following is true:
1adjacent 12cos cos60
hypotenuse 1 2x
3opposite 32sin sin 60
hypotenuse 1 2y
Thus, the point 1 3
( , ) ,2 2
x y
. If we reflect this point so that it appears in Quadrants II, III,
and IV, then we can derive the following:
The reflection of the point over the y-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 120 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the point are
1 3
( , ) cos60 ,sin 60 cos120 ,sin120 ,2 2
x y
.
The reflection of the point through the origin is equivalent to a rotation of 240 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are
1 3
( , ) cos60 , sin 60 cos 240 ,sin 240 ,2 2
x y
.
The reflection of the point over the x-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 300 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are
1 3
( , ) cos60 , sin 60 cos300 ,sin 300 ,2 2
x y
.
We can also consider the case where 30 and use the 30 60 90 triangle to find the
values of x and y for this value of .
3adjacent 32cos cos30
hypotenuse 1 2x
1opposite 12sin sin 30
hypotenuse 1 2y
Thus, the point 3 1
( , ) ,2 2
x y
. If we reflect this point so that it appears in Quadrants II, III,
and IV, then we can derive the following:
The reflection of the point over the y-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 150 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the point are
3 1
( , ) cos30 ,sin 30 cos150 ,sin150 ,2 2
x y
.
Jordan School District Page 310 Secondary Mathematics 2
The reflection of the point through the origin is equivalent to a rotation of 210 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are
3 1
( , ) cos30 , sin 30 cos 210 ,sin 210 ,2 2
x y
.
The reflection of the point over the x-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 330 from the
positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are
3 1
( , ) cos30 , sin 30 cos330 ,sin 330 ,2 2
x y
.
If we plot all of the points where 30 , 45 , and 60 and their reflections, then we get most of
the unit circle. To obtain the rest of the unit circle we have to examine what happens to a point
when 0 .
Notice that the value of x is equal to 1 and that the value of y is zero. Thus, when 0 , the
point ( , ) 1,0x y . Even though this point does not form a right triangle, any point on a circle
can be found by using cosine and sine. Therefore, cos0 1 and sin0 0 .
If we reflect the point over the y-axis, then the new point is ( , ) 1,0x y . This is equivalent
to a rotation of 180 from the positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are:
( , ) cos0 ,sin 0 cos180 ,sin180 1,0x y .
Jordan School District Page 311 Secondary Mathematics 2
Finally we need to observe what happens when we rotate a point 90 from the positive x-axis.
Notice that the value of y is equal to 1 and that the value of x is zero. Thus, when 90 , the
point ( , ) 0,1x y . Therefore, cos90 0 and sin90 1 .
If we reflect the point over the x-axis, then the new point is ( , ) 0, 1x y . This is equivalent
to a rotation of 270 from the positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are:
( , ) cos90 , sin90 cos270 ,sin 270 0, 1x y .
Plotting all of the points, we obtain what is referred to as the unit circle.
The unit circle can be used to find exact values of trigonometric ratios for the angles that relate to
the special right triangle angles.
Jordan School District Page 312 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 1:
Find sin135 .
Answer:
The point that has been rotated 135 from the positive x-axis has coordinates 2 2
,2 2
. The
y-coordinate is the sine value, therefore, 2
sin1352
.
Example 2:
Find cos240 .
Answer:
The point that has been rotated 240 from the positive x-axis has coordinates 1 3
,2 2
. The
x-coordinate is the cosine value, therefore, 1
cos 2402
.
Example 3:
Find all values of , 0 360 , for which 1
sin2
.
Answer:
The points that have been rotated 30 and 150 from the positive x-axis have coordinates
3 1,
2 2
and 3 1
,2 2
respectively. The y-coordinate is the sine value and both points have a
y-coordinate of 1
2.
Example 4:
Find all values of , 0 360 , for which cos 1 .
Answer:
The point that has been rotated 180 from the positive x-axis has coordinates 1,0 . The x-
coordinate is the cosine value which is 1 .
Jordan School District Page 313 Secondary Mathematics 2
Defining Tangent Values
Another way to write tan is sin
tancos
. This can be shown algebraically as follows:
opposite
sin hypotenusetan
adjacentcos
hypotenuse
Use the definitionopposite
sinhypotenuse
and
adjacentcos
hypotenuse .
opposite adjacenttan
hypotenuse hypotenuse
Rewrite the division problem so that it is easier
to work with.
opposite hypotenusetan
hypotenuse adjacent
Dividing by a fraction is the same as
multiplying by its reciprocal.
opposite hypotenusetan
adjacent hypotenuse
Use the commutative property of
multiplication to rearrange the terms.
oppositetan 1
adjacent
opposite sintan
adjacent cos
Example 5:
Find tan 210 .
Answer:
The coordinates of the point that has been rotated 210 from the positive x-axis are
3 1, .
2 2
sintan
cos
sin 210tan 210
cos 210
Use the coordinates of the point to find
tan 210 .
1
2tan 2103
2
1sin 210
2 and
3sin 210
2
1 3tan 210
2 2 Rewrite the division problem.
1 2tan 210
2 3
Dividing by a fraction is the same as
multiplying by the reciprocal.
1tan 210
3 Simplify.
3tan 210
3 Rationalize the denominator.
Jordan School District Page 314 Secondary Mathematics 2
Tangent Values for the Angles on the Unit Circle
0 30 45 60 90 120 135 150
tan 0 3
3 1 3 undefined 3 1
3
3
180 210 225 240 270 300 315 330
tan 0 3
3 1 3 undefined 3 1
3
3
Previously we defined the six trigonometric functions. Notice that cosecant, secant, and
cotangent are reciprocals of sine, cosine, and tangent, respectively.
The Six Trigonometric Functions
sine opposite
sinhypotenuse
cosine adjacent
coshypotenuse
tangent opposite
tanadjacent
cosecant 1 hypotenuse
cscsin opposite
secant 1 hypotenuse
seccos adjacent
cotangent 1 adjacent
cottan opposite
Example 6:
Find sec60 .
Answer:
adjacent 1cos60
hypotenuse 2 and secant is the reciprocal of cosine therefore,
hypotenuse 2sec60 2
adjacent 1 .
Example 7:
Find cot330 .
Answer:
sin330 3tan 330
cos330 3
and cotangent is the reciprocal of tangent therefore,
cos330 3 3 3 3 3cot 330 3
sin330 33 3 3
.
Jordan School District Page 315 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 8:
Find all values of , 0 360 , for which 2
csc3
.
Answer:
Cosecant is the reciprocal of sine, therefore find all the values that satisfy 3
sin2
. The
angles rotated 60 and 120 from the positive x-axis have coordinates 1 3
,2 2
and 1 3
,2 2
respectively. Both have y-coordinates of 3
2. Both will have a cosecant of
2
3.
Practice Exercises A
Find the value indicated.
1. sin135 2. cos270 3. tan300 4. sin 45
5. cos60 6. tan120 7. sin180 8. cos0
9. tan 210 10. sin 240 11. cos225 12. tan315
13. csc330 14. sec30 15. cot150 16. csc90
17. sec180 18. cot315 19. csc210 20. sec225
21. cot 270 22. csc45 23. sec120 24. cot 90
Find all values of , 0 360 , that make the statement true.
25. 2
sin2
26. 1
cos2
27. tan 1 28. sin 1
29. 3
cos2
30. tan 0 31. 2
csc3
32. sec 2
33. cot 3 34. csc 1 35. sec 1 36.
cot 1
Jordan School District Page 316 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Refer to the diagram. Give the letter that could stand for the function value.
1. 180cos
3. sin30
5. sin 0
7. cos90
9. sin135
11. sin330
2. 270sin
4. cos135
6. cos330
8. sin 240
10. cos240
12. cos0
For the indicated point, tell if the value for sin or cos is positive, negative, or neither.
13. cosC
15. sin D
17. cos E
19. cos F
21. sin A
23. sinC
14. sinG
16. cos H
18. sin B
20. cos B
22. cosG
24. sin E
Jordan School District Page 317 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Honors Prove Trigonometric Identities
Trigonometry Proofs
H.5.7 Prove trigonometric identities using definitions, the Pythagorean Theorem, or
other relationships.
H.5.7 Use the relationships to solve problems.
VOCABULARY
A trigonometric identity is a statement of equality that is true for all values of the variable for
which both sides of the equation are defined. The set of values for which the variable is defined
is called the validity of the identity.
The statement sin
tancos
is an example of a trigonometric identity. The validity of the
identity would not include values of that would make cos 0 because dividing by zero is
undefined.
Basic Trigonometric Identities
Reciprocal Identities
1csc
sin
1sec
cos
1cot
tan
1sin
csc
1cos
sec
1tan
cot
Quotient Identities
sintan
cos
coscot
sin
Pythagorean Identities
2 2cos sin 1 2 21 tan sec 2 2cot 1 csc
Cofunction Identities
sin 90 cos cos 90 sin tan 90 cot
Negative Angle Identities
sin sin cos cos tan tan
Recall the work that you have done with expressions that are quadratic in nature. For example,
2( 3) 7 3 10x x is an expression that is quadratic in nature. If 3u x , then the
expression can be rewritten as 2 7 10u u . This could then be factored as 5 2u u .
Replacing u with 3x , you get 3 5 3 2x x . Trigonometry expressions can also be
Jordan School District Page 318 Secondary Mathematics 2
quadratic in nature. For example, the expression 2cos 5cos 6x x is quadratic in nature. If
cosu x , then it could be rewritten as 2 5 6u u . This could then be factored as 2 3 .u u
Substituting cos x back in for u, the factored expression is cos 2 cos 3x x . You may need
to use this idea when proving trigonometric identities.
Trigonometry Proofs
In a trigonometric proof you manipulate one side of the equation using the known trigonometric
identities until it matches the other side of the equation. Pick the more complicated side to
manipulate.
Example 1:
Prove the identity 2 21 sec tanx x .
Answer: 2 21 sec tanx x Manipulate the right side of the equation.
2
2 2
1 sin1
cos cos
x
x x
Rewrite 2sec x and 2tan x using the reciprocal
and quotient identities. 2
2
1 sin1
cos
x
x
The fractions have a common denominator.
Subtract the numerators.
2
2
cos1
cos
x
x
Us the Pythagorean identity 2 2cos sin 1
to replace the numerator with 2cos .
1 1 Simplify.
Example 2:
Prove the trigonometric identity 2 3cos cos sin cosx x x x .
Answer: 2 3cos cos sin cosx x x x Manipulate the left side of the equation.
2 3cos 1 sin cosx x x Factor cos x from the two terms cos x and
2cos sinx x .
2 3cos cos cosx x x
Use the Pythagorean Identity 2 2cos sin 1x x to replace 21 sin x with 2cos x .
3 3cos cosx x Multiply.
Jordan School District Page 319 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 3:
Prove the identity sin tan cos secx x x x .
Answer:
sin tan cos secx x x x Manipulate the left side of the equation.
sinsin cos sec
cos
xx x x
x Rewrite tan x using a quotient identity.
sin sincos sec
1 cos
x xx x
x
2sin
cos seccos
xx x
x
Rewrite sin x so that it is a fraction.
Multiply the fractions.
2sin cossec
cos 1
x xx
x
2sin cos cos
seccos 1 cos
x x xx
x x
Rewrite cos x so that it is a fraction.
The common denominator is cos 1 cosx x .
Multiply the second fraction by cos
cos
x
x.
2 2sin cossec
cos cos
x xx
x x Simplify.
2 2sin cossec
cos
x xx
x
Add the numerators.
1sec
cosx
x Use the Pythagorean Identity 2 2cos sin 1x x .
sec secx x Use the reciprocal identities to rewrite the
fraction.
Example 4:
Prove the identity tan cot sec cscx x x x .
Answer:
tan cot sec cscx x x x Manipulate the left side of the equation.
sin cossec csc
cos sin
x xx x
x x
Rewrite tan x and cot x using the quotient
identities.
sin cossec csc
cos sin
x xx x
x x
sin sin cos cossec csc
cos sin sin cos
x x x xx x
x x x x
2 2sin cos
sec csccos sin cos sin
x xx x
x x x x
Find a common denominator in order to add
the fractions. The common denominator is
cos sin cos sinx x x x .
Multiply the first fraction by sin
sin
x
x and the
second fraction by cos
cos
x
x.
Jordan School District Page 320 Secondary Mathematics 2
Simplify. 2 2sin cos
sec csccos sin
x xx x
x x
Now that the fractions have a common
denominator, add the numerators.
1sec csc
cos sinx x
x x Use a Pythagorean Identity, 2 2cos sin 1 ,
to simplify the numerator.
1 1sec csc
cos sinx x
x x
Rewrite the single fraction as a product of two
fractions.
sec csc sec cscx x x x Use the reciprocal identities to rewrite the
fractions.
Example 5:
Prove the trigonometric identity cos 1 sin
2sec1 sin cos
x xx
x x
.
Answer:
cos 1 sin2sec
1 sin cos
x xx
x x
Manipulate the left side of the equation.
cos 1 sin2sec
1 sin cos
x xx
x x
cos cos 1 sin 1 sin2sec
1 sin cos cos 1 sin
x x x xx
x x x x
Find a common denominator. The common
denominator will be the product of the two
denominators 1 sin cosx x . Multiply the first
fraction by cos
cos
x
x and the second fraction by
1 sin
1 sin
x
x
.
2 2cos 1 2sin sin2sec
1 sin cos 1 sin cos
x x xx
x x x x
Simplify.
2
2
1 sin 1 sin 1 sin sin sin
1 sin 1 sin 2 2sin sin
x x x x x
x x x x
2 2cos 1 2sin sin2sec
1 sin cos
x x xx
x x
Add the numerators.
2 2cos sin 1 2sin2sec
1 sin cos
x x xx
x x
Rearrange the terms using the properties of
equality.
1 1 2sin
2sec1 sin cos
xx
x x
2 2sin
2sec1 sin cos
xx
x x
Use the Pythagorean Identity 2 2cos sin 1
to simplify the numerator.
2 1 sin2sec
1 sin cos
xx
x x
Factor a two from both terms in the numerator.
Jordan School District Page 321 Secondary Mathematics 2
1 sin 22sec
1 sin cos
xx
x x
Rearrange the terms using the properties of
equality.
21 2sec
cosx
x
12 2sec
cosx
x
Simplify.
Rearrange the terms using the properties of
equality.
Rewrite the fraction using a reciprocal identity.
2 sec 2secx x
Practice Exercises A
Prove the trigonometric identities.
1. sec cot cscx x x 2. sin sec tanx x x
3. tan cos sinx x x 4. cot sin cosx x x
5. csc sin cot cosx x x x 6. tan csc cos 1x x x
7. cot sec sin 1x x x 8. tan cot
sincsc
x xx
x
9. 2 2sin 1 cot 1x x 10. 21 cos
sin tancos
xx x
x
11. 21 sin
cos cotsin
xx x
x
12. 2 2 2 2sec csc sec cscx x x x
13. 2sec sec sin cosx x x x 14. 2csc csc cos sinx x x x
15. cos 1 sin
2sec1 sin cos
x xx
x x
16.
2 1 sinsec tan
1 sin
xx x
x
Jordan School District Page 322 Secondary Mathematics 2
Solving Trigonometric Equations
Example 6:
Find all values of x if cos cos sin 0x x x and 0 360x .
Answer:
cos cos sin 0x x x
cos 1 sin 0x x Factor cos x out of both terms.
cos 0x 1 sin 0
1 sin
x
x
Use the zero product property to set each factor
equal to zero.
1cos 0x 1sin 1 x To find x, an angle, use the inverse cosine and
sine.
90 ,270x 90x Find all the angles between 0 and 360 that
have a cosine of 0 or a sine of 1.
The angles that satisfy the trigonometric equation are 90x and 270x .
Example 7:
Find all values of x if 22cos cos 1 0x x and 0 360x .
Answer:
22cos cos 1 0x x
2cos 1 cos 1 0x x Factor.
2cos 1 0
2cos 1
1cos
2
x
x
x
cos 1 0
cos 1
x
x
Use the zero product property to set each factor
equal to zero.
1 1cos
2x
1cos 1x
To find x, an angle, use the inverse cosine.
60 ,300x 180x Find all the angles between 0 and 360 that
have a cosine of 12 or a cosine of 1 .
The angles that satisfy the trigonometric equation are 60x , 300x , and 180x .
Jordan School District Page 323 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Find all values of x if 0 360x .
1. 0cossincos2 xxx 2. 0tancostan2 xxx
3. xxx tansintan 2 4. xxx sintansin 2
5. 3tan2 x 6. 1sin2 2 x
7. 01cos4cos4 2 xx 8. 01sin3sin2 2 xx
9. 0sin2sin 2 xx 10. xx 2cos2sin3
Jordan School District Page 324 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 6 Honors (F.TF.9)
Prove and Apply Trigonometric Identities
H.5.8 Prove the addition and subtraction formulas for sine, cosine, and tangent and use
them to solve problems.
H.5.9 Justify half-angle and double-angle theorems for trigonometric values.
It is possible to find the exact sine, cosine, and tangent values of angles that do not come from
special right triangles, but you have to use the angles from the unit circle to find them. The
following formulas can be used to find the sine, cosine, and tangent values of angles that are not
on the unit circle.
The Cosine of the Sum of Two Angles
cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B
The Cosine of the Difference of Two Angles
cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B
The Sine of the Sum of Two Angles
sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B
The Sine of the Difference of Two Angles
sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B
The Tangent of the Sum of Two Angles
tan tan
tan1 tan tan
A BA B
A B
The Tangent of the Difference of Two
Angles
tan tan
tan1 tan tan
A BA B
A B
Proof of the Cosine Difference Formula: cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 2 shows an angle in standard position. Figure 1 shows the same angle, but it has been
rotated and A B . The chords opposite the angle, , have equal length in both circles.
Therefore, CD is equal to the length of EF . Find the measure of CD and EF .
Jordan School District Page 325 Secondary Mathematics 2
Finding CD
2 2
cos 1 sin 0CD Use the distance formula to find the distance
between the points cos ,sin and 1,0 .
2 2cos 2cos 1 sinCD Expand
2cos 1 . Remember that
2
cos 1 cos 1 cos 1 .
2 2cos sin 2cos 1CD Rearrange the terms so that 2cos and 2sin
are next to each other.
1 2cos 1CD Recall that 2 2cos sin 1 (Pythagorean
Identity).
2 2cosCD Simplify.
Finding EF
2 2
cos cos sin sinEF A B A B
Use the distance
formula to find the
distance between the
points cos ,sinA A
and cos ,sinB B .
2 2 2 2cos 2cos cos cos sin 2sin sin sinEF A A B B A A B B
Expand
2
cos cosA B and
2
sin sinA B .
2 2 2 2cos sin cos sin 2cos cos 2sin sinEF A A B B A B A B
Rearrange the terms
so that 2cos A and 2sin A and 2cos B
and 2sin B are next to
each other.
1 1 2cos cos 2sin sinEF A B A B
Recall that 2 2cos sin 1
(Pythagorean
Identity).
2 2cos cos 2sin sinEF A B A B Simplify.
Jordan School District Page 326 Secondary Mathematics 2
Setting CD EF
2 2cos 2 2cos cos 2sin sinA B A B Set CD EF .
2 2cos 2 2cos cos 2sin sinA B A B Square each side to eliminate the square root.
2cos 2cos cos 2sin sinA B A B Subtract 2 from each side of the equation.
cos cos cos sin sinA B A B Divide each term on both sides of the equation
by 2 .
cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B Recall that A B
The following identities are needed in order to prove the sine of a sum identity.
Negative Angle Identities
sin sin cos cos tan tan
Proof of the Cosine of a Sum: cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B
cos cosA B A B Rewrite the expression so that it is a difference.
cos cos cos sin sin( )A B A B A B Use the cosine of a difference identity to
rewrite the expression.
cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B Use the negative angle identities to eliminate
B .
cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B Use the commutative property of
multiplication to rearrange the terms.
The following identities are needed in order to prove the sine of a sum identity.
Cofunction Identities
sin 90 cos cos 90 sin tan 90 cot
Proof of the Sine of a Sum: sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B
sin cos 90A B A B Use the cofunction identity of sine
to rewrite the expression in terms of
cosine.
Jordan School District Page 327 Secondary Mathematics 2
sin cos 90
sin cos 90
A B A B
A B A B
Distribute the negative and then
group the first two terms.
sin cos 90 cos sin 90 sinA B A B A B
Use the cosine of a difference
identity to rewrite the expression.
sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B
Use the cofunction identities to
rewrite the expression.
Proof of the Sine of a Difference: sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B
sin sinA B A B Rewrite the expression so that it is a sum.
sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B Use the sine of sum identity to rewrite the
expression.
sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B Use the negative angle identities to eliminate
B .
sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B Use the commutative property of
multiplication to rewrite the expression.
Proof of the Tangent of a Sum Identity:
tan tan
tan1 tan tan
A BA B
A B
sintan
cos
A BA B
A B
Use the definition of tangent to rewrite the
expression.
sin cos cos sin
tancos cos sin sin
A B A BA B
A B A B
Use the sine and cosine of a sum identities to
rewrite the expressions.
sin cos cos sin
cos cos cos costancos cos sin sin
cos cos cos cos
A B A B
A B A BA BA B A B
A B A B
Divide each term in the numerator and the
denominator by cos cosA B .
sin cos cos sin
cos cos cos costancos cos sin sin
cos cos cos cos
A B A B
A B A BA BA B A B
A B A B
Rewrite each expression using properties of
equality.
tan 1 1 tan
tan1 1 tan tan
A BA B
A B
Simplify using the fact that
sintan
cos
.
tan tan
tan1 tan tan
A BA B
A B
Simplify.
Jordan School District Page 328 Secondary Mathematics 2
Proof of the Tangent of a Difference Identity:
tan tan
tan1 tan tan
A BA B
A B
sintan
cos
A BA B
A B
Use the definition of tangent to rewrite the
expression.
sin cos cos sin
tancos cos sin sin
A B A BA B
A B A B
Use the sine and cosine of a difference
identities to rewrite the expressions.
sin cos cos sin
cos cos cos costancos cos sin sin
cos cos cos cos
A B A B
A B A BA BA B A B
A B A B
Divide each term in the numerator and the
denominator by cos cosA B .
sin cos cos sin
cos cos cos costancos cos sin sin
cos cos cos cos
A B A B
A B A BA BA B A B
A B A B
Rewrite each expression using properties of
equality.
tan 1 1 tan
tan1 1 tan tan
A BA B
A B
Simplify using the fact that
sintan
cos
.
tan tan
tan1 tan tan
A BA B
A B
Simplify.
Example 1:
Find the exact value of sin165 .
Answer:
sin165 sin 30 135 Find two special angles that add or subtract to
165 . (There are several possibilities.)
sin165 sin30 cos135 cos30 sin135 Use the sine of a sum identity to rewrite the
expression.
1 2 3 2sin165
2 2 2 2
Substitute known values.
2 6sin165
4 4
2 6sin165
4
Simplify.
Jordan School District Page 329 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2:
Find the exact value of tan165 .
Answer:
tan165 tan 210 45 Find two special angles that add or subtract to
165 . (There are several possibilities.)
tan 210 tan 45tan165
1 tan 210 tan 45
Use the tangent of a difference identity to
rewrite the expression.
31
3tan165
31 1
3
Substitute known values.
3 3
3 3tan1653 3
3 3
3 3
3tan1653 3
3
3 3tan165
3 3
Simplify.
Practice Exercises A
Use a sum or difference formula to find an exact value.
1. sin15 2. cos15 3. tan 75
4. sin 75 5. cos105 6. tan105
7. sin195 8. cos195 9. tan 255
10. sin 255 11. cos285 12. tan 285
Jordan School District Page 330 Secondary Mathematics 2
Double and Half Angle Formulas
Double-Angle Theorems
sin 2 2sin cos
2 2
2
2
cos 2 cos sin
cos 2 2cos 1
cos 2 1 2sin
2
2 tantan 2
1 tan
Justification of double angle theorem for sine:
sin 2 sin Substitute 2 .
sin 2 sin cos cos sin Use the sine of a sum formula.
sin 2 2sin cos Simplify.
Justification of double angle theorem for cosine:
cos2 cos Substitute 2 .
cos2 cos cos sin sin Use the cosine of a sum formula.
2 2sin 2 cos sin Simplify.
Justification of double angle theorem for tangent:
tan 2 tan Substitute 2 .
tan tantan 2
1 tan tan
Use the tangent of a sum formula.
2
2 tan tantan 2
1 tan
Simplify.
Jordan School District Page 331 Secondary Mathematics 2
Half-Angle Theorems
1 cossin
2 2
1 coscos
2 2
1 costan
2 1 cos
Justification of half-angle theorem for sine: 2
2
2
2
cos 2 1 2sin
cos 2 2sin 1
2sin 1 cos 2
1 cos 2sin
2
1 cos 2sin
2
Use 2cos2 1 2sin . Solve the double angle
formula for sin .
1 cos 22
sin2 2
Substitute
2
.
1 cossin
2 2
Simplify.
Justification of half-angle theorem for cosine: 2
2
2
2
cos 2 2cos 1
cos 2 2cos 1
2cos 1 cos 2
1 cos 2cos
2
1 cos 2cos
2
Use 2cos2 2cos 1 . Solve the double angle
formula for cos .
1 cos 22
cos2 2
Substitute
2
.
1 coscos
2 2
Simplify.
Jordan School District Page 332 Secondary Mathematics 2
Justification of half-angle theorem for tangent:
sin2tan
2cos
2
Use
sintan
cos
. Substitute
2
.
1 cos
2tan2 1 cos
2
Use the half-angle theorems for sine and cosine.
1 cos
2tan1 cos2
2
11 cos
2tan12
1 cos2
1 costan
2 1 cos
Simplify using properties of radicals and exponents.
Practice Exercises B
Use the figures to find the exact value of each trigonometric function.
1. sin 2 2. cos2 3. tan 2
4. sin 2 5. cos2 6. tan 2
7. sin 2 8. cos2 9. tan 2
10. sin2
11. cos
2
12. tan
2
13. sin2
14. cos
2
15. tan
2
16. sin2
17. cos
2
18. tan
2
Jordan School District Page 334 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 6 Cluster 1 (G.C.1, G.C.2, G.C.3, and Honors G.C.4)
Understand and Apply Theorems about Circles
Cluster 1: Understanding and applying theorems about circles
6.1.1 Prove that all circles are similar.
6.1.2 Understand relationships with inscribed angles, radii, and chords (the relationship
between central, inscribed, circumscribed; the relationship between inscribed
angles on a diameter; the relationship between radius and the tangent).
6.1.3 Construct the inscribed and circumscribed sides of a triangle.
6.1.3 Prove properties of angles for a quadrilateral inscribed in a circle.
6.1.4 (Honors) Construct a tangent line from a point outside a given circle to a circle.
VOCABULARY
A circle is the set of all points equidistant from a given point
which is called the center of the circle.
A radius is any segment with endpoints that are the center of the
circle and a point on the circle. Radii is the plural of radius.
AB is the radius of circle A. The center of the circle is point A.
A segment with endpoints on the circle is called a chord.
DE is a chord of circle A.
A diameter is any chord with endpoints that are on the circle and
that passes through the center of the circle. The diameter is the
longest chord of a circle.
CB is the diameter of circle A.
An angle that intersects a circle in two points and that has its
vertex at the center of the circle is a central angle.
BAF is a central angle of circle A.
Jordan School District Page 335 Secondary Mathematics 2
An angle that intersects a circle in two points and that has its
vertex on the circle is an inscribed angle.
DBC is an inscribed angle of circle A.
A polygon that is circumscribed by a circle has all of its vertices
on the circle and the polygon’s interior is completely contained
within the circle.
Circle A is circumscribed about Quadrilateral BCDE.
A planar shape or solid completely enclosed by (fits snugly inside)
another geometric shape or solid is an inscribed figure. Each of
the vertices of the enclosed figure must lie on the “outside” figure.
Quadrilateral BCDE is inscribed in circle A.
A line that intersects a circle in only one point is a tangent line.
The point where the tangent line and the circle intersect is the
point of tangency.
BC is a tangent line to circle A. Point B is the point of tangency.
A line that intersects a circle in two points is a secant line.
BC is a secant line to circle A.
Other helpful sources: http://www.mathgoodies.com/lessons/vol2/geometry.html
Jordan School District Page 336 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Identify a chord, tangent line, diameter, two radii, the center, and point of tangency and, a central
angle.
1. chord: ______________________________
2. tangent line: _________________________
3. diameter: ____________________________
4. radius: ______________________________
5. point of tangency : ____________________
6. center: ______________________________
7. central angle: ________________________
Identify the term that best describes the given line, segment, or point.
8. AF
10. C
12. EG
14. CE
9. PF
11. BD
13. PC
15. P
Jordan School District Page 337 Secondary Mathematics 2
Prove All Circles are Similar
Figures that are similar have corresponding parts that are proportional. To prove that all circles
are similar, you will need to prove that their corresponding parts are proportional.
Proof that all circles are Similar
Given: A D , radius of circle A is x, and radius of circle D is y.
Prove: Circle A is similar to Circle D.
First we need to prove that ABC DEF so we need to establish AA criterion. Since
AB AC , ABC is an isosceles triangle. The base angles of an isosceles triangle are congruent
to one another. Therefore B C . Similarly, DE DF so DEF is also an isosceles
triangle. Therefore E F . The sum of the angles in a triangle is 180 so
180A B C and 180D E F . We know that B C and E F so
2 180A B and 2 180D E . Solving each equation for A and D yields
180 2A B and 180 2D E . Since A D we know that
180 2 180 2B E and B E . By AA similarity ABC DEF . Because the two
triangles are similar their sides will be proportional. The ratio of proportionality is AB x
yDE .
AB is a radius of circle A and DE is a radius of circle D. The ratio of the radii of the circles is
x
y. The diameter of circle A is 2x and the diameter of circle D is 2y . The ratio of the diameter
of circle A to the diameter of circle D is 2
2
x x
y y . The circumference of circle A is 2 x and the
circumference of circle D is 2 y . The ratio of the circumference of circle A to the
circumference of circle D is 2
2
x x
y y
. The corresponding parts of circle A are proportional to
the corresponding parts of circle D, therefore circle A is similar to circle D.
In addition to having corresponding parts proportional to one another, figures that are similar to one
another are dilations of one another. A dilation is a transformation that produces an image that is the
same shape as the original figure but the image is a different size. The dilation uses a center and a
scale factor to create a proportional figure. The ratio of the corresponding parts is the scale factor of
the dilation.
Jordan School District Page 338 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
1. Given a circle of a radius of 3 and another circle with a radius of 5, compare the ratios of the
two radii, the two diameters, and the two circumferences.
2. Given a circle of a radius of 6 and another circle with a radius of 4, compare the ratios of the
two radii, the two diameters, and the two circumferences.
Properties of Central Angles and Inscribed Angles
VOCABULARY
An arc is a portion of a circle's circumference.
An intercepted arc is the arc that lies in the interior of an
angle and has its endpoints on the angle.
A central angle is an angle that intersects a circle in two
points and that has its vertex at the center of the circle. The
measure of the angle is the same as the measure of its
intercepted arc.
An inscribed angle is an angle whose vertex is on a circle and
whose sides contain chords of the circle. The measure of the
angle is half the measure of the intercepted arc.
ACB is a central angle of circle C and its intercepted arc is
AB and m ACB mAB . ADB is an inscribed angle of
circle A and its intercepted arc is AB and 1
.2
m ADB mAB
If the m ACB is less than 180, then A, B, and all the
points on C that lie in the interior of m ACB form a minor
arc. A minor arc is named by two consecutive points. The
measure of a minor arc is the measure of its central angle.
AB is the minor arc of circle C.
Points A, B, and all points on C that do not lie on AB form
a major arc. A major arc is named by three consecutive
Jordan School District Page 339 Secondary Mathematics 2
points. The measure of a major arc is 360° minus the measure
of the related minor arc.
ADB is the major arc of circle C.
A semicircle is an arc whose central angle measures 180°. A
semicircle is named by three points.
An inscribed angle that intercepts a semicircle is a right angle.
1 1
180 902 2
m ABC mAC
The arc addition postulate states that the measure of an arc
formed by two adjacent arcs is the sum of the measures of the
two arcs.
mML mLN mMN
Congruent arcs are arcs with the same measure either in the
same circle or congruent circles. Congruent central angles or
inscribed angles have congruent arcs and congruent arcs have
congruent central angles or inscribed angles.
ABC CBD AC CD
Jordan School District Page 340 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
FH and JK are diameters. Find the measure of each angle or arc.
1. m FAJ
3. m KAF
5. mLH
7. mKF
9. mJH
2. m LAH
4. mJL
6. mHK
8. mJF
10. mJHF
FH and KJ are diameters, 40m FHM , 60mHK , and 50mJL . Find the measure of
each angle or arc.
11. mJF
13. m JKL
15. m HAK
17. mMK
12. mLH
14. mFM
16. mKF
18. mJGK
19. Find the measure of angles 1, 2, and 3.
20. Find the measure of angles 1 and 2 if
1 2 13m x and 2m x .
Jordan School District Page 341 Secondary Mathematics 2
Theorems If two chords intersect inside a circle, then the measure of
each angle formed is half the sum of the measures of the arcs
intercepted by the angle and its vertical angle.
12
2
11
2
m mCD mAB
m mBC mAD
If two chords intersect inside a circle, then the product of the
lengths of the segments of one chord is equal to the product
of the lengths of the segments of the other chord.
xy wz
Example 1:
Find the value of x.
The two chords forming the angle
that measures x intercepts the
two arcs AB and CD . The
measure of will be equal to
one-half the sum of the measures
of the intercepted arcs.
Answer:
Example 2: Find the value of x.
The chords AC and BD intersect
inside the circle, therefore the
product of the lengths of the
segments of each chord are equal
to one another. By setting up this
equation you can solve for x.
Answer:
9 3 6
9 18
2
x
x
x
x
1
2
1106 174
2
1280
2
140
x mAB mCD
x
x
x
Jordan School District Page 342 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises D
Find the value of x.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Jordan School District Page 343 Secondary Mathematics 2
Theorems If a line is tangent to a circle, then it is perpendicular to the
radius drawn at the point of tangency.
If l is tangent to C at B, then l to CB .
In a plane, if a line is perpendicular to a radius of a circle at
its endpoints on the circle, then the line is tangent to the
circle.
If l toCB , then l is tangent to C at B.
If two segments from the same point outside a circle are
tangent to the circle, then they are congruent.
If BD and CD are tangent to circle A at points B and C,
then BD CD .
Example 3: Using Properties of Tangents
AC is tangent to B at point C. Find BC.
Answer:
2 2 2
22 2
2
2
2
12 13
144 169
169 144
25
5
AC BC AB
BC
BC
BC
BC
BC
Since AC is tangent to circle B at point C,
AC BC . This makes ABC a right triangle
and the Pythagorean Theorem can be used to
find BC.
Jordan School District Page 344 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 4: Finding the Radius of a Circle
BC is tangent to circle A at point B. Solve for r.
Answer:
2 2 2
22 2
2 2
15 9
225 18 81
225 18 81
225 81 18
144 18
8
BC AB AC
r r
r r r
r
r
r
r
Since BC is tangent to circle A at point B,
AB BC . This makes a right triangle
and the Pythagorean Theorem can be used to
find r.
Example 5: Verify a Line is Tangent to a Circle
Show that AC is tangent to B .
Answer:
2 2 29 12 15
81 144 225
225 225
If you can show that 2 2 29 12 15 , then the
lines are perpendicular.
225 = 225 is a true statement, so the lines are
perpendicular.
ABC
Jordan School District Page 345 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 6: Using Properties of Tangents
Find x if AB is tangent to circle C at point B
and AD is tangent to circle C at point D.
Answer:
2 3 11
2 8
4
AD AB
x
x
x
Because AB and AD are tangent to the same
circle and contain the same exterior point, the
measures of each length are equal.
Practice Exercises E
Find the value of x.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. Prove that radius AB AC using the Pythagorean
Theorem.
Jordan School District Page 346 Secondary Mathematics 2
Circumscribed Angles
Theorem If two secants, a secant and a tangent, or two tangents intersect in the exterior of a circle, then the
measure of the angle formed is one-half the positive difference of the measures of the intercepted
arcs.
Two Secants Secant and Tangent Two Tangents
1
2m A mDE mBC 1
2m A mDC mBC 1
2m A mCDB mBC
Example 7:
Find the value of x.
A is formed by two secants so its measure will be one-
half the positive difference of the two intercepted arcs DE
and BC .
1
2
1120 54
2
166
2
33
m A mDE mBC
x
x
x
Example 8:
Find the value of x.
A is formed by two tangents so its measure will be one-
half the positive difference of the two intercepted arcs
360BDC x and BC x .
Jordan School District Page 347 Secondary Mathematics 2
1
2
130 360
2
130 360 2
2
30 180
150
150
m A mBDC mBC
x x
x
x
x
x
Practice Exercises F
Find the value of x. Assume lines that appear tangent are tangent.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Jordan School District Page 348 Secondary Mathematics 2
Constructions
See Secondary Math 1 for more help with constructions.
Circumscribe a triangle with a circle
Step 1: Create a triangle.
Step 2: Construct the perpendicular bisector of AB by
setting the compass to slightly more than half the
distance between points A and B.
Step 3: With the compass on point A, draw an arc on both
sides of .
Step 4: With the compass on point B, draw an arc on both
sides of .
Step 5: With a straightedge, draw the line connecting the
intersection points. This is the perpendicular
bisector of .
Step 6: Construct the perpendicular bisector of another side
of the triangle.
Step 7: The intersection of the two perpendicular bisectors
will be equidistant from the vertices. Set the
compass to the distance between a vertex and this
intersection point.
Step 8: With the compass on the intersection of the
perpendicular bisectors, draw a circle that
circumscribes the triangle.
Step 1
Steps 3 and 4
Step 5
Step 8
AB
AB
AB
Jordan School District Page 349 Secondary Mathematics 2
Inscribe a circle in a triangle
Step 1: Draw a triangle. Label the vertices A, B, and C.
Step 2: Bisect A of the triangle by setting the compass
to a medium length. With the compass
somewhere on point A draw an arc from AB to
AC .
Step 3: With the compass on AB where the arc intersects
the segment, draw an arc in the interior of A .
Step 4: With the compass on AC where the arc intersects
the segment, draw an arc in the interior of A .
Step 5: Connect point A to the intersection of the two
arcs in its interior with a straightedge. This is the
bisector of the angle.
Step 6: Bisect another one of the angles.
Step 7: The intersection point of the two bisectors is the
center of the inscribed circle.
Step 8: Construct a perpendicular from the center point to
one side of the triangle.
Step 9: Set the compass to be more than the distance from
the center to a side of the triangle AC . With
the compass on the intersection of the two angle
bisectors, draw two arcs that intersect a side of the
triangle AC .
Step 10: Set the compass to the distance between the two
arcs that intersect a side of the triangle AC .
With the compass on one of the intersections,
draw an arc below a side of the triangle AC .
Step 11: With the compass on the other intersection, draw
an arc below a side of the triangle AC .
Step 2
Steps 3 and 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 8
Step 12
Jordan School District Page 350 Secondary Mathematics 2
Step 12: Draw the line connecting the intersection of the
two angle bisectors to the intersection of the two
arcs below a side of the triangle AC .
Step 13: Place the compass on the center point; adjust the
length of the compass to touch the intersection of
the perpendicular line and the side of the triangle.
Step 14: Now create the inscribed circle.
Step 14
Quadrilaterals Inscribed in Circles
Theorem If a quadrilateral is inscribed in a circle, its opposite angles are supplementary.
Proof of Theorem:
Given: Quadrilateral ABCD is inscribed in circle E
Prove: A and C are supplementary. B and D are
supplementary.
By arc addition and the definitions of arc measure, 360mBCD mBAD and
360mABC mADC . Since the measure of the intercepted arc is twice the measure of the
inscribed angle, 2m A mBCD , 2m C mBAD , 2m B mADC and 2m D mABC . By
substitution 2 2 360m A m C and 2 2 360m B m D . Using reverse distribution, the
equations can be rewritten as 2 360m A m C and 2 360m B m D . Applying
the division property of equality the equations can be rewritten as 180m A m C and
180m B m D . By definition of supplementary, A and C are supplementary and B
and D are supplementary.
Jordan School District Page 351 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 1:
Find x and y.
The opposite angles of a
quadrilateral inscribed in a
circle are supplementary.
Answer:
180
180 80
100
x m EDC
x
x
180
180 120
60
y m BCD
y
y
Practice Exercises G
1. Triangles EFG and EGH are inscribed in A with EF FG .
Find the measure of each numbered angle if 1 12 8m x
and 2 3 8m x .
2. Quadrilateral LMNO is inscribed in P . If 80m M and
40m N , then find m O and m L .
3. Find the measure of each numbered angle for the figure if
120.mJK Diameter JL .
Jordan School District Page 352 Secondary Mathematics 2
4. Find the measure of each numbered angle for the figure if
1
2m R x and
15.
3m K x
5. Quadrilateral QRST is inscribed in a
circle. If 45m Q and 100,m R find
m S and m T .
6. Quadrilateral ABCD is inscribed in a
circle. If 28m C and 110m B , find
m A and m D .
(Honors) Construct a tangent line from a point outside a given circle to a circle
Step 1: Start with a circle with center A, and a point B outside
of the circle.
Step 2: Draw a line segment with endpoints A and B.
Step 3: Find the midpoint M of AB by constructing the
perpendicular bisector of AB . Depending of the size
of the circle and the location of point B, the midpoint
may be inside or outside of the circle.
Step 4: Place the compass on point M and set the compass
width to the center A of the circle.
Step 5: Without changing the compass width, draw an arc that
intersects the circle in two points. These points (label
them C and D) will be the points of tangency.
Step 6: Draw BC and BD . These lines are tangent to circle A
from a point B outside circle A.
Step 3
Step 5
Step 6
Other helpful construction resources:
http://www.khanacademy.org/math/geometry/circles-topic/v/right-triangles-inscribed-in-circles--
proof;
http://www.mathopenref.com/consttangents.html;
http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-triangleinscribe.html;
http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-trianglecircum.html;
http://www.benjamin-mills.com/maths/Year11/circle-theorems-proof.pdf
M
M
M
Jordan School District Page 353 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 6 Cluster 2 (G.C.5)
Circles with Coordinates and Without Coordinates
Cluster 2: Finding arc lengths and areas of sectors of circles
6.2.1 The length of the arc intercepted by the angle is proportional to the radius
6.2.1 The radian measure is the ratio between the intercepted arc and the radius
6.2.1 Derive the formula for the area of the sector
Recall that the measure of an arc is the same as the measure of the
central angle that intercepts it. The measure of an arc is in degrees,
while the arc length is a fraction of the circumference. Thus, the
measure of an arc is not the same as the arc length.
Consider the circles and the arcs shown at the
left. All circles are similar therefore circle 2 can
be dilated so that it is mapped on top of circle 1.
The same dilation maps the slice of the small
circle to the slice of the large circle. Since
corresponding lengths of similar figures are
proportional the following relationship exists.
1 1
2 2
r l
r l
Solving this proportion for 1l gives the following
equation.
1 2 1 2
21 1
2
r l l r
lr l
r
This means that the arc length, 1,l is equal to the radius, 1,r times some number, 2
2
l
r. We can
find that number by looking at how the central angle compares to the entire circle. Given a
central angle of 30 it is 30
360
or
1
12 of the entire circle. The length of the arc that is
intercepted by the central angle of 30 will also be 1
12 of the circumference. Therefore the
length of the arc depends only on the radius.
Jordan School District Page 354 Secondary Mathematics 2
To generalize the relationship between the arc length and the radius, set up a proportion showing
that the central angle compared to the whole circle is proportional to the length of the arc
compared to the circumference of the circle.
360 2
l
r
Find the length of an arc by multiplying the central angle ratio by the circumference of the circle
(2πr). In other words solve for l (length).
2360
l r
This equation can be simplified because 360, 2 and are all constants.
2
360
180
l r
l r
Compare this formula with the formula we obtained earlier 21 1
2
lr l
r . The number 2
2
l
r is
180
where is the measure of the central angle in degrees.
Formula for arc length
If the central angle of a circle with radius r is degrees, then the length, l, of the arc it intercepts
is given by: 180
l r
.
Example 1: Finding arc length
Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 5 centimeters and the central angle is 72 . Write
the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to nearest thousandth.
Answer:
180
725
180
l r
l
Use the formula for arc length. Substitute 5 in
for r and 72 in for .
725
180
360
180
2 6.283
l
l
l
Simplify.
The arc length is 2 centimeters or approximately 6.283 centimeters.
Jordan School District Page 355 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2: Finding arc length
Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 7 inches and the central angle is 120 . Write the
answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
Answer:
180
1207
180
l r
l
Use the formula for arc length. Substitute 7 in
for r and 120 in for .
1207
180
840
180
1414.661
3
l
l
l
Simplify.
The arc length is 14
3 inches or approximately 14.661inches.
Practice Exercises A
1. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 10 yards and the central angle is 44 . Write
the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
2. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 8 meters and the central angle is 99 . Write
the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
3. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 2 feet and the central angle is 332 . Write the
answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
4. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 3 kilometers and the central angle is 174 .
Write the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
5. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 9 centimeters and the central angle is 98 .
Write the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
6. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 6 miles the central angle is 125 . Write the
answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
Jordan School District Page 356 Secondary Mathematics 2
Another way to measure angles is with radians. The radian measure of a central angle is defined
as the ratio of the arc length compared to the radius. If is the radian measure of a central
angle then, 180
180
rl
r r
, where is the measure of the central angle in degrees. To
convert any angle in degrees to radian measure multiply the angle in degrees by 180
.
Converting Between Radians and Degrees
To convert degrees to radians, multiply the angle by radians
180
.
To covert radians to degrees, multiply the angle by 180
radians
.
Example 3: Converting from degrees to radians
Convert an angle of 25 to radian measure. Leave your answer in terms of .
Answer:
radians25
180
25 radians
180
Multiply the angle by the conversion factor
radians
180
.
5 radians
36 Simplify the fraction.
Example 4: Converting from radians to degrees
Convert an angle of 2
radians to degrees.
Answer:
180 radians
2 radians
180 radians
2 radians
Multiply the angle by the conversion factor
180
radians
.
90 Simplify the fraction.
Practice Exercises B
Find the degree measure of each angle expressed in radians and find the radian measure of each
angle expressed in degrees. (Express radian measures in terms of .)
1. 135 2. 2
3
3. 45
4. 5
4
5. 330 6.
5
2
Jordan School District Page 357 Secondary Mathematics 2
The arc length can also be found by using a radian measure for the central angle. When this
happens the formula is l r , where is in radian measure.
Practice Exercises C
Compare your answers found here to those in Practice Exercises A.
1. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 10 yards and the central angle is 11
45
. Write
the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
2. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 8 meters and the central angle is 11
20
. Write
the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
3. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 2 feet and the central angle is 83
45
. Write the
answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
4. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 3 kilometers and the central angle is 29
30
.
Write the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
5. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 9 centimeters and the central angle is 49
90
.
Write the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
6. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 6 miles the central angle is 25
36
. Write the
answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.
Area of a Sector
A region of a circle determined by two radii and the arc intercepted by
the radii is called a sector of the circle (think of a slice of pie). A
sector is a fraction of a circle, so the ratio of the area of the sector to
the area of the entire circle is equal to the measure of the central angle
creating the sector to the measure of the entire circle.
Symbolically this ratio is area of a sector measure of central angle
area of circle measure of circle .
Jordan School District Page 358 Secondary Mathematics 2
Using substitution this becomes, 2
area of a sector
360r
. Solving for the area of a sector we
get: 2area of a sector360
r
.
Another way of looking at area of a sector is shown below.
The area of a circle is
2A r . The area of one-half a circle is 21
2A r .
The area of one-fourth circle is
21
4A r . The area of any fraction of a circle is
2
360A r .
Area of a sector
If the angle is in degrees then the area of a sector, A, is 2
360A r
.
(Rewriting the formula for area of a sector you get 21
2 180A r
, recall that an angle in radian measure is equal to
180
where is in degrees.)
If the angle is in radian measure then the area of a sector, A, is 21
2A r .
Example 5:
Find the area of a sector with radius 5 cm and central angle of 135 . Express your answer in
terms of and approximate it to the nearest thousandths.
Answer:
2
360A r
Use the formula for the area of a sector with
the angle in degrees.
21355
360A
3
258
A
75
8A
Substitute known values. 135 and 5r
Simplify.
The area of the sector is 75
29.4528 cm
2.
Jordan School District Page 359 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises D
Find the area of the sector given the radius and central angle. Express your answer in terms of
and approximate it to the nearest thousandths.
1. A radius of 2 feet and a central angle of 180 .
2. A radius of 5 centimeters and a central angle of 90 .
3. A radius of 4 inches and a central angle of 60 .
4. A radius of 10 inches and a central angle of 120 .
5. A radius of 10 meters and a central angle of 45 .
6. A radius of 7 centimeters and a central angle of 2
.
7. A radius of 2 millimeters and a central angle of 5
6 .
8. A radius of 6 feet and a central angle of 5
4 .
9. A radius of 3 inches and a central angle of 3
2 .
10. A radius of 6 meters and a central angle of 5
3 .
Jordan School District Page 360 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 6 Cluster 3 (G.GPE.1)
Equation of a Circle
Cluster 3: Translating between descriptions and equations for a conic section
6.3.1 Find the equation of a circle given the center and the radius using the Pythagorean
Theorem; also complete the square to find the center of the circle given the
equation
Deriving the Equation of a Circle Centered at the Origin
A circle is the set of all points equidistant from a given point called the center. In order to derive
the equation of a circle, we need to find the distance from the center to any point ,x y on the
circle. This distance is the length of the radius. We can derive the equation of a circle using the
distance formula or the Pythagorean Theorem.
Create a right triangle with the radius as the hypotenuse, the
length x as the horizontal leg, and the length y as the vertical
leg.
Using the Pythagorean Theorem to relate the sides we get: 2 2 2r x y .
Where r is the radius and the circle is centered at the origin.
Example 1:
Identify the center and radius of the circle with equation 2 2 49.x y
Answer:
2 2
2 2 2
49
7
x y
x y
Rewrite the equation so that it matches the
standard form of the equation of a circle.
The square root of 49 is 7, therefore 27 49 .
The center is at the origin and the radius is 7.
Example 2:
Write the equation of a circle centered at the origin with a radius of 2.
Answer:
2 2 2x y r Use the standard form of the equation of a
circle. 2 2 22x y 2 2 4x y
Substitute known values. 2r
Simplify.
Jordan School District Page 361 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
1. Identify the center and the radius for the circle with the equation 2 2 36.x y
2. Write an equation for a circle centered at the origin with a radius of 5.
3. Write an equation for a circle centered at the origin with a diameter of 14.
4. Write an equation for a circle centered at the origin that contains the point 3,5 .
Deriving the Equation of a Circle Centered at ,h k
Find any point ,x y on the circle. Create a right triangle
with the radius as the hypotenuse, the length x h as the
horizontal leg, and the length y k as the vertical leg.
Then using the Pythagorean Theorem to relate the sides we
get:
2 22r x h y k .
Where r is the radius and the circle is centered at the point
,h k .
Example 3:
Find the center and radius for the circle with equation 2 2
3 2 81x y .
Answer:
22 23 2 9x y
The center is 3, 2 and the radius is 9.
Rewrite the circle’s equation so that it matches
the standard form of a circle.
The square root of 81 is 9 so 29 81 .
Jordan School District Page 362 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 4:
Write the equation for the circle centered at 1,5 and radius 4.
Answer:
2 2 2x h y k r
Start with the standard form of the equation of
a circle.
2 2 21 5 4x y
Substitute the known values. 1h , 5k ,
and 4r .
2 2
1 5 16x y Simplify.
Example 5:
Write the equation for the circle that has a diameter with endpoints 1,5 and 5, 3 .
Answer:
5 31 5,
2 2
4 2,
2 2
2,1
Find the center of the circle by finding the
midpoint of the diameter.
2 2
2 2
2
2 1 1 5
2 1 4
3 16
9 16
25
5
r
r
r
r
r
r
Find the length of the radius by finding the
distance between the center and either of the
endpoints of the diameter.
2 2 22 1 5x y
2 2
2 1 25x y
Substitute the known values into the standard
form of the equation of a circle centered at
,h k and simplify. 2h , 1k , and 5r
Jordan School District Page 363 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Given the standard form of a circle determine the center and the radius of each circle.
1. 2 2( 2) ( 3) 16x y 2.
2 2( 1) ( 7) 25x y 3. 2 2( 5) ( 6) 4x y
4. 2 2( 2) ( 9) 36x y 5.
2 2( 10) ( 21) 196x y 6. 2 2( 1) ( 3) 49x y
Write the standard form of a circle with the given characteristics.
7. A circle with radius 10 centered at 8, 6 .
8. A circle with radius 5 centered at 4,3 .
9. A circle with diameter endpoints at 9,2 and 1,6 .
10. A circle with diameter endpoints at 3,4 and 5,2 .
Example 6:
Complete the square to find the center and radius of a circle given by the equation 2 2 6 2 6 0x y x y .
Answer:
2 26 2 6x x y y
Collect the x terms together, the y terms
together and move the constant to the other
side of the equation.
2 2
2 2
2 2
2 2
6 ___ 2 ___ 6
6 26 2 6 9 1
2 2
6 9 2 1 16
x x y y
x x y y
x x y y
Group the x and y terms together. Complete
the square and simplify.
2 2
3 1 16x y Rewrite each trinomial as a binomial squared.
The center is at 3, 1 and the radius is 4.
Jordan School District Page 364 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises C
Complete the square to find the center and radius of a circle given by the equation.
1. 2 2 4 6 8 0x y x y 2.
2 2 4 10 20 0x y x y
3. 2 2 6 2 15 0x y x y 4.
2 2 6 4 9 0x y x y
Challenge Problem 2 22 2 6 8 12 0x y x y
Jordan School District Page 365 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 6 Cluster 4 (G.GPE.4)
Proving Geometrical Theorems Algebraically
Cluster 4: Using coordinates to prove theorems algebraically
6.4.2 Use coordinates to prove geometric theorems algebraically (include simple proofs
involving circles)
A trapezoid is a quadrilateral with only one set of parallel
sides.
An isosceles trapezoid is a trapezoid with congruent legs and
congruent base angles. The diagonals of an isosceles
trapezoid are congruent.
A parallelogram is a quadrilateral with opposite sides
parallel and congruent. The diagonals of a parallelogram
bisect each other.
A rectangle is a special parallelogram with four right angles.
The diagonals of a rectangle are congruent.
A rhombus is a special parallelogram with four congruent
sides. The diagonals bisect each other and are perpendicular
to one another.
A square is a special rectangle and rhombus with four
congruent sides. The diagonals are congruent, bisect each
other, and are perpendicular to each other.
Jordan School District Page 366 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 1:
Prove FGHJ with vertices 2,1F , 1,4G , 5,4H , and 6,1J is a parallelogram.
Plot the points on a coordinate plane.
2 2 222 1 1 4 1 3 1 9 10GF
2 2 2 25 6 4 1 1 3 1 9 10HJ
2 2 2 26 2 1 1 4 0 16 4FJ
2 2 2 25 1 4 4 4 0 16 4GH
Find the distance of ,GF ,HJ ,FJ
and .GH
1 4 33
2 1 1GFm
4 1 33
5 6 1HJm
1 1 00
6 2 4FJm
4 4 00
5 1 4GHm
Find the slopes of ,GF ,HJ ,FJ and
.GH
Since opposite sides are congruent and parallel the quadrilateral FGHJ is a parallelogram.
Example 2: Prove that the point (5,2) is on the circle with center (3,2) and radius 2.
Create the circle on a coordinate plane.
Jordan School District Page 367 Secondary Mathematics 2
2 2
2 2
5 3 2 2
2 0
4
2
r
r
r
r
Use the distance formula to show that the
radius is 2. Use the center as 1 1,x y and 5,2
as 2 2,x y .
The radius of the circle is 2 therefore the point must lie on the circle.
Practice Exercises A
1. Prove that quadrilateral EFGH is an
isosceles trapezoid given the following
vertices: 3,2E , 2,2F , 3, 2G ,
and 4, 2H .
2. Prove that quadrilateral ABCD is a
parallelogram given vertices: 2,3A ,
3,6B , 6,8C and 5,5D .
3. Prove that ABCD is a parallelogram given
vertices: 3,2A , 0,4B , 1,8C and
2,6D using distance and slope.
4. Prove that PQRS is not a rectangle given
vertices: 0,2P , 2,5Q , 5,5R , and
4,2S .
5. Prove that ABCD is a parallelogram given
vertices: 2,4A , 6,4B , 5,0C , and
1,0D .
6. Prove that ABCD is a rhombus given
vertices: 1,2A , 0,6B , 4,7C , and
3,3D .
7. Prove that the point 3, 3 lies on the
circle with radius 2 and center 2,0 .
8. Prove that the point 2, 5 lies on the
circle with radius 2 and center 2, 3 .
9. Given a circle with center 2,3
determine whether or not the points
4, 1 and 3,5 are on the same circle.
10. Given a circle with center at the origin
determine whether or not the points
1, 3 and 0,2 lie on the same circle.
11. Prove that the line containing the points
5,3 and 3,3 is tangent to the circle
with equation 2 2
1 1 16x y .
12. Prove that the line containing the points
0,8 and 4,11 is tangent to the circle
with equation 2 2
2 3 100x y .
Other helpful resources:
http://www.regentsprep.org/regents/math/geometry/GCG4/CoordinatepRACTICE.htm
http://staff.tamhigh.org/erlin/math_content/Geometry/PolyQuad/CoordinateGeometryNotes.pdf
http://mtprojectmath.com/Resources/Coordinate%20Geometry%20Proofs.pdf
Jordan School District Page 368 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 6 Cluster 5 (G.GMD.1 and G.GMD.3, Honors G.GMD.2)
Formulas and Volume
Cluster 5: Explaining and using volume formulas
6.5.1 Informal arguments for circumference of circle, volume of a cylinder, pyramid,
and cone (use dissection arguments, Cavalieri’s principle) (use the relationship of
scale factor k, where k is for a single length, k2 is area, k
3 is volume)
H.6.1 Give an informal argument using Cavalieri’s principle for the formulas for the
volume of a sphere and other solid figures.
6.5.2 Use volume formulas for cylinders, pyramids, cones, and spheres to solve
problems
Formula for Circumference
The circumference of a circle is 2 r . The perimeter of a regular polygon inscribed in a circle
gives an estimate of the circumference of a circle. By increasing the number of sides, n, of the
regular polygon we increase the accuracy of the approximation.
3n 4n 5n 6n 8n
If we had a regular polygon with an infinite number of sides, then we would have the exact value
of the circumference of a circle. To prove this numerically, we need a formula for the perimeter
of a regular polygon with n sides. The perimeter of a regular polygon is found by multiplying
the number of sides by the side length. Symbolically that is P ns . If we can find the value for
any side length, s, then we can find the perimeter for any regular polygon with n sides.
Given a regular polygon with side length s and radius r we can divide
the polygon into n congruent isosceles triangles.
Each triangle has a hypotenuse of length r and a base of length s. If we
construct a perpendicular bisector from the central angle to the base,
we can use trigonometric ratios to find the length of s.
Jordan School District Page 369 Secondary Mathematics 2
Since the perpendicular bisector, a, divides the side of length, s, in
half 2s x . Thus, we need to find the value x. The opposite side is x
and the hypotenuse is r therefore sinx
r . By multiplying each side
of the equation by r we can isolate x and we get sinx r . Since
2s x , 2 sins r . Substituting this value into our perimeter
equation yields 2 sinP ns n r .
The central angle is found by dividing 360 by the number of sides, n. The angle is half of the
central angle. Thus, 360
2n .
We can use this equation to show that as n increases the perimeter approaches 2 6.283r r .
The following table demonstrates this relationship.
n 360
2n
Perimeter Expression 2 sinP n r Approximation
3
36060
2 3
3 2 sin 60P r 5.196r
4
36045
2 4
4 2 sin 45P r 5.656r
5
36036
2 5
5 2 sin 36P r 5.878r
6
36030
2 6
6 2 sin 30P r 6.000r
10
36018
2 10
10 2 sin 18P r 6.180r
100 360
1.82 100
100 2 sin 1.8P r 6.282r
1000 360
0.182 1000
1000 2 sin 0.18P r 6.283r
A regular polygon with 1000 sides is accurate to four decimal places for the approximation of
2 r . With an infinite number of sides, the regular polygon would essentially be a circle and the
perimeter would equal 2 r . Therefore, the circumference of a circle is 2 r .
Jordan School District Page 370 Secondary Mathematics 2
Area of a Circle
A similar process can be used to show that the area of a circle is 2r . The area of a regular
polygon inscribed in a circle gives an estimate of the area of a circle. By increasing the number
of sides, n, of the regular polygon we increase the accuracy of the approximation of the area of a
circle.
Because a regular polygon with n sides of side length s can be divided
into n isosceles triangles, the area of the regular polygon can be found
by multiplying the area of one isosceles triangle by the number of
triangles formed. Symbolically, area of triangleA n or
1
2A bh n
.
The base is length s and we know that 2 sins r . We need to find
the height, which is the altitude of the triangle and is sometimes called
the apothem. This can be done by using trigonometric ratios.
The altitude is adjacent to the angle and the radius is the hypotenuse.
So, cosa
r . By multiplying each side by r we can isolate a and we
get cosa r .
3n 4n 5n 6n 8n
Jordan School District Page 371 Secondary Mathematics 2
By substituting these values into our area formula we get 1 1
2 sin cos2 2
A bh n r r n
simplifying it we get 2 sin cosA r n . We can use this equation to show that as n increases the
area approaches 2 23.142r r . The following table demonstrates this relationship.
n 360
2n
Area Expression
2 sin cosA r n Approximation
3
36060
2 3
2 3 sin 60 cos 60A r 21.299r
4
36045
2 4
2 4 sin 45 cos 45A r 22.000r
5
36036
2 5
2 5 sin 36 cos 36A r 22.378r
6
36030
2 6
2 6 sin 30 cos 30A r 22.598r
10
36018
2 10
2 10 sin 18 cos 18A r 22.939r
100 360
1.82 100
2 100 sin 1.8 cos 1.8A r 23.140r
1000 360
0.182 1000
2 1000 sin 0.18 cos 0.18A r 23.142r
A regular polygon with 1000 sides is accurate to four decimal places for the approximation of 2r . With an infinite number of sides the regular polygon would essentially be a circle and the
area would equal to 2r . Therefore, the area of a circle is
2r .
A simpler way to look at this is by slicing the circle into infinitely many slices and arranging
those slices so that they form a parallelogram. The smaller the slice, the more linear the
intercepted arc becomes and the more it looks like a parallelogram.
6n 8n 10n
Jordan School District Page 372 Secondary Mathematics 2
The base of the parallelogram is half of the circumference. Therefore, 1
22
b r r . The
height is the radius. The area of a parallelogram can be found by multiplying the base times the
height. Symbolically, 2A bh r r r .
Volume
VOCABULARY
The volume of a three dimensional figure is the space that it occupies.
A prism is a three-dimensional figure with two congruent and parallel
faces that are called bases.
A cylinder is a three-dimensional figure with parallel bases that are
circles.
A cone is a three-dimensional figure that has a circle base and a vertex
that is not in the same plane as the base. The height of the cone is the
perpendicular distance between the vertex and the base.
A pyramid is a three-dimensional figure with a polygon as its base
and triangles as its lateral faces. The triangles meet at a common
vertex.
A sphere is the set of all points in space that are the same distance
from the center point.
Jordan School District Page 373 Secondary Mathematics 2
The three figures above have the same volume. Each figure has the same number of levels and
each level has the same volume. This illustrates Cavalieri’s Principle.
Cavalieri’s Principle
If two space figures have the same height and the same cross-sectional area at every level, then
they have the same volume.
The volume of any prism or cylinder can be found by multiplying the area of the base times the
height, V Bh .
Volume of a Cylinder
Extending the idea of Cavalieri’s principle, the volume of a cylinder is the area of its base, a
circle, times the perpendicular height. Symbolically, 2V Bh r h .
Formula for the Volume of a Cylinder
The volume of a cylinder with radius r and height h is 2V r h .
Example 1: Volume of a cylinder
The radius of a circular container is 4 inches and the height is 10 inches. Find the volume of the
container.
Answer: 2V r h Use the formula for the volume of a cylinder.
2
4 10V Substitute in known values. 4r and 10h
16 10
160 502.655
V
V
Simplify.
The volume is approximately 502.655 in3. Volume is measured in cubic units.
Jordan School District Page 374 Secondary Mathematics 2
Volume of a Pyramid
The volume of a cube can help us find the volume of a pyramid. Since a cube has 6 faces that
are all squares, the volume of a cube is 2 3V Bh b b b , where b is the length of the side.
Inside the cube, place 6 pyramids that have a face of the cube as a
base and share a vertex at the center of the cube. The six pyramids
are equally sized square pyramids.
Using the formula for the volume of a cube, we can derive the volume of one of the pyramids.
3
2
V b
V Bh
V b b
Begin with the volume of a cube. Rewrite it so
that it is in the form V Bh .
21
6V b b
There are 6 equally sized pyramids within the
cube. The volume of one pyramid will be equal
to one-sixth the volume of the cube.
2
2
1
6
12
6
V b b
V b h
Rewrite the formula using the height of the
pyramids. Use 2b h because the height of
the cube is equivalent to the height of two
pyramids.
2
2
2
6
1
3
V b h
V b h
Simplify.
In general, the volume of a pyramid is 21 1
3 3V b h Bh . In other words, the volume of a
pyramid is the area of its base, regardless of whether or not it is a square, times the height.
Formula for the Volume of a Pyramid
For any pyramid with area of base, B, and height h, the volume is 1
3V Bh .
Jordan School District Page 375 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 2: Volume of a Pyramid
Find the volume of the pyramid with a rectangular base that is 4 ft by 5 ft
and height of 6 ft.
Answer:
1
3V Bh Use the formula for the volume of a pyramid.
1
20 63
V The base is a rectangle so the area of the base
is 4 5 20A lw . The height is 6.
1
1203
40
V
V
Simplify.
The volume of the pyramid is 40 ft3. Volume is measured in cubic units.
Volume of a Cone
The relationship between the volume of a cone and the volume of a cylinder is similar to the
relationship between the volume of a pyramid and the volume of a prism. We already know that
the volume of a pyramid is one-third the volume of a prism. We want to show that the volume of
a cone is also one-third the volume of a cylinder. To do this, we are going to look at a pyramid
with a base that has n sides. If we increase the number of sides until there are an infinite number
of sides, the pyramid will have a circular base and be a cone.
6 sided base
8 sided base
Inifinite sided base
When we increase the number of sides of the base of pyramid, we also change the shape of the
prism that holds the pyramid. The prism that contains the pyramid with an infinite number of
sides is a cylinder.
Jordan School District Page 376 Secondary Mathematics 2
6 sided base
8 sided base
Infinite sided base
Since a cone is essentially a pyramid with an infinite number of sides and a cylinder is a prism
with a base that has an infinite number of sides, the volume of a cone is one-third the volume of
a cylinder.
Formula for the Volume of a Cone
For any cone with radius, r, and height h, the volume is 21
3V r h .
Example 3: Volume of a cone
Find the volume of the cone with radius 8 cm and height 12 cm.
Answer:
21
3V r h Use the formula for the volume of a cone.
21
8 123
V Substitute in known values. 8r and 12h
164 12
3
1768
3
256 804.248
V
V
V
Simplify.
The volume of the cone is approximately
804.248 cm3.
Volume is measured in cubic units.
Jordan School District Page 377 Secondary Mathematics 2
Volume of a Sphere
In order to derive the formula for the volume of a sphere, we need to review Cavalieri’s
Principle. That is, that if two figures have the same height and same cross-sectional area at every
level, then they have the same volume. We will also use the volume of a cone 21
3V r h and the
volume of a cylinder 2V r h .
Consider the cylinder and hemisphere given below, both with a radius of r and height r. From the
cylinder, a cone is cut out that shares the same base as the cylinder and also has a radius of r and
a height of r. We are going to prove that this “cone-less cylinder”, or the part of the cylinder that
remains after the cone has been removed, has the same volume as the hemisphere. Once we have
proven that they have the same volume, we can merely double the formula for the “cone-less
cylinder” to obtain the volume for a sphere.
Cylinder
Hemisphere
We start calculating the volume of the “cone-less cylinder” by subtracting the volume of the
cone from the volume of the cylinder. Since the height is r, the volume of this cone would be
2 2 31 1 1
3 3 3V r h r r r and the volume of the cylinder would be
2 2 3V r h r r r .
Upon subtracting their volumes we get 3 3 31 2
3 3V r r r . So the volume of the “cone-less
cylinder” is 32
3V r
In order to use Cavalieri’s Principle, we are going to create circular cross sections of the figures
by slicing them at height h and comparing their areas. The cross section of the cylinder and the
hemisphere are shown below.
Cylinder with cone inside
Hemisphere
Jordan School District Page 378 Secondary Mathematics 2
Cross sectional slice of cylinder with cone
Cross sectional slice of hemisphere
If we can prove that these cross sections have the same area, then by Cavalieri’s Principle the
volume of the hemisphere and the volume of the “cone-less” cylinder are the same. Start by
finding the area of the cross section of the hemisphere, or the disk shaped cross section. We need
to find its radius, z. Since the cross section is h units above the base of the hemisphere, we can
use the Pythagorean Theorem and the radius of the hemisphere’s base to calculate the cross
sectional radius z to be 2 2z r h . Using this radius we can now calculate the area of the
cross section. 2
2 2 2 2 2( )A z r h r h . To find the area of the cross-section of the
“cone-less cylinder”, or the washer shaped cross section, we need to subtract the small circle
from the large circle. Since the radius of the cone at any height h is proportional to the height
with a 1:1 ratio, the large circle (cross-section of the cylinder) has a radius of r while the small
circle (cross-section of the cone) has a radius of h. Thus the area of the large circle is 2r and the
area of the small circle is 2h . Their difference is
2 2 2 2( )r h r h . Therefore, the area of
the cross section from the hemisphere is the same as the area of the cross section from the “cone-
less” cylinder. Cavalieri’s Principle states that if we sum up all of our equal slices or cross
sectional areas then we obtain equivalent volumes for the hemisphere and “cone-less cylinder.”
Recall that the volume of the cone-less cylinder is 32
3V r . We can then infer that the volume
of the hemisphere is 32
3V r and the that volume of the sphere would be twice the volume of
the hemisphere or 3 32 42
3 3V r r .
Formula for the Volume of a Sphere
For any sphere with radius r the volume is 34
3V r .
Jordan School District Page 379 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 4: Volume of a sphere Find the volume of a sphere with radius of 2 ft.
Answer:
34
3V r Use the formula for the volume of a sphere.
34
23
V Substitute in known values. 2r
4
83
3233.5210
3
V
V
Simplify.
The volume of the sphere is approximately
33.5210 ft3.
Volume is measured in cubic units.
Jordan School District Page 380 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises A
Find the volume of the following.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13. Find the volume of a cylindrical pool if
the diameter is 20 feet and the depth is 6
feet.
14. A fish tank is in the shape of a cylinder.
The tank is 22 feet deep and 40 feet in
diameter. Find the volume of the tank.
15. Popcorn is served in a conical container
that has a radius of 3 inches and a height
of 6 inches. What is the volume of the
small container?
16. A tank is in the shape of a pyramid. The
base of the tank is a rectangle with length
3 feet and width 7 feet. It is 9 feet high.
Find the volume of the tank.
17. Find the volume of a pyramid if the base
is a square with side 6 feet and the height
is 4 feet.
18. How much ice cream is needed to fill a
conical shaped sugar cone that is 4 inches
deep and 6 inches in diameter?
19. A soccer ball has a radius of 4.3 inches.
What is the volume of soccer ball?
20. A softball has a diameter of 9.6 cm. What
is its volume?
Jordan School District Page 381 Secondary Mathematics 2
Relating Scale Factor, Length, Area, and Volume
The drawings below are dilations of one another. The length and area of each figure are
compared.
Original Drawing Dilated Drawing
Length Scale Factor
Dilated Length
Original Lengthk
Area Scale Factor
2Dilated Area
Original Areak
21
3 3 4.5 cm2
A
216 6 18 cm
2A
62
3 218
4 24.5
By comparing the side of the dilated triangle to the corresponding side of the original triangle, we
see that the ratio is 2. Thus, the scale fator 2k . If we compare the area of the dilated triangle to
the area of the original triangle, the ratio is 4. If we write this in terms of k we get 24 2 or 2k .
Original Drawing Dilated Drawing Length Scale Factor
Dilated Length
Original Lengthk
Area Scale Factor
2Dilated Area
Original Areak
2 26 36 inA
2 22 4 inA
2 1
6 3
24 1 1
36 9 3
By comparing the radius of the dilated circle to the radius of the original figure, we see that the
ratio is 1
3. Thus, the scale factor
1
3k . If we compare the area of the dilated circle to the area of
the original circle, the ratio is 1
9. If we write this in terms of k we get
2
21 1 or k
9 3
.
Therefore, if a figure is dilated by a scale factor of k, its area is 2k times the area of the original
figure.
3 cm
3 cm
6 cm
6 cm
4 in 2in
Jordan School District Page 382 Secondary Mathematics 2
The three dimensional figures below are dilations of one another, the length and the volume scale
factors of each figure are compared.
Original Drawing Dilated Drawing
Length Scale Factor
Dilated Length
Original Lengthk
Volume Scale Factor
3Dilated Volume
Original Volumek
32.5 3 1 7.5 ftV
35 6 2 60 ftV
2.52
5 360
8 27.5
By comparing one side of the dilated prism to the corresponding side of the original prism, we
find that the ratio is 2. Thus, the scale factor 2k . If we compare the volume of the dilated
prism to the volume of the original prism, then the ratio is 8. If we write this in terms of k, we 38 2 get or 3k .
Original Drawing Dilated Drawing Length Scale Factor
Dilated Length
Original Lengthk
Volume Scale Factor
3Dilated Volume
Original Volumek
2 38 12 768 mV
2 32 3 12 mV
3 1
12 4
312 1 1
768 64 4
By comparing the radius of the dilated cylinder to the radius of the original cylinder, we find that
the ratio is 1
4. Thus, the scale factor
1
4k . If we compare the volume of the dilated cylinder to
the volume of the original cylinder, then the ratio is 1
64. If we write this in terms of k we get
31 1
64 4
or 3k .
Therefore, if a figure is dilated by a scale factor of k, its volume is 3k times the volume of the
original figure.
Jordan School District Page 383 Secondary Mathematics 2
Example 5:
The volume of a cylinder is 2V r h . If the original cylinder has radius 4 inches and height 10
inches how will the volume compare to a cylinder with the same radius but double the height?
Answer: 2V r h Find the volume of each cylinder.
2V r h
2
4 10V
16 10V
160 502.655V in3
For the original cylinder 4r and 10h .
2V r h
2
4 20V
16 20V
320 1005.310V in3
For the cylinder with double the height 4r
and 20h .
volume of original 160 1
volume of double height 320 2k
Compare the volumes.
The volume of the original cylinder is half the volume of the cylinder with double the height.
The dilation was applied to only one length of the cylinder so it doubled the volume. If the
dilation had been applied to the radius and the height, then the volume of the cylinder would
have been one-eighth of the cylinder that was double the radius and double the height.
Example 6:
If the original cylinder has radius 4 inches and height 10 inches how will the volume compare to
a cylinder with the same height but double the radius?
Answer: 2V r h Find the volume of each cylinder.
2V r h
2
4 10V
16 10V
160 502.655V in3
For the original cylinder 4r and 10h .
2V r h
2
8 10V
64 10V
640 2010.619V in3
For the cylinder with double the radius 8r
and 10h .
volume of original 160 1
volume of double height 640 4k
Compare the volumes.
The volume of the original cylinder is one-fourth the volume of the cylinder with double the
radius.
Jordan School District Page 384 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Use the trapezoids to answer questions 1–3.
1. What is the ratio of the perimeter of the larger trapezoid to the perimeter of the smaller
trapezoid?
2. What is the ratio of the area of the larger trapezoid to the area of the smaller trapezoid?
1 2
1
2A b b h
3. What is the scale factor k?
Use the prisms to answer questions 4–6.
4. What is the ratio of the surface area of the smaller prism to the surface area of the larger
prism? 2 2 2S lw lh wh
5. What is the ratio of the volume of the smaller prism to the volume of the larger prism?
6. What is the scale factor k?
7. You have a circular garden with an area of 32 square feet. If you increase the radius by a
scale factor of 5, what is the area of the new garden?
8. Jan made an enlargement of an old photograph. If the ratio of the dimensions of the
photograph to the enlargement is 1:3, what will be the ratio of the area of the original
photograph to the area of the enlargement?
9. You and your friend are both bringing cylindrical thermoses of water on a camping trip.
Your thermos is twice as big as his in all dimensions. How much more water will your
thermos carry than your friend’s? If your friend’s thermos has a diameter of 10 cm and a
height of 18 cm, what are the dimensions of your thermos?
Jordan School District Page 385 Secondary Mathematics 2
10. A cylinder has radius 3 cm and height 5 cm. How does the volume of the cylinder change if
both the radius and the height are doubled?
11. A pyramid has a square base with length 4 ft and a height of 7 ft. How does the volume of
the pyramid change if the base stays the same and the height is doubled?
12. A pyramid has a square base with length 4 ft and a height of 7 ft. How does the volume of
the pyramid change if the height stays the same and the side length of the base is doubled?
13. A movie theater sells a small cone of popcorn for $2. A medium cone of popcorn is sold for
$4 and comes in a similar container but it is twice as tall as the small container. Which
popcorn size gives you more for your money? Explain your answer.
14. Another movie theater sells a small cone of popcorn for $2. A medium cone of popcorn is
sold for $4 and comes in a similar container as the small but the radius is twice the length of
the small container. Which popcorn size gives you more for your money? Explain your
answer.
15. How much does the volume of a sphere increase if the radius is doubled? Tripled?
Jordan School District Page 387 Secondary Mathematics 2
Secondary Mathematics 2 Selected Answers
Unit 1 Cluster 1 (N.RN.1 and N.RN.2)
Practice Exercises A
1. 3/45 3. 1/3k
5. 2/3
1
y 7.
1
6
9. 1 11. 1/3y
Practice Exercises B
1. 3 48 3.
9 5a
5. 3k 7.
2 23 64 4
9. 5 2x
Practice Exercises C
1. 1/311 3. 8/3
10
5. 7/6x 7. 5/7w
9. 2/5z
Practice Exercises D
1. 3 5p 3. 32 3xy
5. 5 3x y 7. 24 y y
9. 314 12m
Unit 1 Cluster 2 (N.RN.3)
Practice Exercises A
1. 2 7 3. 3
5. 39 2 7. 3 5 2 6
9. 12 2 4 3
Practice Exercises B
1. 256x 3. 38 10x
5. 32 20 7. 2
9. 10 13 5 20
11.
1111/28282 2y y
You Decide
1. yes, 145
3. yes, 72
5. no
7. When adding two rational numbers the
result is rational. When adding a
rational number and an irrational
number the result is irrational.
Unit 1 Cluster 4 (A.APR.1)
Practice Exercises A
1. not a polynomial; it has a variable raised
to a negative exponent
3. polynomial; degree 5, leading
coefficient 2
5. not a polynomial; there is a cube root of
a variable
Practice Exercises B
1. 24 2 4x x ; polynomial
3. 3 23 9 3x x x ; polynomial
5. 3 22 2 6x x x ; polynomial
7. 212 3u u ; polynomial
9. 2 4 21x x ; polynomial
11. 28 14 3x x ; polynomial
13. 24 28 49x x ; polynomial
15. 6 325 10 1x x ; polynomial
17. 3 22 5 12x x x ; polynomial
19. 4 3 22 2 3x x x x ; polynomial
You Decide
Polynomials are closed under addition,
subtraction and multiplication. All of the
answers to Practice Exercises B were
polynomials.
Jordan School District Page 388 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 2 Cluster 1 and 2 (F.IF.4, 5, 7 and
9)
Practice Exercises A
1. Domain: , ; Range: ,
3. Domain: 3, ; Range: 2,
5. Domain: x k where k is an integer and
0 k
Range: 0.1 10y k k is an integer and
0 k
Practice Exercises B
1. x-int: 5,0 ; y-int: 0,2
3. x-int: 6,0 , 5,0 ; y-int: 0, 30
5. x-int: 3,0 , 6,0 ; y-int: 0, 18
7. maximum 1,3
9. maximum 2, 2
11. minimum 3,12
Practice Exercises C
1. a. increasing ,
b. never decreasing
c. never constant
d. positive 6,
e. negative , 6
3. a. increasing 3,
b. never decreasing
c. never constant
d. positive 3,
e. never negative
5. a. increasing 4,
b. decreasing , 4
c. never constant
d. ,
e. never negative
Practice Exercises D
1. a. D: , ; R: ,
b. 2.5,0 , 0,5
c. no symmetry
d. inc. ,
e. positive 2.5, ; negative , 2.5
f. no relative extrema
g. lim ( )x
f x
; lim ( )x
f x
3. a. D: 2, ; R: 4,
b. 14,0 ; 0,5.3
c. no symmetry
d. inc. 2,
e. positive 14, ; negative 2,14
f. rel. min. 2, 4
g. lim ( )x
f x
5. a. D: , ; R: ,
b. 124,0 , 0,4
c. no symmetry
d. inc. ,
e. positive 124, ; negative
, 124
f. no relative extrema
g. lim ( )x
f x
; lim ( )x
f x
You Decide
Group A should win because the rocket
reached a maximum height of 487 feet and
was in the air for 11 seconds. Group B’s
rocket reached a maximum height of 450
feet and was in the air for 10.5 seconds.
Group C’s rocket reached a maximum height
of 394 feet and was in the air for 10 seconds.
Unit 2 F.IF.6 and F.LE.3
Practice Exercises A
1. 5
5. 6110
3. 6
7. 32,000
Jordan School District Page 389 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
Table 1: -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Table 3: 14, 1
2, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
Practice Exercises C
1. f(x)
3. h(x)
5. f(x)
Practice Exercises D
1.
You Decide
1. h(x) and r(x)
Factoring
Practice Exercises A
1. 24 12 16x x
3. 2 28 4 2x x x
5. 29 3 4 2x x
Practice Exercises B
1. 7 3x x
3. 1 2x x
5. 9 8x x
7. 4x y x y
9. 8 9x y x y
Practice Exercises C
1. 7 5 7 5x x
3. 3 2 3 2x x
5. 6 11 6 11x x
Practice Exercises D
1. 6 2 1x x
3. 2 3 4x x
5. 2 1 1x x
7. no factors
9. 4 3 3 2x x
Practice Exercises E
1. 2 5 5x x
3. 3 4 3x x
5. 5 8 5 8x y x y
7. 4 1y y
9. 2 3 2 3x x
11. 3 2 3 2x x
Unit 2 Cluster 2 F.IF.8, A.SSE.1,
A.SSE.3 Practice Exercises A
1. 0,0 7,0
3. 13,0 4,0
5. 6,0 1,0
7. 6,0 2,0
9. 0,0 3,0
11. 65,0 2,0
Practice Exercises B
1. 2 10 25x x
3. 2 22 121x x
5. 22 6 9x x
Practice Exercises C
1. 5, 3
3. 0,5
5. 2,3
Practice Exercises D
1. 5, 45 ; min
3. 2, 29 ; min
5. 4, 6 ; min
Practice Exercises E
1. 1, 11 ; min 3. 3, 15 ; min
You Decide
The zeros are 0,0 and 10,0 . The first zero
means that the rocket starts its launch from the
ground at time zero. The second zero represents
when the rocket comes back down to the ground 10
seconds later. The vertex is 5,400 . This means
that the rocket reaches its maximum height of 400
feet after 5 seconds.
Jordan School District Page 390 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises F
1. 2 seconds, 144 feet
3. 7 seconds
5. 4 seconds
Unit 6 Cluster 3 G.GPE.2 Practice Exercises A
1. 2120
y x
3. 2118
1.5y x
5. 21
63 2.5y x
Practice Exercises B
1. 2116
x y
3. 2112
x y
5. 21
84 4x y
Practice Exercises C
1. v: 5,1 , f: 6,1 , d: 4x
3. v: 5,1 , f: 6,1 , d: 4x
5. v: 2, 3 , f: 5, 3 , d: 1x
You Decide
(2, 1) is a point on the parabola because the
distance to the point from the focus is equal
to the distance from the point to the
directrix.
Unit 6 Cluster 3 G.GPE.3 (HONORS) Practice Exercises A
1. V: 4,0 4,0 ; F: 3,0 3,0
3. V: 0, 6 0,6 ; F: 0, 3 0,3
5. V: 0, 3 0,3 ; F: 0, 5 0, 5
7. 2 2
164 39
x y
9. 2 2
17 16
x y
11. 2 2
116 36
x y
Practice Exercises B
1. C: 2,1 V: 5,1 1,1 ;
F: 2 5,1 2 5,1
3. C: 3, 1 V: 3,3 3, 5 ;
F: 3, 1 7 3, 1 7
Jordan School District Page 391 Secondary Mathematics 2
5. C: 1, 3 V: 1,0 1, 6 ;
F: 1, 3 5 1, 3 5
7.
2 23 4
19 5
x y
9.
2 25 2
19 8
x y
11.
2 21 2
116 9
x y
Practice Exercises C
1. C: 0,0 V: 2,0 2,0
F: 2 5,0 2 5,0
A: 2 , 2y x y x
3. C: 0,0 V: 1,0 1,0
F: 10,0 10,0
A: 3 , 3y x y x
5. C: 0,0 V: 0, 4 0,4
F: 0, 2 5 0,2 5
A: 2 , 2y x y x
7. 2 2
11 3
y x
9. 2 2
125 24
y x
11. 2 2
116 25
x y
Practice Exercises D
1. C: 6,5 , V: 6, 4 6,0
F: 6,5 41 6,5 41
A: 5 54 4
6 5, 6 5y x y x
3. C: 6,5 , V: 6, 4 6,0
F: 6,5 41 6,5 41
A: 5 54 4
6 5, 6 5y x y x
Jordan School District Page 392 Secondary Mathematics 2
5. C: 4,6 , V: 4, 4 4,16
F: 4,6 2 30 4,6 2 30
A: 10 10
2 5 2 54 6, 4 6y x y x
7.
2 25 1
14 12
y x
9.
2 22 4
125 11
x y
11.
2 24 3
14 16
y x
Unit 2 Cluster 3 F.BF.1 Practice Exercises A
1. quadratic
function
3. exponential
function
5. exponential
function
Practice Exercises B
1. 2( ) 2.5 24.7 3f x x x
3. ( ) 119.60 1.096x
f x
Practice Exercises C
1. exponential, ( ) 49.34 0.85x
f x
3. quadratic, 2( ) 0.015 0.24 4.73f x x x
Practice Exercises D
1. 212 5 3x x 11.
1
4 3x
3. 212 8x x
5. 212 2 4x x
7. 3 236 21 20 12x x x
9. 4 3 2144 24 143 12 36x x x x
Practice Exercises E
1. 35
3. -31
5. 182
7. 54
9. -1
Practice Exercises G
1. 20.75 50 19,900P x x x ;
$750,000,000,000
3. 20.5 34 1213C x x x ; $2813
Unit 2 Cluster 4 F.BF.3 and F.BF.4 Practice Exercises A
1. shifted up 6 units, reflected over the line
6y
3. shifted 4 units to the right and a vertical
stretch by a factor of 3
5. axis of symmetry x = 1, vertex (1, -3)
D: , ; R: , 3
7. axis of symmetry x = -6, vertex (-6, -4)
D: , ; R: 4,
9. axis of symmetry x = 3, vertex (3, 0)
D: , ; R: 0,
Jordan School District Page 393 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
1. Shifted 5 units up and reflected over the
line y = 5.
3. Shifted 5 units down, 2 units to the left
and stretched by a factor of 3.
5. vertex: 2, 4 , D: , R: 4,
7. vertex: 0, 5 , D: , R: 5,
9. vertex: 4,0 , D: , R: 0,
Practice Exercises C
1. odd
3. even
5. neither
Practice Exercises D
1. neither
3. even
5. even
Practice Exercises E
1. 1,1 , 2,2 , 3,3 , 4,4 , 5,5
3. 6, 10 , 9,3 , 4, 1 , 1, 7 , 8,6
Practice Exercises F
1. 1 1 2
3 3f x x
3. 1 1 5
6 6f x x
5. 1 36
2f x x
7. 1 5
3
xf x
9. 1 9 7f x x
Unit 3 Cluster 1 A.SSE.2 Practice Exercises A
1. yes
3. no
5. yes
Practice Exercises B
1. 2 212 7 12 7x y x y
3. 4 3 4 310 11 10 11x y x y
5. 1/2 1/22 1 1x x
7. 5 53 3x y x y
9. 1/3 1/32 3 4x x
Practice Exercises C
1. 2u x ; 2 2
2 3 2 2x x
3. 2 5u x ; 2 2
2 5 5 5 2 5 4x x
5. 1/4u x ; 1/4 1/45 2x x
7. 1/2u x ; 1/2 1/22 5 2 5x x
9. 2 1u x ; 2 2
2 22 1 3 2 1 3x x
Unit 1 Cluster 3 N.CN.1 and N.CN.2 Practice Exercises A
1. 5 , 5i i
3. 12 , 12i i
5. 4 13, 4 13i i
Jordan School District Page 394 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
1. 13 7i
3. 3 2i
5. 40 10i
7. 15 9i
9. 9 17i
11. 90 22i
Unit 1 Cluster 3 HONORS N.CN.3 Practice Exercises A
1. 6 6i 3. 2 3i
Practice Exercises B
1. 35i
3 i
5. 2 2i
Practice Exercises C
1. 3 14 4
i
3. 3 i
5. 5 54 12
i
Unit 3 Cluster 3 and 4 A.REI.4 and
N.CN.7 Practice Exercises A
1. 5, 5
3. 3, 3
5. 2, 2
7. 3 6,3 6
9. 1 15, 1 15
Practice Exercises B
1. 2 3,2 3
3. 1, 15
5. 2, 4
Practice Exercises C
1. 2 real
3. 2 real
5. 1 real
Practice Exercises D
1. 5 109
6x
3. 14
1,3
x
5. 3 6x
7. 1 3
2
ix
9. 1 11
3
ix
Practice Exercises E
1. 5 7
4
ix
3. 2 2x i
5. 3 19
2
ix
7. 9
2x i
9. 1 7x i
11. 2x i
Unit 3 Cluster 5 HONORS N.CN.8 and
N.CN.9 Practice Exercises A
1. 3x i ; 3 3x i x i
3. 1x i ; 1 1x i x i
5. 2x i ; 2 2x i x i
7. , 2x i i ;
2 2x i x i x i x i
9. 1,x i ; 1 1x x x i x i
Unit 3 Cluster 3 A.CED.1 and A.CED.4 Practice Exercises A
1. width 12 in, length 15 in
3. height 30 in, base 50 in
5. 2 in
7. 14, 34
Practice Exercises B
1. 10.102 seconds
3. 227.5 meters
5. 22.0625 feet
7. 1.118 seconds
Practice Exercises C
1. , 10 8,
3. , 4 2,
5. 0,2
7. ,5
9. 12,3
11. 40,200
Jordan School District Page 395 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises D
1. 2 2b c a
3. 6
As
5. 3 9 8
2
Nk
7. 1 1 8
2
Nn
Unit 3 Cluster 3 Honors Practice Exercises A
1. 4, 1 3,
3. , 5 0,5
5. 1,
7. , 2 6,
9. , 3 2,
11. , 3 2,
You Decide
7.236 hours
Unit 3 Cluster 3 A.CED.2 Practice Exercises A
1. 2
2 3f x x
3. 2
3 1f x x
5. 1 7f x x x
7. 2
2 1f x x
9. 2
1 2f x x
11. 4f x x x
Practice Exercises B
1.
3.
5.
7.
9.
Unit 3 Cluster 6 A.REI.7 Practice Exercises A
1. 1,2 and 6, 3
3. 1,4 and 5114 4
,
5. 2,1
7. 0,0 and 1,1
9. 8,5 and 5, 8
11. 2,2
Unit 3 Cluster 6 Honors A.REI.8 and
A.REI.9 Practice Exercises A
1.
3 3 1 6
0 6 9 3
8 5 5 1
Jordan School District Page 396 Secondary Mathematics 2
3.
3 3 1 6
8 1 14 2
0 6 9 3
5. 2 1 2: 2 3R R R
Practice Exercises B
1. 1 0 3
0 1 5
; 3, 5
Practice Exercises C
1. 6,3,5
3. 1, 2,3
Practice Exercises D
1. 1, 2, 3x y z , consistent
3. inconsistent
5. 3, 2, 1, 1x y z w , consistent
Practice Exercises E
1.
15 4 5
12 3 4
4 1 1
3. 1 1 14 2 4
51 14 2 4
0 1 2
5. 71 14 2 4
31 14 2 4
1 1 3
Practice Exercises F
1. (1, 2, -1)
3. (2, -1, 5)
5. (2, 3, -5)
7. (1, 2, -1)
9. (-1, -2, 1)
Unit 2 Cluster 2b F.IF.8b, A.SSE.1b,
A.SSE.3c Practice Exercises A
1. $13,140.67
3. Analeigh should choose the
compounded monthly because after 3
years it is $14,795.11 while the
continuous is $14,737.67.
Practice Exercises B
1. 1.23% 3. $7,126.24
Practice Exercises C
1. 7.36 % 3. 24.79%
Practice Exercises D
1. a. 574,000,000 people
b. 0.026 people/year
c. 2,461,754,033 people
d. 40 years, 2014
Practice Exercises E
1. a. decrease 6.57%
b. 1400 0.934t
B t
c. 707 or 708 birds
d. 38.65 years
3. a. 124,009,000 1.031t
P t
b. 497,511,091 people
c. 15.66 years
You Decide
1.93%; the Utah population can’t grow
indefinitely at this rate. Students should
include ideas such as housing, jobs, access to
water etc. to justify their conclusion.
Unit 4 Cluster 1 S.CP.1 Practice Exercises A
1. A. {A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O,
P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z}
B. Answers will vary {F, I, R, S, T}
C. Answers will vary {A, L, S, T}
D. Answers will vary {A, F, I, L, R, S, T}
E. Answers will vary {S, T}
3.
A. {hearts: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K, A;
diamonds: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K,
A}
B. {diamonds: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K,
A}
C. {spades: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K, A;
clovers: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K, A}
D. the empty set
Jordan School District Page 397 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 4 Cluster 1–2 S.CP.2-7
Practice Exercises A
1. A. 25 1
50 2
B. 7
50
C. 10 1
50 5
D. 41
50
E. 12 6
50 25
F. 34 17
50 25
G. 15 3
50 10
H. 3
50
3. A. 7
10
B. 8 4
10 5
C. 5 1
10 2
D. 7
10
E. 8 4
10 5
Practice Exercises B
1. 54 27
100 50
3. 38 19
100 50
5. 27
100
Practice Exercises C
1. 100 1
200 2
3. 42 21
200 100
5. 9
200
7. 85 17
200 40
9. 0
200
Practice Exercises D 1. Yes, because
0.7 0.3 0.21P A P B P A B
3. A. answers will vary
B. answers will vary
C. answers will vary
D. none of the activities and gender are
independent
Practice Exercises E
1. 64
403
3. 146 73
394 197
5. 154 22
403 29
7. 0.5625
9. 0.4375
11. no, one is
0.5625 and the
other is 0.45
Practice Exercises F
1.Yes,
grades malegrades 0.52
male
PP
P
3. Yes, P cold|vitamin C 0.122 while
P cold|no vitamin C 0.221
Unit 4 Clusters 2-3 Honors S.CP.8-9,
and S.MD.6-7 Practice Exercises A
1. A.
B. 1
12
C. 1
12
D. 0
12
Practice Exercises B
1. 8 7 10 9 7
18 17 16 15 102
3. 33 32 16
55 54 45
Jordan School District Page 398 Secondary Mathematics 2
5. A. 0.15 B. 0.2
C. 0.45 D. 0.2
Practice Exercises C
1. 336
3. 1
5. 4,989,600
7. 362,880
9. 210
Practice Exercises D
1. 462
3. 43,680
5. 3060
7. 15,504
You Decide
A. 44,878,080
B. 40,320
C. 5040
Practice Exercises E
1. 8 3
22 3
2
55
C
C
3. 14 3 10 2
39 5
20
703
C C
C
5. 12 3 6 2
18 5
275
714
C C
C
Practice Exercises F
1. 268
0.825325
3. No, a student is more likely to score above
the minimum requirement if he or she takes
the prep class.
Unit 5 Cluster 1 G.SRT.1, G.SRT.2, and
G.SRT.3 Practice Exercises A
1.
3.
5.
7.
9. false
11. false
Practice Exercises B
1. ABC DEF 3. KNO KLM
5. QRU STU 7. DGH DEF
9. GKJ IKH 11. No
Practice Exercises C
1. JKL NML ; 7x , 6ML ,
10LK
3. JKM NOP ; 2.8x , 1.8KM ,
4.8OP
Unit 5 Cluster 2 G.CO.9 Practice Exercises A
1. Vertical Angles: 1 and 4 ,
2 and 3 , 5 and 8 , 6 and 7
Corresponding Angles: 1 and 5 ,
2 and 6 , 3 and 7 , 4 and 8
Alternate Interior Angles: 3 and 6 ,
4 and 5
Jordan School District Page 399 Secondary Mathematics 2
3. Vertical Angles: 2 and 8 ,
3 and 9 , 4 and 6 , 5 and 7 ,
10 and 16 , 11 and 17 ,
12 and 14 , 13 and 15
Corresponding Angles: 2 and 10 ,
3 and 11 , 4 and 12 ,
5 and 13 , 6 and 14 ,
7 and 15 , 8 and 16 ,
9 and 17
Alternate Interior Angles: 8 and 10 ,
6 and 12 , 9 and 11 ,
7 and 13
5. We are given that l m . We know that
2 3 because vertical angles are congruent.
We know that 3 7 because corresponding
angles are congruent. We can conclude that
2 7 because of the transitive property of
equality.
7. We are given that l m . We know that
2 4 180m m because they form a
straight angle. We know that 4 8m m
because corresponding angles are congruent.
We can conclude that 2 8 180m m
because of the substitution property of equality.
Practice Exercises B
1. 1x
3. Statements Reasons
1. PA PB
PM AB
1. Given
2. 90
90
m PMA
m PMB
2. Definition of
perpendicular
3. m PMA m PMB 3. substitution property
of equality
4. m PAM m PBM
4. base angles of an
isosceles triangle are
congruent
5. PAM PBM 5. AAS congruence
6. AM BM 6. CPCTC
7. PM is the
perpendicular bisector
of AB
7. definition of
perpendicular bisector
Unit 5 Cluster 2 G.CO.10 Practice Exercises A
1. 106
3. 1 128m , 2 52m , 3 68m ,
4 60m , 5 116m
5. 6
7. 39, 39
9. 9
11. 6
13. a. 2.5,0D , 6.5,0E , 4, 4F
b. the medians intersect at the point 8 4
,3 3
equations: 2 4y x , 8 52
23 23y x ,
8 20
31 31y x
Unit 5 Cluster 2 G.CO.11 Practice Exercises A
1. a. Given b. Definition of consecutive
angles c. L and M are consecutive
angles d. J and K are supplementary
e. J L f. supplementary angles of the
same angle are congruent.
3. a. 55
18.33
b b. 12y 4z c. 22x
5. a. 4, 4, 4x QS RT
b. 5 29 29
, ,3 3 3
x QS RT
c. 3, 7, 7x QS RT
Unit 5 Cluster 3 G.SRT.4, G.SRT.5 Practice Exercises A
1. 128
, 16.53
x y
3. 8x
5. Yes, the scale factor for corresponding
parts of HNJ to HMK is 1:3.
Jordan School District Page 400 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises B
1. 3 2
3. 60
5. 1345 36.7
Unit 5 Cluster 4 G.GPE.6 Practice Exercises A
1. 3, 2
3. 2, 2
5. 2.6, 1.2
Unit 5 Cluster 5 G.SRT.6, G.SRT.7,
G.SRT.8 Practice Exercises A
1. 4
sin5
, 3
cos5
, 4
tan3
, 5
csc4
,
5sec
3 ,
3cot
4
3. 7
sin170
, 11
cos170
, 7
tan11
,
170csc
7 ,
170sec
11 ,
11cot
7
5. 9
sin13
, 2 22
cos13
, 9
tan2 22
,
13csc
9 ,
13sec
2 22 ,
2 22cot
9
7. 0.156
9. 1.111
11. 3.078
Practice Exercises B
1. 30
3. 80.538
5. 48.590
7. 53.130
9. 32.471
11. 43.813
Practice Exercises C
1. 60 3. 67
Practice Exercises D
1. 649.721 feet
3. 16.960
5. 437.66 feet
7. 8,001.037 feet
9. 19.151 feet
Unit 5 Cluster 5 Honors N.CN.3-
N.CN.6 Practice Exercises A
1. 2,3
3. 1, 2
5. 1, 1
7. 13 9. 5 2.236
Practice Exercises B
1. 13 cos112.620 sin112.620i
3. 2 cos90 sin90i
5. 0, 3 7.
3 2 3 2,
2 2
9. a. 10,24
b. 26 cos67.380 sin67.380i
c. 10,24
d. they are the same
Practice Exercises C
1. 9i
3. 9 6i
5. 15 11i
#1#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
Jordan School District Page 401 Secondary Mathematics 2
7. 1 12i
9. 4 15i
11. 1 3i
13. 13 11i
Practice Exercises D
1. 16 16i
3. 119 120i 5. 8 8 3i
Practice Exercises E
1. 5
12
i
, 17 4.123
3. 5 5
2 2i
, 586 24.207
5. 9
82
i
, 29 5.385
Unit 5 Cluster 6 F.TF.8 Practice Exercises A
1. 3
sin5
, 4
cos5
3. 15
sin4
, 15
tan1
5. 12
cos13
, 5
tan12
7. 8
sin89
, 5
cos89
9. 1
cos2
, tan 3
Unit 5 Honors Unit Circle Practice Exercises A
1. 2
2 3. 3
5. 1
2 7. 0
9. 3
3 11.
2
2
13. -2 15. 3
17. -1 19. -2
21. 0 23. -2
25. 225 , 315 27. 135 , 315
29. 150 , 210 31. 150 , 210
33. 30 , 210 35. 180
Practice Exercises B
1. i 3. d
5. b 7. e
9. h 11. q
13. neither 15. positive
17. negative 19. negative
21. neither 23. positive
Jordan School District Page 402 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Honors Prove Trigonometric
Identities Practice Exercises A
1. sec cot csc
1 coscsc
cos sin
1csc
sin
csc csc
x x x
xx
x x
xx
x x
3.
tan cos sin
tan cos sin
sincos sin
cos
sin sin
x x x
x x x
xx x
x
x x
5.
2
2
2
csc sin cot cos
1 sincot cos
sin sin
1 sincot cos
sin
coscot cos
sin
coscos cot cos
sin
cot cos cot cos
x x x x
xx x
x x
xx x
x
xx x
x
xx x x
x
x x x x
7. cot sec sin 1
cos 1sin 1
sin cos
cos 1sin 1
cos sin
1 1
x x x
xx
x x
xx
x x
9.
2 2
2 2
2
2
sin 1 cot 1
sin csc 1
1sin 1
sin
1 1
x x
x x
xx
11.
2
2
1 sincos cot
sin
coscos cot
sin
coscos cot cos
sin
sin tan cos cot
xx x
x
xx x
x
xx x x
x
x x x x
13.
2
2
2
2
sec sec sin cos
sec 1 sin cos
sec cos cos
1cos cos
cos
cos cos
x x x x
x x x
x x x
x xx
x x
15.
2 2
2 2
cos cos 1 sin 1 sin2sec
1 sin cos cos 1 sin
cos 1 2sin sin2sec
1 sin cos 1 sin cos
cos 1 2sin sin2sec
1 sin cos
1 1 2sin2sec
1 sin cos
2 2sin2sec
1 sin cos
2 1 sin2sec
1 sin cos
x x x xx
x x x x
x x xx
x x x x
x x xx
x x
xx
x x
xx
x x
xx
x x
22sec
cos
2sec 2sec
xx
x x
Practice Exercises B
1. 30 , 90 , 150 , 270
3. 0 , 90 , 180 , 270 , 360
5. 60 , 120 , 240 , 300
7. 60 , 300
9. 0 , 180 , 360
Jordan School District Page 403 Secondary Mathematics 2
Unit 5 Cluster 6 Honors F.TF.9 Practice Exercises A
1. 6 2
4
3. 3 3
3 3
5. 2 6
4
7. 2 6
4
9. 3 3
3 3
11. 6 2
4
Practice Exercises B
1. 24
25 3.
24
7
5. 119
169 7.
240
289
9. 240
161 11.
2 2 5
55
13. 1 26
2626 15.
1
5
17. 5 5 34
3434
Unit 6 Cluster 1 G.C.1-4 Practice Exercises A
1. BD or CG 3. CG
5. G 7. CAE or GAE
9. radius 11. tangent line
13. radius 15. center
Practice Exercises B
1. 3 6 3 6 3
, ,5 10 5 10 5
Practice Exercises C
1. 65 3. 115
5. 65 7. 115
9. 115 11. 60
13. 25 15. 30
17. 40
19. 1 27.5m , 2 27.5m , 3 30m
Practice Exercises D
1. 40 3. 120
5. 41 7. 16
3
9. 7.5 11. 98.5
Practice Exercises E
1. 10
3. 3
5. 3
Practice Exercises F
1. 20 3. 130
5. 5
Practice Exercises G
1. 1 64m , 2 26m , 3 45m ,
4 45m
3. 1 30m , 2 30m , 3 60m ,
4 30m , 5 60m , 6 60m ,
7 30m , 8 60m
5. 135m S , 80m T
Unit 6 Cluster 2 G.C.5 Practice Exercises A
1. 22
7.679 yds9
3. 166
11.589 ft45
5. 49
15.394 cm10
Practice Exercises B
1. 3
4 3.
1
4
5. 11
6
Practice Exercises C
1. 22
7.679 yds9 3.
16611.589 ft
45
5. 49
15.394 cm10
Jordan School District Page 404 Secondary Mathematics 2
Practice Exercises D
1. 22 6.283 ft 3. 288.378 in
3
5. 22539.270 m
2
7. 25
5.236 mm3
9. 22721.206 in
4
Unit 6 Cluster 3 G.GPE.1 Practice Exercises A
1. center (0, 0), radius 6
3. 2 2 49x y
Practice Exercises B
1. center (2, 3) radius 4
3. center (-5, 6) radius 2
5. center (10, -21) radius 14
7. 2 2
8 6 100x y
9. 2 2
4 4 29x y
Practice Exercises C
1. center (2, 3) radius 5
3. center (-3, 1) radius 5
Challenge: center 32, 2 radius 1
2
Unit 6 Cluster 4 G.GPE.4 Practice Exercises A
1. 0EF GHm m , 4.123EF GHd d
3. 2
3AB CDm m , 4BC ADm m ,
3.606AB CDd d , 4.123BC ADd d
5. 0AB CDm m , 4BC ADm m ,
4AB CDd d , 4.123BC ADd d
7. 2 22 4x y
22
2
3 2 3 4
1 3 4
4 4
9. 2 2
1 2 4 3 1 20d which
doesn’t equal
2 2
2 2 3 3 5 29d
11. there is only one point of intersection at
(1, 9)
Unit 6 Cluster 5 G.GMD.1-3 Practice Exercises A
1. 312 37.699 ft 3. 3588 1847.256 m
5. 375 in 7. 396 301.593 cm
9. 3400 1256.637 cm 11. 34000
34188.790 cm
13. 360 188.496 ft 15. 318 56.55 in
17. 348 ft 19. 3333.038 in
Practice Exercises B
1. 30 5
18 3 3.
5
3k
5. 81 27
192 64 7. 800 square feet
9. 8 times as much, 20 cm diameter and 36
cm height
11. 2 times as much volume
13. They are the same. The larger popcorn
has twice as much popcorn as the
smaller popcorn for twice the price.
15. 8 times as much volume, 27 times as
much volume